Sei sulla pagina 1di 520

RAN16.

0 Optional Feature Description

RAN16.0 Optional Feature


Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

Contents

Contents
1 Voice & Other Services..................................................................1
1.1 VoIP................................................................................................................................................................................1
1.1.1 WRFD-010617 VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+...................................................................................................................1
1.1.2 WRFD-01061701 RAB Mapping................................................................................................................................3
1.1.3 WRFD-01061703 Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA..................................................................................4
1.1.4 WRFD-010618 IMS Signaling over HSPA.................................................................................................................6
1.1.5 WRFD-010619 CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+............................................................................................................8
1.1.6 WRFD-140224 Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM........................................................................................................9
1.1.7 WRFD-150215 SRVCC from LTE to UMTS with PS Handover.............................................................................10
1.2 Crystal Voice.................................................................................................................................................................12
1.2.1 WRFD-010613 AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band).................................................................................12
1.2.2 WRFD-020701 AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control...........................................................................................14
1.2.3 WRFD-011600 TFO/TrFO........................................................................................................................................16
1.2.4 WRFD-140201 AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA.........................................................................17
1.2.5 WRFD-160204 CS Voice Precise Power Control.....................................................................................................19
1.3 Cell Broadcast..............................................................................................................................................................21
1.3.1 WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Service.....................................................................................................................21
1.3.2 WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast................................................................................................................22
1.3.3 WRFD-020127 Warning of Disaster.........................................................................................................................23
1.4 MBMS..........................................................................................................................................................................25
1.4.1 WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package..........................................................................................................25
1.4.2 WRFD-01061601 MBMS Broadcast Mode..............................................................................................................27
1.4.3 WRFD-01061602 MBMS Admission Control..........................................................................................................28
1.4.4 WRFD-01061603 MBMS Load Control...................................................................................................................29
1.4.5 WRFD-01061604 MBMS Soft/Selective Combining...............................................................................................30
1.4.6 WRFD-01061605 MBMS Transport Resource Management...................................................................................32
1.4.7 WRFD-01061606 Streaming Service on MBMS......................................................................................................33
1.4.8 WRFD-01061607 MBMS 2 Channels per Cell.........................................................................................................34
1.4.9 WRFD-01061608 16/32/64/128kbps Channel Rate on MBMS................................................................................35
1.4.10 WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2..............................................................................................................................36
1.4.11 WRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode...........................................................................................37
1.4.12 WRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA..........................................................................................................38
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

Contents

1.4.13 WRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancement..............................................................................................39


1.4.14 WRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users........................................41
1.4.15 WRFD-010627 FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS......................................................................................42
1.4.16 WRFD-010626 MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)......................44
1.4.17 WRFD-010624 MBMS 8 Channels per Cell...........................................................................................................45
1.4.18 WRFD-010625 256kbps Channel Rate on MBMS.................................................................................................46
1.4.19 WRFD-010628 MBMS 16 Channels per Cell.........................................................................................................47
1.4.20 WRFD-010661 MBMS over Iur.............................................................................................................................47
1.4.21 WRFD-010662 Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH.........................................................................................49
1.4.22 WRFD-010663 MSCH Scheduling.........................................................................................................................50
1.4.23 WRFD-010665 MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics..................................................................................51
1.5 LCS...............................................................................................................................................................................53
1.5.1 WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS................................................................................................53
1.5.2 WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS...........................................................................................................................55
1.5.3 WRFD-020804 LCS Classified Zones......................................................................................................................56
1.5.4 WRFD-020805 LCS over Iur....................................................................................................................................57
1.5.5 WRFD-020807 Iupc Interface for LCS service.........................................................................................................61
1.6 PTT...............................................................................................................................................................................63
1.6.1 WRFD-020134 Push to Talk.....................................................................................................................................63

2 Data Services.............................................................................. 66
2.1 HSDPA 7.2Mbps..........................................................................................................................................................66
2.1.1 WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package..........................................................................................................66
2.1.2 WRFD-01061017 QPSK Modulation.......................................................................................................................68
2.1.3 WRFD-01061001 15 Codes per Cell........................................................................................................................69
2.1.4 WRFD-01061018 Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex......................................................................................70
2.1.5 WRFD-01061009 HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR and PF).............................................................71
2.1.6 WRFD-01061005 HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation......................72
2.1.7 WRFD-01061004 HSDPA Power Control................................................................................................................74
2.1.8 WRFD-01061003 HSDPA Admission Control.........................................................................................................76
2.1.9 WRFD-01061020 Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service...........................................................77
2.1.10 WRFD-01061019 HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation..........................................................................................78
2.1.11 WRFD-01061010 HSDPA Flow Control................................................................................................................80
2.1.12 WRFD-01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management..................................................................................................81
2.1.13 WRFD-01061014 HSDPA Transport Resource Management.................................................................................83
2.1.14 WRFD-01061008 Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSDPA...............................................................85
2.1.15 WRFD-01061002 HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28.....................................................................................................86
2.1.16 WRFD-01061015 HSDPA 1.8Mbps per User.........................................................................................................88
2.1.17 WRFD-01061016 16 HSDPA Users per Cell..........................................................................................................89
2.1.18 WRFD-010620 HSDPA 3.6Mbps per User.............................................................................................................90
2.1.19 WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation................................................................................................................91
2.1.20 WRFD-010631 Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB.................................................................................92
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

Contents

2.1.21 WRFD-010621 HSDPA 7.2Mbps per User.............................................................................................................93


2.1.22 WRFD-010622 32 HSDPA Users per Cell..............................................................................................................94
2.1.23 WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package............................................................................................................95
2.1.24 WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR..........................................................................................96
2.1.25 WRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition.............................................................................................................98
2.1.26 WRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD............................................................................................................................100
2.1.27 WRFD-01061113 HS-DPCCH Preamble Support................................................................................................102
2.1.28 WRFD-010630 Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA.............................................................................................103
2.1.29 WRFD-010651 HSDPA over Iur...........................................................................................................................105
2.1.30 WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA........................................................................................................................106
2.1.31 WRFD-010623 64 HSDPA Users per Cell............................................................................................................107
2.1.32 WRFD-030010 CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target.....................................................................108
2.1.33 WRFD-030004 Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate...........................................................................110
2.1.34 WRFD-140221 HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location.................................................................................111
2.2 HSDPA 14.4Mbps.......................................................................................................................................................113
2.2.1 WRFD-010650 HSDPA 13.976Mbps per User.......................................................................................................113
2.3 HSDPA+ 21/28Mbps..................................................................................................................................................114
2.3.1 WRFD-010681 HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User..............................................................................................114
2.3.2 WRFD-010683 Downlink 64QAM.........................................................................................................................115
2.3.3 WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2.................................................................................................................116
2.3.4 WRFD-010680 HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User..............................................................................................118
2.3.5 WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA....................................................................................................................................119
2.3.6 WRFD-010713 Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier..........121
2.3.7 WRFD-010684 2*2 MIMO.....................................................................................................................................122
2.3.8 WRFD-030011 MIMO Prime..................................................................................................................................124
2.3.9 WRFD-010700 Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier......................................................126
2.3.10 WRFD-010704 Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection.......................................................................................128
2.4 HSDPA+ 42Mbps.......................................................................................................................................................129
2.4.1 WRFD-010689 HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User.............................................................................................129
2.4.2 WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO......................................................................................................................130
2.5 HSDPA+ 84Mbps.......................................................................................................................................................132
2.5.1 WRFD-010703 HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User...........................................................................................132
2.5.2 WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA+MIMO......................................................................................................................133
2.6 HSDPA+ Flexible Carrier...........................................................................................................................................135
2.6.1 WRFD-150208 Flexible Dual Carrier HSDPA.......................................................................................................135
2.7 HSUPA 1.44Mbps......................................................................................................................................................137
2.7.1 WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package........................................................................................................137
2.7.2 WRFD-01061201 HSUPA UE Category Support...................................................................................................138
2.7.3 WRFD-01061209 HSUPA HARQ and Fast UL Scheduling in NodeB..................................................................140
2.7.4 WRFD-01061202 HSUPA Admission Control.......................................................................................................142
2.7.5 WRFD-01061203 HSUPA Power Control..............................................................................................................144
2.7.6 WRFD-01061204 HSUPA Mobility Management..................................................................................................145
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

Contents

2.7.7 WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC...........................................................................................................................148


2.7.8 WRFD-01061207 HSUPA Transport Resource Management.................................................................................149
2.7.9 WRFD-01061206 Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSUPA...............................................................152
2.7.10 WRFD-01061210 HSUPA 1.44Mbps per User.....................................................................................................153
2.7.11 WRFD-01061211 20 HSUPA Users per Cell........................................................................................................154
2.7.12 WRFD-01061212 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion.............................................................155
2.7.13 WRFD-010632 Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA.............................................................................................156
2.7.14 WRFD-010635 HSUPA over Iur...........................................................................................................................157
2.8 HSUPA 5.74Mbps......................................................................................................................................................159
2.8.1 WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2.............................................................................................................................159
2.8.2 WRFD-01061401 HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)..............................................160
2.8.3 WRFD-01061402 Enhanced Fast UL Scheduling...................................................................................................161
2.8.4 WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI........................................................................................................................163
2.8.5 WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2ms/10ms TTI Handover.............................................................................................164
2.8.6 WRFD-01061405 HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User.......................................................................................................166
2.8.7 WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA..........................................................................................................................167
2.9 HSUPA+ 11.5Mbps....................................................................................................................................................168
2.9.1 WRFD-010698 HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User..............................................................................................168
2.9.2 WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM....................................................................................................................................169
2.9.3 WRFD-140204 DC-HSUPA....................................................................................................................................170
2.9.4 WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 Improvement..............................................................................................................172
2.9.5 WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting.......................................................................................................................174
2.10 HSUPA+ 23Mbps.....................................................................................................................................................175
2.10.1 WRFD-140203 HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User..............................................................................................175

3 Radio & Performance.................................................................177


3.1 Coverage Enhancement..............................................................................................................................................177
3.1.1 WRFD-010203 Transmit Diversity.........................................................................................................................177
3.1.2 WRFD-010209 4-Antenna Receive Diversity.........................................................................................................179
3.1.3 WRFD-021308 Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km...........................................................................................180
3.1.4 WRFD-021309 Improved Downlink Coverage......................................................................................................181
3.1.5 WRFD-020138 HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation............................................................182
3.1.6 WRFD-010206 High Speed Access........................................................................................................................183
3.1.7 WRFD-021350 Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell.....................................185
3.1.8 WRFD-150237 Horizon Beam-Width Adjustment.................................................................................................187
3.1.9 WRFD-150238 Azimuth Adjustment......................................................................................................................188
3.2 Uplink Capacity Improvement...................................................................................................................................190
3.2.1 WRFD-140216 Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration...........................................................................190
3.2.2 WRFD-140217 Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold...................................192
3.2.3 WRFD-010686 CPC - DTX / DRX.........................................................................................................................193
3.2.4 WRFD-010687 CPC - HS-SCCH less operation....................................................................................................194
3.2.5 WRFD-010702 Enhanced DRX..............................................................................................................................196
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

Contents

3.2.6 WRFD-010701 Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH....................................................................................................197


3.2.7 WRFD-140211 Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment..................................................................................................199
3.2.8 WRFD-010690 TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage...........................................................................201
3.2.9 WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE..................................................................................................................................202
3.2.10 WRFD-010712 Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA........................................204
3.2.11 WRFD-020136 Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA...................................................................................205
3.2.12 WRFD-020137 Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation..........................................207
3.2.13 WRFD-010210 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (CCPIC).....................................................208
3.2.14 WRFD-140202 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)....................................................209
3.2.15 WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation.........................................................................................211
3.2.16 WRFD-010640 Uplink Macro Diversity Intelligent Receiving............................................................................213
3.2.17 WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission...................................................................................................214
3.2.18 WRFD-140222 Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions.................................................215
3.2.19 WRFD-010634 60 HSUPA Users per Cell............................................................................................................217
3.2.20 WRFD-010639 96 HSUPA Users per Cell............................................................................................................217
3.2.21 WRFD-010670 128 HSUPA Users per Cell..........................................................................................................218
3.2.22 WRFD-150206 Turbo IC.......................................................................................................................................220
3.2.23 WRFD-150222 HSUPA Time Division Scheduling..............................................................................................221
3.2.24 WRFD-160201 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 3)....................................................223
3.2.25 WRFD-160202 Flexible Power Control for Uplink Low Data Rate Transmission..............................................224
3.2.26 WRFD-160213 Turbo IC Phase 2.........................................................................................................................226
3.3 Downlink Capacity Improvement..............................................................................................................................228
3.3.1 WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced CELL-FACH................................................................................................228
3.3.2 WRFD-140215 Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period............................................................229
3.3.3 WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA Users per Cell..............................................................................................................231
3.3.4 WRFD-010654 128 HSDPA Users per Cell............................................................................................................232
3.3.5 WRFD-150235 DPCH Maximum Power Restriction.............................................................................................233
3.3.6 WRFD-150236 Load Based Dynamic Adjustment of PCPICH..............................................................................234
3.3.7 WRFD-160206 RB Parking....................................................................................................................................235
3.3.8 WRFD-160208 160 HSPA Users per Cell...............................................................................................................236
3.3.9 WRFD-160209 192 HSPA Users per Cell...............................................................................................................237
3.4 Smartphone.................................................................................................................................................................238
3.4.1 WRFD-020500 Enhanced Fast Dormancy..............................................................................................................238
3.4.2 WRFD-140206 Layered Paging in URA_PCH.......................................................................................................241
3.4.3 WRFD-150205 Layered Paging in Idle Mode........................................................................................................242
3.5 Radio Resource...........................................................................................................................................................244
3.5.1 WRFD-021001 Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier...........................................................................244
3.5.2 WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB >= 2)........................................................................................245
3.5.3 WRFD-01061501 Combination of Two PS Services..............................................................................................246
3.5.4 WRFD-01061502 Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services.............................................................247
3.5.5 WRFD-01061503 Combination of Three PS Services............................................................................................248
3.5.6 WRFD-01061504 Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services..........................................................249
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

Contents

3.5.7 WRFD-01061505 Combination of Four PS Services.............................................................................................250


3.5.8 WRFD-020103 Inter Frequency Load Balance.......................................................................................................252
3.5.9 WRFD-020114 Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC).....................................................................................253
3.5.10 WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band Networking Management.......................................................................255
3.5.11 WRFD-020160 Enhanced Multiband Management..............................................................................................258
3.5.12 WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package..........................................................................................................260
3.5.13 WRFD-02040001 Intra System Direct Retry........................................................................................................261
3.5.14 WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry........................................................................................................262
3.5.15 WRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect..............................................................................................................263
3.5.16 WRFD-02040004 Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup...........................................................264
3.5.17 WRFD-02040005 Inter-Frequency Redirection Based on Distance.....................................................................265
3.5.18 WRFD-020402 Measurement Based Direct Retry................................................................................................266
3.5.19 WRFD-020120 Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup...................................................268
3.5.20 WRFD-020111 One Tunnel...................................................................................................................................269
3.5.21 WRFD-140213 Intelligent Access Class Control..................................................................................................271
3.5.22 WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)...............................................................................................272
3.5.23 WRFD-020302 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage..................................................................275
3.5.24 WRFD-020304 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS....................................................................277
3.5.25 WRFD-020605 SRNS Relocation Introduction Package......................................................................................278
3.5.26 WRFD-02060501 SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)......................................................................................279
3.5.27 WRFD-02060502 SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover...................................................................................281
3.5.28 WRFD-02060503 SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update...............................................................................282
3.5.29 WRFD-02060504 Lossless SRNS Relocation......................................................................................................283
3.5.30 WRFD-150201 Macro & Micro Co-carrier Uplink Interference Control.............................................................284
3.5.31 WRFD-15020101 Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Redirection..................................................................288
3.5.32 WRFD-15020102 Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Handover.....................................................................289
3.5.33 WRFD-15020103 Micro Cell Dynamic Rx Sensitivity Control...........................................................................290
3.5.34 WRFD-150232 Multiband Direct Retry Based on UE Location..........................................................................292
3.5.35 WRFD-140225 Narrowband Interference Suppression........................................................................................293
3.5.36 WRFD-150246 Service Steering and Load Sharing in CELL_FACH State.........................................................295
3.5.37 WRFD-160214 Load-based Intelligent State Transition.......................................................................................296
3.6 GSM/UMTS Interoperability.....................................................................................................................................297
3.6.1 WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g.......................................297
3.6.2 WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g............................................................................299
3.6.3 WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.........................................................................300
3.6.4 WRFD-070007 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.........................................................................303
3.6.5 WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage......................................................................................305
3.6.6 WRFD-020309 Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS........................................................................................307
3.6.7 WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.........................................................................................................309
3.6.8 WRFD-02030801 NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)....................................................................................310
3.6.9 WRFD-02030802 PS Handover Between UMTS and GPRS.................................................................................311
3.6.10 WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.......................................................................................312
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

Contents

3.6.11 WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load...........................................................................................314


3.6.12 WRFD-020401 Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance...................................................................................315
3.6.13 WRFD-020310 3G/2G Common Load Management...........................................................................................316
3.7 UMTS/LTE Interoperability.......................................................................................................................................318
3.7.1 WRFD-020126 Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase1...................................................................................318
3.7.2 WRFD-020129 Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE.........................................................320
3.7.3 WRFD-140218 Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE.........................................................................321
3.7.4 WRFD-150216 Load Based PS Redirection from UMTS to LTE..........................................................................323
3.7.5 WRFD-150217 Load Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE.............................................................................324
3.7.6 WRFD-150219 Coverage Based PS Redirection from UMTS to LTE...................................................................325
3.7.7 WRFD-150220 Coverage Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE......................................................................327
3.7.8 WRFD-150231 RIM Based UMTS Target Cell Selection for LTE.........................................................................329
3.7.9 WRFD-140226 Fast Return from UMTS to LTE....................................................................................................330
3.8 QoS.............................................................................................................................................................................331
3.8.1 WRFD-010505 Queuing and Pre-Emption.............................................................................................................331
3.8.2 WRFD-021103 Access Class Restriction................................................................................................................333
3.8.3 WRFD-050424 Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources................................................................335
3.8.4 WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight.................................................................................338
3.8.5 WRFD-020131 Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness.........................................................................340
3.8.6 WRFD-011502 Active Queue Management (AQM)...............................................................................................342
3.8.7 WRFD-010507 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control.........................................................................................343
3.8.8 WRFD-020130 Videophone Service Restriction....................................................................................................346
3.8.9 WRFD-020135 Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management.......................................................................347
3.8.10 WRFD-020123 TCP Accelerator...........................................................................................................................348
3.8.11 WRFD-020128 Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service.............................................................................351
3.8.12 WRFD-020132 Web Browsing Acceleration........................................................................................................352
3.8.13 WRFD-020133 P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour.....................................................................353
3.8.14 WRFD-140205 Voice Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs..........................................................355
3.8.15 WRFD-150204 Platinum User Prioritizing...........................................................................................................356
3.8.16 WRFD-150233 Differentiated Service Based on Resource Reservation..............................................................357
3.8.17 WRFD-150252 Video Pacing................................................................................................................................359
3.8.18 WRFD-150253 VoIP Application Management....................................................................................................360
3.8.19 WRFD-150254 Differentiated Service Based on Application Resource Reservation..........................................361
3.8.20 WRFD-150255 Differentiated Service Based on Terminal...................................................................................363
3.9 System Efficiency Improvement................................................................................................................................364
3.9.1 WRFD-020124 Uplink Flow Control of User Plane...............................................................................................364
3.9.2 WRFD-140212 CE Overbooking............................................................................................................................365
3.9.3 WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management.............................................................................................367
3.9.4 WRFD-141201 RNC User Plane and Control Plane Dynamic Sharing..................................................................369
3.9.5 WRFD-150242 HSDPA Scheduler Pool.................................................................................................................370
3.9.6 WRFD-151210 Inter-Dependence of BBU Uplink Resource.................................................................................371
3.9.7 WRFD-160205 CE Efficiency Improvement for HSUPA TTI 2ms........................................................................373
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

Contents

3.10 SON..........................................................................................................................................................................374
3.10.1 WRFD-151201 Adaptive RACH...........................................................................................................................374
3.10.2 WRFD-151202 FACH Pool...................................................................................................................................376
3.10.3 WRFD-151203 Camping Strategy Switch for Mass Event...................................................................................377

4 Networking & Transmission & Security.......................................379


4.1 RAN Sharing..............................................................................................................................................................379
4.1.1 WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package..............................................................................................379
4.1.2 WRFD-02130401 Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator.........................................................................................381
4.1.3 WRFD-02130402 Flexible Network Architecture..................................................................................................382
4.1.4 WRFD-02130403 Mobility Control and Service Differentiation............................................................................385
4.1.5 WRFD-02130404 Independent License Control.....................................................................................................387
4.1.6 WRFD-02130405 Independent Cell-level FM/PM/CM..........................................................................................388
4.1.7 WRFD-02130406 Transmission Recourse Sharing on Iub/Iur Interface................................................................390
4.1.8 WRFD-021305 RAN Sharing Phase 2....................................................................................................................391
4.1.9 WRFD-02130501 Dedicated Iub Transmission Control.........................................................................................392
4.1.10 WRFD-021303 IMSI Based Handover.................................................................................................................396
4.1.11 WRFD-021311 MOCN Introduction Package......................................................................................................397
4.1.12 WRFD-02131101 Carrier Sharing by Operators...................................................................................................399
4.1.13 WRFD-02131102 Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators.......................................................................................400
4.1.14 WRFD-02131103 MOCN Mobility Management.................................................................................................402
4.1.15 WRFD-02131104 MOCN Load Balance..............................................................................................................403
4.1.16 WRFD-02131105 MOCN Independent Performance Management.....................................................................404
4.1.17 WRFD-02131106 Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion.......................................................................................405
4.1.18 WRFD-140223 MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation............................................................................................407
4.1.19 WRFD-150213 MOCN Independent Iub Transmission Resource Allocation......................................................409
4.1.20 WRFD-150214 MOCN Independent CE Resource Allocation.............................................................................412
4.2 ATM Transmission......................................................................................................................................................413
4.2.1 WRFD-050405 Overbooking on ATM Transmission..............................................................................................413
4.2.2 WRFD-050105 ATM/AAL2 Switching Based Hub NodeB...................................................................................416
4.2.3 WRFD-050406 ATM QoS Introduction on Hub NodeB (Overbooking on Hub NodeB Transmission).................418
4.2.4 WRFD-050302 Fractional ATM Function on Iub Interface....................................................................................420
4.3 IP Transmission..........................................................................................................................................................421
4.3.1 WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface..............................................................................421
4.3.2 WRFD-050411 Fractional IP Function on Iub Interface.........................................................................................425
4.3.3 WRFD-050403 Hybrid Iub IP Transmission...........................................................................................................427
4.3.4 WRFD-050404 ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB............................................................................................................429
4.3.5 WRFD-050409 IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface................................................................................430
4.3.6 WRFD-050410 IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface...............................................................................432
4.3.7 WRFD-050420 FP MUX for IP Transmission........................................................................................................435
4.3.8 WRFD-050408 Overbooking on IP Transmission..................................................................................................436
4.3.9 WRFD-050107 IP routing Based Hub NodeB........................................................................................................439
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

Contents

4.3.10 WRFD-011500 PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507)......................................................................................440


4.3.11 WRFD-050412 UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission.............................................................................................441
4.3.12 WRFD-140207 Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC................................................................................442
4.3.13 WRFD-140208 Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC....................................................................................444
4.3.14 WRFD-050501 Clock Sync on Ethernet in NodeB...............................................................................................446
4.3.15 WRFD-050502 Synchronous Ethernet..................................................................................................................448
4.3.16 WRFD-050425 Ethernet OAM.............................................................................................................................450
4.3.17 WRFD-150243 Iub IP Transmission Based on Dynamic Load Balancing...........................................................451
4.3.18 WRFD-150244 Iu/Iur IP Transmission Based on Dynamic Load Balancing........................................................455
4.4 Satellite Transmission.................................................................................................................................................458
4.4.1 WRFD-050104 Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface.........................................................................................458
4.4.2 WRFD-050108 Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface...........................................................................................459
4.5 Security.......................................................................................................................................................................460
4.5.1 WRFD-140209 NodeB Integrated IPSec................................................................................................................460
4.5.2 WRFD-140210 NodeB PKI Support.......................................................................................................................462
4.6 Reliability...................................................................................................................................................................463
4.6.1 WRFD-040202 RNC Node Redundancy................................................................................................................463
4.6.2 WRFD-040203 RRU Redundancy..........................................................................................................................465
4.6.3 WRFD-021302 Iu Flex............................................................................................................................................466
4.6.4 WRFD-021306 Iu Flex Load Distribution Management........................................................................................469
4.6.5 WRFD-150211 RNC in Pool Load Sharing............................................................................................................471
4.6.6 WRFD-150212 RNC in Pool Node Redundancy....................................................................................................474
4.6.7 WRFD-150240 RNC in Pool Multiple Logical RNCs............................................................................................476
4.7 Cloud BB....................................................................................................................................................................478
4.7.1 WRFD-151205 Uplink CoMP (Joint Reception)....................................................................................................478
4.7.2 WRFD-151206 HetNet Uplink CoMP (Joint Reception)........................................................................................480
4.7.3 WRFD-151207 Uplink CoMP (Joint Reception) Based on Coordinated BBU......................................................482
4.7.4 WRFD-151208 Macro-Micro Multi RRUs in One Cell..........................................................................................483
4.7.5 WRFD-151209 Macro-Micro DC-HSDPA.............................................................................................................485

5 O&M......................................................................................... 487
5.1 Advanced Planning.....................................................................................................................................................487
5.1.1 WRFD-140219 Micro NodeB Self-Planning..........................................................................................................487
5.2 Power Saving..............................................................................................................................................................489
5.2.1 WRFD-140220 Intelligent Battery Management....................................................................................................489
5.2.2 WRFD-020116 Dynamic Power Sharing in Multi-Carriers....................................................................................491
5.2.3 WRFD-020117 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load...........................................................................492
5.2.4 WRFD-020118 Energy Efficiency Improved..........................................................................................................493
5.2.5 WRFD-020119 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup........................................................................495
5.2.6 WRFD-020122 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS........................................................................................496
5.2.7 WRFD-020121 Intelligent Power Management......................................................................................................499
5.2.8 WRFD-150241 RRU PA Efficiency Improvement.................................................................................................501
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

Contents

6 Acronyms and Abbreviations......................................................503

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Voice & Other Services

1.1 VoIP
1.1.1 WRFD-010617 VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+
Model
QW1S00VOIP00

Availability
VoIP over HSPA is available from RAN10.0.
VoIP over HSPA+ is available from RAN11.0.

Summary
VoIP over HSPA meets the requirements of growing VoIP users. Compared with CS voice
over DCH, VoIP over HSPA or HSPA+ provides larger capacity through high spectral
efficiency and capacity enhancement of HSPA or HSPA+. This feature is a trial feature in
RAN10.0.

Benefits
VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+ has the following advantages:

Support evolution to all-IP network and decrease in the investment and maintenance cost

Large voice capacity

Description
In the fixed network, VoIP has turned out to be an attractive and cost-effective solution to
support PS conversational services. The rapid growth of VoIP users prompts cellular operators
to use this feature for enhanced revenue generation. Moreover, from the viewpoint of
evolution, VoIP helps operators converge their networks into an all-IP network and decrease
the total OPEX accordingly.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

VoIP services can be carried over DCH or HSPA. When it is set up on the DCH, the capacity
is not competitive because RTP/UDP/IP protocol head will consume more resource than CS
voice service. However, HSPA has higher resource efficiency than DCH. Therefore, VoIP over
HSPA is a better choice. Moreover, Robust Header Compression (RoHC) is also introduced to
improve the overhead efficiency. In addition, the Continuous Packet Connectivity (CPC)
technology in the HSPA+ helps expand the VoIP capacity.
Compared with traditional CS voice over DCH, the capacity gain of VoIP over HSPA (HSUPA
with 2ms TTI) is expected to reach 20%. With CPC, the capacity gain of VoIP over HSPA
(HSUPA with 2ms TTI) is expected to reach 45%.
Robust Header Compression (RoHC) is defined in RFC3095 (July, 2001). Such feature
provides the IP data header compression mechanism which aims to save the bandwidth of air
interface, which utilize less radio resources.
The motivation for IP header compression is based on the following facts:

The multimedia payload is typically compressed at the application layer.

The headers occupy a large portion of the packet for some services.

The headers have significant redundancy.

The RoHC is implemented at the PDCP protocol layer between the RNC and UE; therefore,
the Iub bandwidth can be saved.
In RAN10.0, the following compress/uncompress profiles are supported:

RoHC Uncompressed

RoHC RTP: RTP/UDP/IP header

RoHC UDP: UDP/IP header

RoHC ESP: ESP/IP header

Generally, RTP/UDP/IP header is used in packet of VoIP, so RoHC Uncompressed or RoHC


RTP is used for VoIP. RoHC UDP and RoHC ESP are used in other scenarios when the hander
of packet is UDP/IP or ESP/IP.
Both IPV4 and IPV6 header compressions are supported.

Enhancement

RAN12.0
In RAN12.0, coverage-based TTI dynamic switching of VoIP over HSUPA is introduced.
The coverage performance of the HSUPA 10 ms TTI is better than that in R99, whereas
the coverage performance of the HSUPA 2 ms TTI is worse than that in R99. The 2 ms
TTI, however, has a greater gain in capacity. Therefore, for VoIP users, smooth switching
from the 2 ms TTI to the 10 ms TTI must be implemented according to the limitation on
the uplink transmit power of the UE. This ensures seamless coverage and maximizes cell
capacity.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

UE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

The UE should support VoIP. If ROHC is to be applied, the UE should support ROHC.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN should support IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).

Other Features
When VoIP is over HSPA, the following features are required: WRFD-010610 HSDPA
Introduction Package WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.
When VoIP is over HSPA+, the following feature is required: WRFD-010686 CPCDTX/DRX

1.1.2 WRFD-01061701 RAB Mapping


Model
QW1S00VOIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature enables a combination of multiple RABs to support rich service types.

Benefits
This feature enables VoIP over HSPA and more RAB combinations to be carried over HSPA
to enrich service combinations of the operator.

Description
This feature enables VoIP over HSDPA and VoIP over HSUPA 10/2 ms TTI. The following
RAB combinations are available:

1PS + 1CS
Conversational (VoIP)/UL: EUL[Maximum rate depends on UE category] DL:HSDPA
[Maximum rate depends on UE category] /PS RAB + UL: 3.4 kbit/s DL: 3.4 kbit/s
SRB for DCCH

2PS + 1CS

Conversational (VoIP)/UL: EUL DL: HSDPA/PS RAB + Interactive or


Background/UL: EUL [Maximum rate depends on UE category] DL: HSDPA
[Maximum rate depends on UE category] /PS RAB + UL: 3.4 kbit/s DL: DCCH. SRB
3.4 kbit/s.

3PS + 1CS
Conversational (VoIP) /UL: EUL [Maximum rate depends on UE category] DL:
HSDPA [Maximum rate depends on UE category] /PS RAB + Streaming/UL: EUL
[Maximum rate depends on UE category] DL: HSDPA [Maximum rate depends on UE
category] /PS RAB + Interactive or Background /UL:EUL [Maximum rate depends on

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

UE category] DL: HSDPA [Maximum rate depends on UE category] / PS RAB + UL:


3.4 kbit/s DL: DCCH. SRB 3.4 kbit/s.

"SRB + 1 VoIP over IMS + 1 PS" over HSPA


The typical configuration of VoIP is different in 3GPP R5 and R6. In TS34.108 and
TR25.99, 3GPP defines some VoIP configurations and related combinations as reference.
Huawei RAN supports these services. As the RTP header is transmitted before RoHC is
enabled, a higher rate is required. After RoHC is enabled, a lower rate can be used.
RAN10.0 does not support the adjustment between a high rate and a low rate.
The operator can configure VoIP over DCH or HSPA on the cell side. That is, when
HSPA is preferentially selected as a bearer, VoIP is carried over HSPA as much as
possible. If HSPA operations fail (for example, admission control), the period timer starts
to trigger the configuration adjustment of HSPA operations.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should support VoIP.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN should support IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).

Other Features
When VoIP is over HSPA, the following features are required:
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package
When VoIP is over HSPA+, the following feature is required:
WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX

1.1.3 WRFD-01061703 Optimized Scheduling for VoIP


over HSPA
Model
QW1S00VOIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Summary
Based on the UL non-scheduling method and DL delay-sensitive scheduling algorithm, this
feature can ensure the delay requirements of VoIP services and signaling carried over HSPA.

Benefits
This feature guarantees the delay requirement of VoIP services and enhances user experience
when VoIP over HSPA is applied.

Description
In RAN10.0, VoIP over HSPA is supported. In order to guarantee the QoS of VoIP over HSPA,
non-scheduling method is used during HSUPA scheduling in the uplink. In the downlink,
delay-sensitive (DS) algorithm as an optimized HSDPA scheduling scheme is provided.
VoIP service in 3G consists of two kinds of packets: SIP signaling and RTP packets. RTP and
RTCP can be born on a single RAB.
E
U

NP
A
R
T
U
S

S P
IM
S

o m
D
in D
a
ma
o
m
in
c o
n
esio
S
a lin
ig
trlS
n
/ D
IP
(S
g
)
P
M
i a
ed
)
P
T
(R

N
A
R
T
U

E
U
UE

The preceding packets have different characteristics:

Packet

Characteristics

SIP signaling

Delay sensitive (call setup delay is


affected).
RLC retransmission is triggered due to
packet loss. The delay is affected.

VoIP-RTP

Delay sensitive.
No RLC retransmission is triggered due to
packet loss. The delay and user experience
are affected.

According to different characteristics, the MAC-hs scheduling algorithm should be enhanced


to guarantee the QoS, especially the delay.
DS scheduling algorithm for SRB and VoIP is always prior to scheduling algorithm for
streaming and BE. This feature is for the RAB which bares the RTP voice packet to guarantee
the delay in a certain range.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should support VoIP.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN should support IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).

Other Features
VoIP over HSPA rely on: WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package WRFD-010612
HSUPA Introduction Package VoIP over HSPA+ rely on WRFD-010611 HSDPA
Enhanced Package WRFD-010686 CPC- DTX/DRX

1.1.4 WRFD-010618 IMS Signaling over HSPA


Model
QW1SIMSSHP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R5.

Summary
IMS signaling over HSPA can shorten the setup delay of IMS services like VoIP to save
network resources for the operator.

Benefits

Since IMS signaling is carried on HSPA, the utilization of code resource and
transmission resource can be improved, compared with those carried on the DCH.

Better performance (short time delay) and capacity of IMS services.

Description
The IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is an open and standardized architectural framework for
delivering Internet Protocol (IP) multimedia to mobile users. With this feature, operators
provide network-controlled multimedia services by combining voice and data in a single
packet switched network.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

IMS uses Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) as the key control protocol, and implements
service management in the UTRAN. Such SIP signaling will be indicated by the CN in the
RAB Assignment Request message. The RAB should be an interactive QoS class service.
Before RAN10.0, such IMS signaling service can only be carried on the DCH. With F-DPCH
supported in RAN10.0, the service can be carried on HSPA, which brings better performance
for IMS service.
The type of channels carrying IMS signaling is configurable separately on the downlink and
uplink at cell level. That is, when HSPA is chosen as the bearer with high priority, IMS
signaling will be set up on it as much as possible. If the setup is not successful, for example,
due to admission control, a periodical timer will be started to trigger the reconfiguration of the
HSPA procedure.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN should support the signaling indication at Iu interface.

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction
Package

1.1.5 WRFD-010619 CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+


Model
QW1SCSHSPA00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0. It is introduced in 3GPP R8.

Summary
Compared with CS voice over DCH, CS voice over HSPA/HSPA+ provides a larger voice
capacity through high spectral efficiency and capacity enhancement of HSPA or HSPA+.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Benefits
The use of the high spectral efficiency and capacity enhancement features of HSPA or HSPA+
increases the capacity of CS voice services. Compared with VoIP over HSPA or HSPA+, CS
voice over HSPA/HSPA+ does not require the support of the IMS and its implementation is
easier.

Description
Generally, CS voice services are carried over DCH. CS voice over HSPA is introduced in
3GPP Release 8 specifications. That is, UL CS voice packets are carried over E-DCH, and DL
CS voice packets are carried over HS-DSCH.
CS voice over HSPA refers to the Circuit Switched voice service based on legacy CS domain
Core Network. Therefore, operators do not need to deploy the IMS for VoIP services. The
following figure shows the difference in call routing between CS voice over HSPA and VoIP
over HSPA/HSPA+.

To deploy CS voice over HSPA, the only needed update is the way of mapping for this service
on the RNC. No additional modification is needed on the MSC or NodeB.
CS voice over HSPA improves the spectral efficiency and cell capacity. Moreover, the CPC
feature introduced in RAN11.0 HSPA+ package helps to extend the battery life of UEs
through UL DTX and DL DRX functions.
Compared with traditional CS voice over DCH, the capacity gain of VoIP over HSPA (HSUPA
with 2ms TTI) is expected to reach 23%. With CPC, the capacity gain of VoIP over HSPA
(HSUPA with 2ms TTI) is expected to reach 48%.

Enhancement

RAN12.0
In RAN12.0, coverage-based TTI dynamic switching of VoIP over HSUPA is introduced.
The coverage performance of the HSUPA 10 ms TTI is better than that in DCH, whereas
the coverage performance of the HSUPA 2 ms TTI is worse than that in DCH. The 2 ms
TTI, however, has a greater gain in capacity. Therefore, for voice call over HSPA users, 2
ms TTI is always configured to obtain high system capacity and smooth switching from
the 2 ms TTI to the 10 ms TTI must be implemented according to the limitation on the
uplink transmit power of the UE and the high BLER. This ensures seamless coverage
and maximizes cell capacity.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must be Release-8 (or later) and support CS voice over HSPA/HSPA+

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
When CS voice is over HSPA, the following features are required: WRFD-010610
HSDPA Introduction Package WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package When CS
voice is over HSPA+, the following feature is required: WRFD-010686 CPC DTX/DRX

1.1.6 WRFD-140224 Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM


Model
QW1SCSFBRIM0

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
This feature enables the eNodeB to obtain and maintain the system information of the UMTS
cell, including the ID of the target cell and convolutional code, through the RAN Information
Management (RIM) procedure and sends the information to the UE in the RRC Connection
Release message. This can reduce the access time when the UE is redirected from an LTE
network to a UMTS network without reading system information, improving user experience.

Benefits
The LTE-to-UMTS redirection delay can be reduced by up to 1.28s, depending on the size of
SIB11. This improves user experience because the access time is shortened during redirection.

Description
Upon receiving a RIM request for the system information of the UMTS cell from the eNodeB,
the RNC sends the system information of the UMTS cell to the eNodeB through the RIM
procedure. If the system information of the UMTS cell changes (except for changes in the
information element UL interference in SIB7), the RNC sends the updated system information
to the LTE network through the RIM update procedure.
The eNodeB receives and maintains the system information of the UMTS cell. With flash
circuit-switched fallback (CSFB) in Release 9, the eNodeB then forwards the system
information of the UMTS cell to the UE in the RRC Connection Release message. Therefore,
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

the UE does not need to read system information after redirection, which reduces the
redirection delay.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must support flash CSFB in Release 9.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The mobility management entity (MME) and serving GPRS support node (SGSN)
must support the RIM procedure in 3GPP release 9. If the core network (CN) is earlier
than 3GPP release 9, it must support eNodeB ID conversion.

Other Features
None

1.1.7 WRFD-150215 SRVCC from LTE to UMTS with


PS Handover
Model
QW1SSFLTUV00
QW1SSFLTUP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature is part of the UMTS/LTE interoperability solution. This feature must be
supported by the UEs, radio access network, and core network.

Benefits
This feature supports single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC) from the RAN side.
This feature ensures voice service continuity by allocating VoIP services and PS services (or
default PS bearers) from the LTE network to the UMTS network.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Description
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is not deployed at the early stage of LTE network
deployment. Therefore, IMS VoIP cannot be used to provide normal voice services and
emergency call services. UEs performing normal voice services and emergency call services
should be handed over to the UMTS network through Circuit Switch FallBack (CSFB) and PS
handover.
After an LTE network is deployed with IMS, the LTE network can support VoIP services.
When a UE performing VoIP services on the LTE network moves out of the LTE coverage, if
there is UMTS coverage, the UE should be handed over to the UMTS network for voice
service continuity. When a UE is performing VoIP services on the LTE network, there must be
at least one PS bearer. The reason is that there must be a default PS bearer for a UE in
connected mode on the LTE network, even if the UE is not performing PS services. When
SRVCC from LTE to UMTS is being performed, the PS bearers will also be handed over to
the UMTS network.
Based on network configuration, the LTE network selects one handover scheme to perform an
LTE-to-UMTS handover. Candidate handover schemes are as follows:

If UMTS supports VoIP, a PS handover is performed on VoIP. This process is an interRAT PS handover, which does not involve the switchover from the PS domain to the CS
domain.

CS-only SRVCC, which is called SRVCC from LTE to UMTS without PS handover.
That is, VoIP services are first handed over to the CS domain of the UMTS network
through the switchover of the core network, while PS bearers are transferred to the
UMTS network through a routing area update (RAU) procedure. From the perspective of
UMTS RAN, the process is only an inter-RAT CS handover.

PS+CS SRVCC, which is called SRVCC from LTE to UMTS with PS handover. That is,
through the switchover of the core network, VoIP and PS services are handed over to the
CS and PS domains of the UMTS network, respectively. From the perspective of UMTS
RAN, the process is an inter-RAT CS+PS handover.

The first two handover schemes have already been supported by Huawei RAN. The last
handover scheme will be implemented by this feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UEs must be of 3GPP Release 8 or later and must support SRVCC.

Other Network Units


The eRAN must support SRVCC.

CN
The CN must support SRVCC.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Other Features
NA

1.2 Crystal Voice


1.2.1 WRFD-010613 AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate
Wide Band)
Model
QW1SAMRWBV00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R5.

Summary
This feature enables the operator to improve the quality of speech services if resources are
allowed.

Benefits
The AMR-WB provides improved voice quality especially in terms of increased voice
naturalness.

Description
AMR-WB (Wide Band) is a new feature in 3GPP_REL 5 for the purpose to provide improved
voice quality especially in terms of increased voice naturalness.
This feature provides the AMR-WB service with the bit rate defined as follows:

Codec Mode

Source Codec BitRate

AMR-WB_23.85

23.85 kbit/s

AMR-WB_23.05

23.05 kbit/s

AMR-WB_19.85

19.85 kbit/s

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Codec Mode

Source Codec BitRate

AMR-WB_18.25

18.25 kbit/s

AMR-WB_15.85

15.85 kbit/s

AMR-WB_14.25

14.25 kbit/s

AMR-WB_12.65

12.65 kbit/s

AMR-WB_8.85

8.85 kbit/s

AMR-WB_6.60

6.60 kbit/s

The system will set up the AMR service according to the service request from the core
network. The algorithm for AMR-WB is the same as that for the AMR service with narrow
band.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must have the corresponding support capability.

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

CN
The CN must have the corresponding support capability.

Other Features
NA

1.2.2 WRFD-020701 AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates


Control
Model
QW1SAMRRCV00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
This feature enables the adjustment of AMR/AMR-WB speech rates triggered by multiple
factors. This feature can ensure a continuous service, expand the service coverage, and reduce
the cell load.

Benefits
For the same transmit power, a lower-rate AMR codec can provide wider uplink coverage.
When the radio environment is good, a high-rate codec can provide better speech quality than
a low-rate codec. When the radio environment is poor, a low-rate codec can provide better
speech quality than a high-rate codec. Therefore, the rate of the AMR codec should be
adjusted in real time to ensure high-quality speech services.

Description
The AMR Mode Control (AMRC) is a feature that enables the RNC to control 8 types of
speech rates, namely 12.2 kbit/s, 10.2 kbit/s, 7.95 kbit/s, 7.4 kbit/s, 6.7 kbit/s, 5.9 kbit/s, 5.15
kbit/s, 4.75 kbit/s, and wide band AMR 23.85 kbit/s, 23.05 kbit/s, 19.85 kbit/s, 18.25 kbit/s,
15.85 kbit/s, 14.25 kbit/s, 12.65 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s and 6.60 kbit/s. This improves speech
quality and enlarges uplink coverage and reduces system load level.
Before RAN5.0, the decision of adjusting the AMR rate considers the downlink transmitted
power for DL and UE transmitted power for UL. If the transmit power exceeds the predefined threshold, it indicates that the link quality is poor.
In RAN5.1, cell load is used for AMRC trigger, where RNC will monitor the cell loading
continuously and dynamically to adjust the user's speech code rate according to the change of
the cell loading. When the loading is heavy, low bit rate of AMR speech CODEC is used to
decrease the cell loading and when the cell loading is light, high bit rates of AMR speech
CODEC is used to provide higher voice quality for users.
The AMRC is one action to be done during the load reshuffling (LDR) procedure. The LDR is
one of the congestion control mechanisms triggered when NodeB Common Measurement
(TCP, Transmitted Carrier Power) for DL, and NodeB Common Measurement (RTWP) for
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

UL, exceed the LDR threshold. The system will enter "basic congestion" status. After the
LDR is triggered, the AMRC serves as a method to decease the system load. The RNC will
select the candidate AMR user according to the ARP and current user rate. Low ARP user will
be selected first to adjust the rate and if ARP is the same, the user with high voice rate will be
firstly selected to adjust the rate.
After the user voice rate is degraded, it depends on the downlink transmitted power for DL
and UE transmitted power for UL for rate increase, as the mechanism used for RAN5.0.

Enhancement

RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, the AMRC is added as an action in basic feature WRFD-020106 Load
Reshuffling.

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, this feature can also be used to AMR-WB service which requires the
optional feature WRFD-010613 AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band).

RAN16.0
AMR-WB SF reconfiguration is added to LDR. When the minimum available SF in the
cell is greater than the LDR threshold, LDR is triggered on the cell's code resources.
Then, the voice rates of AMR WB services are reduced through RB reconfiguration and
the SF is increased in RAN16.0. Therefore, the cell's code resource congestion is
relieved. The RNC determines whether the SF is increased after the rate reduction of
AMR-WB services. If yes, the RNC selects candidate AMR-WB UEs based on the UEs'
allocation/retention priorities (ARPs) and current voice rates. The RNC first reduces the
voice rates of UEs with lower ARPs. If the ARPs are the same, UEs with higher voice
rates will be first reduced. After the UEs' voice rates are reduced, they will not be
increased.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should support the processing of TFC control procedure.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
If this feature is to be applied to the AMR-WB, then the Dependency is: WRFD-010613
AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band)

1.2.3 WRFD-011600 TFO/TrFO


Model
QW1S00TFOV00
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R4.

Summary
This feature enables the identification and processing of the IUUP V2 CN to support the
TFO/TrFO service.

Benefits
This feature can prevent degradation of the speech quality introduced by the interpretation
between different codecs. The TrFO can also save the transmission resources.

Description
TFO/TrFO features are introduced in Release 4 and used to prevent degradation of the speech
quality. This degradation is produced by the interpretation between the different codecs and is
usually more noticeable when the speech CODECs are operating at low rates and in noisy
conditions.
Tandem Free Operation (TFO) removes the double speech encoding/decoding done in the
TRAUs in MS-to-MS calls by "tunneling" the "compressed" speech through the 64 kbit/s
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) links of the core network. No transmission resource will be
saved.
For Transcoder Free Operation (TrFO), there is no constraint to use PCM link on the Nb
interface; therefore, in addition of the advantages proposed by TFO, it can also save the
transmission resources. TrFO can also be used in mobile-to-fix calls.
On the access network side, the RNC cannot really identify the TFO/TrFO service. The RNC
can, however, identify the CN IUUP version and perform related processing of the IUUP V2
to support the TFO/TrFO service.

Enhancement

RAN5.0
In RAN5.0, AMRC under TFO/TrFO is supported.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must have the corresponding support capability.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The CN node needs to support the feature at the same time.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Other Features
NA

1.2.4 WRFD-140201 AMR Voice Quality Improvement


Based on PLVA
Model
QWMSAVQIBP01

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA improves adaptive multi-rate (AMR) voice
quality by using Huawei Parallel List Viterbi Algorithm (PLVA) to decode convolutional
codes, reducing the proportion of low and medium mean opinion scores (MOSs).

Benefits
This feature noticeably improves the quality of voice services, which in turn improves user
experience. In simulations, the MOS of AMR voice services increases by about 0.35 when the
block error rate (BLER) is greater than 10%.

Description
AMR is a speech coding standard widely used in GSM and UMTS communications systems.
In UMTS, convolutional codes are used to perform channel encoding and a power control
mechanism is used to ensure voice quality.
Figure 1.2.4-1 Channel encoding and power control for AMR voice services in the uplink in
UMTS

Currently, most vendors use the Viterbi algorithm to decode convolutional codes. The Viterbi
algorithm selects the optimal path based on the maximum likelihood theory and exports the
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

data decoded on the optimal path. If the data decoded on the optimal path fails the cyclic
redundancy check (CRC), the AMR speech codec usually discards the data, and voice quality
deteriorates as a result.
Huawei uses the PLVA algorithm to decode convolutional codes. The PLVA algorithm is an
enhanced CRC-assisted Viterbi algorithm. Instead of only selecting the optimal path, the
PLVA algorithm selects the top N optimal paths and performs CRC on the data decoded on
these paths. The PLVA algorithm only exports data that passes the CRC. If data decoded on
these paths fails the CRC, the NodeB exports the data decoded on the optimal path. In
simulations where the PLVA algorithm selects four paths, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) is 0.2 to
0.8 dB better than that produced by the Viterbi algorithm.
This feature increases the MOS of AMR voice services, including narrowband and wideband
AMR voice services. Take 12.2 kbit/s AMR voice services as an example. In simulation, if the
BLER is 1%, the MOS is increased by 0.08. If the BLER is greater than 10%, the MOS is
increased by about 0.35. (The BLER increase is generally caused by UE power limitation, fast
channel change, or strong interference.) Generally, the MOS increase produced by the PLVA
algorithm is directly proportional to the BLER. In addition, MOS increase is generally the
same under different channel fading conditions.
Figure 1.2.4-2 Different MOSs for 12.2 kbit/s AMR voice services on TU50 channels with
different BLERs

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd
board. The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board. The 3900 series
base station must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board. Currently, for
baseband boards, only

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

UE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

1.2.5 WRFD-160204 CS Voice Precise Power Control


Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
This feature performs regeneration and cancellation on the E-DCH dedicated physical control
channel (E-DPCCH) and high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH). This
reduces the interference in other channels caused by the two channels, thereby improving the
uplink cell capacity. The greater the number of uplink RRC connections or the higher the load
consumption on the two channels, the more significant the gains of this feature.

Benefits
Compared with the Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2) feature, this
feature further improves the uplink cell capacity (increasing the number of HSPA UEs that
can be simultaneously online or the cell throughput) by 5% to 15% in typical scenarios in
which there is HSUPA data transmission and more than four HSPA connections.

Description
The Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2) feature performs
regeneration and cancellation on the dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH) to reduce
the interference in other channels caused by this channel, thereby improving the UE receive
performance and uplink cell capacity.
Similarly, the Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 3) feature performs
regeneration and cancellation on the HS-DPCCH and E-DPCCH channels, which further
reduces the interference and improves the cell capacity. This feature works as follows:
HS-DPCCH interference cancellation (IC): Regeneration and cancellation are performed on
the channel quality indicator (CQI). The rake receiver combines signals on the HS-DPCCH
and use the log-likelihood ratio (LLR) to generate a CQI soft value. The CQI soft value is
processed through spreading and modulation, channelization, frequency offset, and filtering
for shaping to produce regenerated signals on antenna ports.
E-DPCCH IC: Regeneration is performed on decoded bits. The decoded bits are recoded and
processed through spreading and modulation, channelization, frequency offset, and filtering
for shaping to produce regenerated signals on antenna ports.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

The cancellation module subtracts all the regenerated signals on the HS-DPCCH/E-DPCCH
from the received signals. The dedicated physical data channel (DPDCH) or E-DCH
dedicated physical data control channel (E-DPDCH) demodulates and decodes the canceled
baseband data, thereby improving the UE receive performance and uplink cell capacity.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The 3800 series and 3812 series base stations do not support this feature.
The 3900 series base stations (except 3902Es) support this feature and they must be
configured with a UBBPd. To support inter-board CCPIC Phase 3 IC sharing, at least
one UBBPd must be configured in the uplink resource group supporting this function. In
addition, at least one WBBPd, WBBPf, or UBBPd must be configured in slot 2 or slot 3.

UE
The UEs must support 3GPP R5 or later (supporting HSDPA/HSUPA).

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
This feature is dependent on the WRFD-140202 Control Channel Parallel Interference
Cancellation (Phase 2) feature.

1.3 Cell Broadcast


1.3.1 WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Service
Model
QW1S00CBSV00
QW1S00CBSP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
This feature supports the standard cell broadcast procedure as stipulated in protocols to assist
the CBC for the cell broadcast service.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Benefits
The users can use the new services based on the CBS.

Description
The CBS service is analogous to the teletex service offered on television, in that like teletex, it
permits a number of unacknowledged general CBS messages to be broadcast to all receivers
within a particular region. CBS messages are broadcast to defined geographical areas known
as cell broadcast areas. These areas may comprise of one or more cells, or may comprise the
entire PLMN.
The Iu BC interface connects the RNC in UTRAN with the broadcast domain of the Core
Network, namely with the Cell Broadcast Center. It is used to define the Cell Broadcast
information that is transmitted to the mobile user via the Cell Broadcast Service. The cell
broadcast center (CBC) is part of core network in UMTS and up to 4 CBCs can connect to
RNC via a routing node like WCDMA SGSN.

Enhancement

RAN6.0
RAN6.0 supports four CBCs instead of one CBC of the previous versions.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should have the capability to receive cell broadcast messages.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

1.3.2 WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast


Model
QM1S00SCBV00
QM1S00SCBP00

Availability
This feature is introduced in RAN11.1.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Summary
This feature offers a solution to broadcast some simple message to the UE while there is no
Simplified cell broadcast is a function implemented in RNC that allows using SMSCB (Short
Message Service Cell Broadcast) without the necessity of having a CellBroadcastCenter.

Benefits
With this feature, the most commonly used cell broadcast services are supported through a
simple command in RNC. Which avoids investing in a CellBroadcastCenter and contributes
to CAPEX saving.

Description
The Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (SMSCB) function enables the broadcast of short
messages to all MSs in specified cells. The MSs can receive the broadcast messages
continuously or discontinuously according to the system configuration.
Usually there is a Cell Broadcast Center (CBC) responsible for managing and scheduling the
SMSCB.
Huawei Simplified Cell Broadcast function performs through a built-in cell broadcast
processing module in the RNC without CBC, and reduces equipment costs.
Huawei simplified cell broadcast function enables the broadcast of messages, such as the cell
name, weather forecast, and social commonweal messages. The following describes the
details of these functions:

Information broadcast function: broadcasting messages such as the NodeB name, cell
name, weather forecast, or any character string. The maximum length is 100 ASC
symbols. The messages are input manually by MML command.

Information timing broadcast function: sending cell broadcast messages at specified


intervals.

Information management function: On the M2000 MML client, you can use the MML
commands to start or stop sending the broadcast messages in specified cells. In addition,
you can use the MML commands to query the cell broadcast status.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should have the capability to receive cell broadcast messages.

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

NA

Other Features
The Huawei simplified cell broadcast function cannot be used simultaneously with
WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Service.

1.3.3 WRFD-020127 Warning of Disaster


Model
QW1S000WDE00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
The RNC can send a disaster notification to all the UEs in a cell through the simple cell
broadcast function right after a disaster occurs.

Benefits
This feature enables the RNC to quickly (within four seconds) send the disaster information to
all the UEs, reducing the impact of the disaster.

Description
When a disaster (such as earthquake or tsunami) occurs, a disaster pre-warning notification
can help reduce the casualty and losses.
Huawei RNC can perform simple cell broadcast through the built-in CBC. If no external CBC
is deployed, Huawei RNC can run an OM command to inform all the UEs in the cell of the
disaster information as soon as possible. The RNC can originate, modify, and release
broadcast messages. The RNC can also predefine a broadcasting area. All the broadcast
messages are triggered manually. When the RNC OM personnel know the disaster
information, the personnel must send a broadcast command and the broadcast information is
immediately sent to the RNC through an OM terminal. In RAN12.0, Huawei RNC shortens
the delay of each channel in the system to ensure that all the UEs within the RNC are
informed of the disaster information within a short period of time, generally four seconds.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast

1.4 MBMS
1.4.1 WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package
Model
QW1S0MBMSI00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
This feature provides basic MBMS functions to meet the requirements of the operator for
MBMS applications.

Benefits
This feature improves the network resource utilization, especially the utilization of resources
on the Uu interface. It is an efficient way for the operators to deploy the point-to-multipoint
services, such mobile TV.

Description
The multimedia broadcast and multicast service (MBMS) is a new important feature for the
3GPP Release 6 specifications. It is a point-to-multipoint service in which the data is
transmitted from a single source entity to multiple recipients. Transmitting the same data to
multiple recipients allows the network resources to be shared.
The MBMS bearer service offers two modes:

Broadcast mode;

Multicast mode.(Not supported by Huawei RNC)

The MBMS architecture enables the efficient use of the radio network and core network
resources, with an emphasis on the radio interface efficiency. For one MBMS service, there is
only one copy of data on the Iu interface, and the RNS distributes the data to all associated
UEs.
The MBMS is realized by a number of additional new capabilities in the existing functional
entities and additional new functional entities. The whole MBMS architecture is as follows:
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

The introduction of the MBMS has the following impacts on the RAN:

Some new signaling procedures are added on the Iub/Uu/Iur/Iu interface.

New physical channels (MICH) are added.

New logical channels (MCCH/MTCH/MSCH) are added.

MAC-c/sh is changed to MAC-c/sh/m in order to add the MAC-m to the MBMS.

Soft/selective combination function of the common channels is introduced.

The common channels may be used over the air interface, and the UE may receive the service
in idle mode. So the number of UEs is not limited in a cell and a group.
The UE may receive the same MBMS service in the common channels from different cells.
And by soft/selective combination, less power is needed for the common channels.
The BSC6800 supports the MBMS services with the total traffic of up to 4096 kbit/s on the Iu
interface and 64 sessions can be supported simultaneously.
The BSC6900 supports the MBMS services with the total traffic of up to 8192 kbit/s on the Iu
interface and 256 sessions can be supported simultaneously.

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In the RAN10.0, the MBMS introduction package is enhanced. For details, refer to the
enhancement of the features in the package.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should support MBMS functions.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Network Units


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

NA

CN
The existing PS Domain functional entities (GGSN, SGSN, UTRAN, GERAN and UE)
need to be enhanced to provide the MBMS bearer service.
A new functional entity, the broadcast multicast service centre (BM-SC) is added to
provide a set of functions for the MBMS users Services.

Other Features
NA

1.4.2 WRFD-01061601 MBMS Broadcast Mode


Model
QW1S0MBMSI00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
In MBMS broadcast mode, MBMS information is transmitted through common channels of a
cell.

Benefits
With this feature, the operators can deploy rich multimedia services, such as mobile TV.

Description
The MBMS bearer service offers two modes:

Broadcast mode

Multicast mode

The broadcast mode is the unidirectional point-to-multipoint transmission of multimedia data


(such as text, audio, picture, video) from a single source entity to all users in the broadcast
service area. It is expected that charging data for the end user will not be generated for this
mode at the MBMS transport service layer. Charging data related to security procedures for
the end user at the MBMS user service layer may be generated.
The multicast mode allows the unidirectional point-to-multipoint transmission of multimedia
data (such as text, audio, picture, video) from a single source entity to a multicast group in the
multicast service area. Unlike the broadcast mode, the multicast mode generally requires a
subscription to the multicast subscription group and the users joining in the corresponding
multicast group. It is expected that charging data for the end user will be generated for this
mode at the MBMS transport service layer.
When receiving the MBMS services in the broadcast mode, the UE may stay in the
URA_PCH/CELL_PCH/CELL_FACH and idle mode. If the capability allowed, the UE can
receive the MBMS service even on the CELL_DCH.
Huawei UMTS RAN6.0 only supports the broadcast mode.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, the UE in URA_PCH, CELL_PCH, FACH, or idle mode supports the
MBMS service.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.3 WRFD-01061602 MBMS Admission Control


Model
QW1S0MBMSI00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature is related to admission control for the MBMS service.

Benefits
The cell power is allocated preferentially to the MBMS broadcast service with higher priority.

Description
Like the admission control for the R99 services, the following factors will be taken into
account:

Cell available code resources

Cell available power resources

NodeB resource state, that is, NodeB credits

Available Iub transport layer resources

Only when all of these resources above are available can a MBMS service be admitted.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

The MBMS broadcast service is established (PTM bearer) on the common channel. Two
power levels (upper and lower levels) are defined for the MBMS broadcast service.

When there is enough power resources in the cell, the upper power level will be used;

When the cell is in the basic congestion, the upper power level will be used for the
MBMS service whose priority is higher than or equal to a configured priority threshold
and the lower power level will be used for the MBMS service whose priority is lower
than the configured priority threshold;

When the cell load recovers from the congestion to normal, the RNC will automatically
adjust the power level to the upper one for that MBMS service.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.4 WRFD-01061603 MBMS Load Control


Model
QW1S0MBMSI00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature is related to load control for the MBMS service.

Benefits
The feature helps to decrease the cell load when the cell enters the congestion state and
ensures the system stability.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Description
When the cell is in the basic congestion, reduction of the MBMS service power may be
triggered when the downlink congestion is detected. The details are as follows:

The RNC selects all the MBMS broadcast services with priority lower than the
configurable threshold named the MBMS priority threshold and sort them in the
ascending order;

When the cell is in the congestion, the RNC will check them one by one. If there is one
service that is using the upper power level threshold, the RNC can move it to the lower
power level threshold by common transport channel reconfiguration procedure. Then the
action ends.

If all the MBMS broadcast mode services are using the lower power level threshold, the
action ends.

When the cell is in the congestion, the RNC can trigger the release of the MBMS broadcast
mode service. Some MBMS services with the lowest priority will be released first. After that,
a periodic reestablishment attempt timer for each service will be started.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.5 WRFD-01061604 MBMS Soft/Selective


Combining
Model
QW1S0MBMSI00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Summary
This feature is related to soft combination and selective combination for the PTM MBMS
service.

Benefits
With this feature, the power of the S-CCPCH that bears the MBMS services can be saved.

Description
The common channel soft combination is a function introduced for the MBMS. It means that
the UE receiver combines the signal from the multiple cells either in the RAKE receiver or
after the RAKE receiver in the receiver chain prior to the decoding of the soft combination
transport channel. The maximum time difference between the S-CCPCHs carrying the same
service in different cells should be less than 1TTI+1slot.
The soft combination normally improves the UE reception gain by 5 - 7dB.
The selective combination (SC) is an enhancement for the Release6 PtM MBMS. The
network is to simulcast the PtM MBMS contents on the S-CCPCH, and the UE receives and
decodes the MBMS data from multiple radio links simultaneously. The selection of the radio
link is to be performed on a transport block basis at the RLC, based on the CRC results and
sequence numbers.
The selective combination normally improves the UE reception gain by 3 - 5 dB.
The RNC should ensure that the services data sent to the UE from different cells are
synchronized.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

1.4.6 WRFD-01061605 MBMS Transport Resource


Management
Model
QW1S0MBMSI00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature is related to the transport resource management for the MBMS service.

Benefits
It is an essential feature to deploy MBMS broadcast mode services.

Description
For the same MBMS session in the same NodeB, a separate Iub transport bearer is established
for each cell. An example is shown in the following figure assuming 3 cells in one NodeB.
Three copies of exact same MBMS session data are sent through the Iub from the CRNC to
the NodeB.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.7 WRFD-01061606 Streaming Service on MBMS


Model
QW1S0MBMSI00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature enables the MBMS service to be carried on the PS streaming class, ensuring QoS.

Benefits
The feature can meet the QoS requirements of the service applications borne by the streaming
class.

Description
Compared with the point-to-point bearer services, the following limitations for the MBMS
services exist:

For the traffic class, only the background and streaming classes can be supported;

For the SDU error ratio, only larger values are supported, such as the values describing
higher numbers of the lost or corrupted SDUs (actual values for the background and
streaming classes are 10-2 and 10-1);

For guaranteed bit rates of the streaming traffic class: it depends on the radio resource
usage by other services, some cells of the MBMS service area may not have sufficient
resources available for a MBMS session. The RAN may decide not to establish the RB in
the cells where requested resources are not available.

The MBMS bearer of the background class is most suitable for the transport of the MBMS
user services such as messaging or downloading. The MBMS bearer of streaming class is
most suitable for the transport of the MBMS user services such as mobile TV. The main
difference between the background and streaming classes for the MBMS is the support of a
guaranteed bit rate in the streaming case. The MBMS user services that normally use the
background class may however decide to use a streaming class if the MBMS user service
cannot cope with the high packet loss.
The RAN 6.1 only supports the streaming class MBMS service.

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In the RAN10.0, a maximum of 2 PTP streaming RBs for the MBMS service can be
established for the UE in enhanced broadcast mode.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.8 WRFD-01061607 MBMS 2 Channels per Cell


Model
QW1S0MBMSI00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
With this feature, each cell supports up to two channels for the MBMS service.

Benefits
The feature is an essential function for the deployment of the MBMS service application.

Description
The MBMS two channels per cell are supported.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.9 WRFD-01061608 16/32/64/128kbps Channel


Rate on MBMS
Model
QW1S0MBMSI00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature is related to four MBMS channel rates: 16kbit/s, 32kbit/s, 64kbit/s, and 128kbit/s.

Benefits
The feature enables different channel rates and provides operators with more flexibility to
deploy the MBMS services.

Description
The MBMS broadcast mode service bit rate can be 64kbit/s or 128kbit/s. The TTI for 64kbit/s
is 80 ms and the TTI for 128kbit/s can be 40 ms or 80 ms.

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In the RAN10.0, 16 kbit/s or 32kbit/s can also be supported for which only 80 ms is used
by the TTI.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.10 WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2


Model
QW1S00MP2P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
This feature supports the enhanced MBMS (PTP/PTM) to save cell resources.

Benefits
Compared with the broadcast mode, MBMS Phase 2 can effectively implement PTM services,
for example, mobile TV. In PTP/PTM mode, cell resources can be saved.

Description
MBMS Phase 2 refers to enhanced broadcast mode introduced in 2006/09 3GPP
specifications. Compared with broadcast mode, the main differences include:

The "Counting/re-counting" function used for multicast mode is introduced for enhanced
broadcast. During the counting/re-counting procedure, the UE reports its selected
services to the RNC directly over the Uu interface.

Based on "Counting/re-counting" result, RNC can select optimum transfer mode: PTM
(Point To Multipoint) or PTP (Point To Point). In PTM mode, FACH/SCCPCH is used to
bear the MBMS services; in PTP mode, DCH or HSDPA is used to bear the MBMS
services. If in a cell there is no user interested in one specific MBMS service, RAN can
decide to cancel it.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should support the corresponding enhanced MBMS functions.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Network Units


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.11 WRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast


Mode
Model
QW1S00MP2P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature is related to the enhanced broadcast mode for the MBMS service.

Benefits
Compared to broadcast mode, it is a more efficient way to deploy the point-to-multipoint
services, such mobile TV.

Description
MBMS enhanced broadcast mode is very similar to multicast mode on RAN side, but much
modification on CN side and NAS procedures are avoided by introducing "counting/recounting" function. To support it, the following functions on enhanced broadcast mode are
introduced:

Counting/Re-counting. In "MBMS Modified Services Information" message RNC


indicates UE to initiate counting/re-counting response and in "MBMS Access
Information" message RNC gives the "Access probability factor" to UEs in Idle mode.
For UEs in connected mode, it will report to RNC its selected services by "MBMS
Modification Request" message. So RNC will get the number of UEs which are
interested in one specific MBMS service.
In addition, in order to simplify the counting/re-counting procedure, RNC keeps X UEs
in the connected mode.

The dynamic switch between PTP and PTM transfer mode for one MBMS service. When
deciding the optimum transfer mode for one service in a cell, some factors are taken into
account: the load of cell, the number of UE, and the status of the MBMS neighboring
cells.

The mobility management for UE.

1.

From a PTM cell to another PTM cell. In this scenario, UE will select to receive the
MBMS services in the new cell.

2.

From a PTM cell to a PTP cell. In this scenario, PTP RB will be established for UE.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

3.

From a PTP cell to a PTM cell. In this scenario, if PTM mode is used in the UEs' best
cell, PTP RB will be released.

4.

From a PTP cell to another PTP cell. Handover will be supported.

The combination of MBMS service and non-MBMS services for UE.

1.

When the MBMS service is in PTM mode, UE can decide whether to receive this service
according to its capability;

2.

When MBMS service is in PTP mode, RNC will establish the separate PTP RB for every
UE and treat it as an ordinary PS RB. And multiple RAB will be supported.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.12 WRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA


Model
QW1S00MP2P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature enables MBMS P2P services to be carried on the HS-DSCH, saving cell
resources.

Benefits
By HSDPA, the cell capacity will be improved.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Description
In enhanced broadcast mode, PTP and PTM mode can be selected to transport MBMS
services. If PTP mode is adopted, RNC will establish the separate PTP RB for every UE. Like
the non-MBMS service, HSDPA can be used to bear PTP MBMS RB and multiple RAB such
as combination of P2P MBMS streaming and I/B PS over HSDPA.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.13 WRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission


Enhancement
Model
QW1S00MP2P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature provides different admission policies for PTM and PTP MBMS services.

Benefits
MBMS PTM bearers should be treated differently so that they do not occupy too many
resources to block non-MBMS connection admission. In addition, some resources should be
reserved for the use of MBMS PTM.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Description
Besides PTM bearer, MBMS enhanced broadcast also supports PTP bearer, which can be
carried on DCH or HS-DSCH. For MBMS PTP users, same admission, pre-emption and
congestion criteria are applied as with normal non-MBMS HSDPA users.
When performing pre-emption, all types of bearer are taken into account including MBMS
PTM bearer, MBMS PTP bearer, normal non-MBMS bearer, which means every bearer type
can pre-empt each other. Whether MBMS PTM bearer is allowed to pre-empt other services
are controlled by parameter settings.
In case PTM bearer is allowed to pre-empt other services, the following QoS rules are
possible by parameter settings:

PTM streaming bearer can pre-empt other MBMS or non-MBMS services with traffic
class interactive/background and less or equal ARP priority.

PTM background bearer can pre-empt other MBMS or non-MBMS services with traffic
background and less ARP priority.

No services are allowed to pre-empt PTM with streaming traffic class.

PTP or Non-MBMS guaranteed services are allowed to pre-empt PTM with background
traffic class and lower ARP priority.

PTP or Non-MBMS background services are allowed to pre-empt PTM with background
traffic class and lower ARP priority.

While MBMS PTM bearer consumes less resource but serves for more subscribers, some
special strategies are developed for it. 2 specific thresholds are introduced for only Power and
Code: Treserved, Tmax.

When all the resources occupied by all MBMS PTM bearers in a cell are below Treserved,
PTM bearers can NOT be pre-empted by non PTM bearers (that is, MBMS PTP bearers
or normal non-MBMS bearers).

When any resource occupied by all PTM bearers in a cell is above Tmax, PTM bearers are
rejected by admission control and they can NOT pre-empted non PTM bearers (that is,
MBMS PTP bearers or normal non-MBMS bearers). At this moment, they can only preempt other low priority PTM bearers.

Other cases, the general pre-emption rules will be applied. When all the other priorities
are the same, the final prioritization is: MBMS PTM bearer > non-MBMS bearer >
MBMS PTP bearer.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Network Units


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.14 WRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring


Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users
Model
QW1S00MP2P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Summary
This feature enables the filtering and handover of a target cell based on the MBMS channel
resources in the inter-frequency neighboring cells, ensuring the continuity of the MBMS
service.

Benefits
With this feature, the neighboring cells which are not suitable for MBMS PTP users will be
filtered. This maintains the service continuity of MBMS in a more reasonable and intelligent
way.

Description
This function is applied when multi-carriers and single carriers are neighboring carriers. For
MBMS PTP users, inter-frequency handover may interrupt MBMS services; therefore, service
interruption should be avoided to ensure service continuity. This function is not intended for
MBMS PTM users or PTP users with other services accompanied.

As shown in the figure above, the f3 cell has inter-frequency neighboring cells f1 and f2. At
the border between the f1 or f2 cell and the f3 cell, when an MBMS PTP user handover from
the f3 cell to the f1 or f2 cell, the RNC shall select from the inter-frequency neighboring cell
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

list according to the current service received by the user. If the currently received service is
from channel 3, the RNC removes the f2 cell from the list; if the currently received service is
from channel 1 or 2, the RNC keeps the f1 and f2 cells in the list.
There can be more complicated cases.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2

1.4.15 WRFD-010627 FACH Transmission Sharing for


MBMS
Model
QWMS00FACH00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.1.

Summary
This feature enables the FACH carrying the same MBMS service on the Iub interface to share
a transmission resource, saving the Iub bandwidth.

Benefits
This feature can save Iub transmission resources when the MBMS service is deployed.

Description
This feature improves efficient Iub transport for MBMS. In previous 3GPP Rel-6, for the
same MBMS session in the same NodeB, a separate Iub transport bearer has to be set up for
each cell. An example is shown in the following figure assuming 3 cells in one NodeB. Three
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

copies of exact same MBMS session data are sent via Iub from CRNC to NodeB, which is a
big waste of Iub bandwidth.

To maximize saving of Iub bandwidth, the latest 3GPP Rel-6 provide FACH transmission
sharing for MBMS solution to share transport bearers. RNC transports only single FACH
data. NodeB transport module performs data duplication and distributes them to different
FACH Channels, as shown in the following figure, where the common transport bearer is
shared over Iub. Obviously, two-third of Iub bandwidth is saved by the improved Iub
transport.

The feature has optimization in the control plane. Bearer multiplexing information is carried
by newly introduced NBAP signaling IEs. The advantage of this solution is that current
MBMS FP structure is kept unchanged. However, due to lack of knowledge of NodeB's
capability to share transport bearer, CRNC always sends message of bearer multiplexing
request to NodeB no matter whether NodeB can/will share transport bearer or not. For NodeB
which can not or would not like to share, non-shared transmission bearer will be setup as in
the original way.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.16 WRFD-010626 MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer


Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)
Model
QW1S00MFLP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
This feature supports the reselection procedure of the MBMS frequency layer initiated by the
UE.

Benefits
With FLC, the user can acquire the information about MBMS services in time.
With FLD, the cell load can be reduced when the MBMS session is stopped.

Description
Frequency Layer Convergence denotes the process where the UTRAN requests UEs to
preferentially re-select to the frequency layer on which the MBMS service is intended to be
transmitted. This layer preference could be done by an additional MBMS session related
Layer Convergence Information (LCI) such as offset and target frequency. The FLC is
supported by specifications for both networks utilizing HCS and for networks not utilizing
HCS.
Frequency Layer Dispersion (FLD) denotes the process where the UTRAN redistributes UEs
across the frequencies. UTRAN can use FLD per MBMS session.
When FLD is applied, the UE stores the frequency where it was camped previously. Upon
session stop, the UE attempts to return to that frequency.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

NA

UE
UE should support this function.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.17 WRFD-010624 MBMS 8 Channels per Cell


Model
QW1S0M8CHP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
With this feature, each cell supports up to eight channels for the MBMS service.

Benefits
It provides the operator the flexibility to deploy more MBMS services in a cell.

Description
In RAN6.0, up to 8 channels are supported per cell if only the total bit rate of all channels is
no more than 1024 kbit/s. The MBMS channel bit rate can be 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 kbit/s.

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, up to 8 channels can be supported per cell if only the total bit rate of all
channels is no more than 1792 kbit/s. The MBMS channel bit rate can be 16, 32, 64, 128,
or 256 kbit/s.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Network Units


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.18 WRFD-010625 256kbps Channel Rate on


MBMS
Model
QW1SM256KP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
With this feature, Huawei RAN can support an MBMS channel rate of 256 kbit/s.

Benefits
The operator can deploy high bit-rate services to provide better user experience.

Description
In RAN6.0, 256 kbit/s MBMS Broadcast Mode service is supported and one cell can support
4 such services. The TTI for 256 kbit/s service is 40ms.

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, the maximum number of 256 kbit/s channels is enhanced from 4 to 7 per
cell.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Features
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.19 WRFD-010628 MBMS 16 Channels per Cell


Model
QW1SM16CHP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
With this feature, each cell supports up to 16 channels for the MBMS service.

Benefits
It provides the operator the flexibility to deploy more MBMS services in a cell.

Description
In RAN10.0, up to 16 channels can be supported per cell if only the total bit rate of all
channels is no more than 1792 kbit/s. The MBMS channel bit rate can be 16, 32, 64, 128, or
256 kbit/s.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.20 WRFD-010661 MBMS over Iur


Model
QW1S0MIURP00
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
This feature supports the MBMS service crossing the Iur interface to extend the application
scope of the MBMS service.

Benefits
This feature provides completed functions of MBMS over Iur and keeps the MBMS service
continuity and improves user perception.

Description

When CELL_PCH/CELL_FACH/URA_PCH UE moves into DRNC and Iur interface


exists:

1.

if there is no non-MBMS services established for this UE, SRNC will indicate UE to
release the RRC connection;

2.

If there has been non-MBMS services established for this UE, SRNS relocation with
CELL/URA update will be triggered.

When CELL_DCH UE moves into DRNC and Iur interface exists, Iur soft handover will
be triggered.

When UE moves into DRNC and Iur interface does not exist, DRNC will indicate UE to
release the RRC connection.

DRNC informs SRNC through Direct Information Transfer:


The MBMS service transfer mode in the cell during Session setup;
The MBMS service transfer mode change in the cell during session transferring;
The Preferred Frequency Layer information of MBMS service;

The Iur interface mobility management is enhanced in RAN11.0. For example, when the UE
which has MBMS service in PTP mode in CELL_DCH state moves to DRNC from SRNC, it
will setup a new RL through Iur interface. However, if the cell in DRNC is transferring the
MBMS service through PTM mode, and the UE just has MBMS service, the UE will get the
MBMS service through PTM mode in DRNC to save transmission resources.

Enhancement

RAN11.0
In RAN11.0, the DRNC informs the SRNC about more MBMS service control
information through the Direct Information Transfer message.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

UE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

NA

Other Network Units


The neighboring RNC should support MBMS Iur function.

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2

1.4.21 WRFD-010662 Dynamic Power Estimation for


MTCH
Model
QW1S00DPEP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature enables the dynamic adjustment of the transmit power of the MTCH based on the
number of neighboring cells in PTM mode.

Benefits
Cell power can be saved by making use of soft combining gain with neighbors.

Description
To guarantee the QoS at the cell boundary, power setting for MTCH (PTM bearer) is high in
general, which means power waste. Simulation also shows that soft combining can provide
quite high gain (4.6-6.6 dB), so it's possible to set power dynamically.
Dynamic Power Setting in PTM mode:

If more than a certain portion (operator accessible parameter) of neighbors adopt PTM
mode, the power setting for the serving cell can be decreased by a specific offset
(operator accessible parameter).

If less than a certain portion of neighbors adopt PTM mode, the power setting for the
serving cell would be recovered to the original one.

This feature will not conflict with the two power levels (Upper and Lower) defined for
MBMS Broadcast Service. Furthermore, this feature takes effect on the base of the latter
feature because it only introduced a power OFFSET.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2

1.4.22 WRFD-010663 MSCH Scheduling


Model
QW1SMSCHSC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Summary
This feature enables the UE to perform DRX on the MTCH based on MSCH scheduling,
saving the power consumption of the UE.

Benefits
MSCH enables the UE to perform DRX on the MTCH and saves power consumption of the
UE.

Description
The RNC can send the MBMS scheduling information to the UE on the MSCH, which
enables the UE in PTM reception mode to implement Discontinuous Reception (DRX) on the
MTCH instead of continuous reception on the MTCH. This effectively reduces power
consumption of the UE. The MBMS scheduling information is sent periodically and the
period is called "MSCH reception cycle". The MSCH reception cycle and its offset
information are transmitted on the MCCH. When the MSCH is used, each S-CCPCH bearing
the MTCH/FACH should carry an MSCH/FACH. The channel mapping is shown below:

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

RAN11.0 supports the MSCH as follows: One cell supports up to 8 MSCHs (in the case of 16
MTCHs and 8 S-CCPCHs)
Restriction: If one S-CCPCH bears only one MTCH, then the MSCH should not be used.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

1.4.23 WRFD-010665 MBMS Channel Audience


Rating Statistics
Model
QW1SMBMCAR00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Summary
This feature enables the statistics of the information on MBMS channels to help the operator
obtain the audience rating of the MBMS channels.

Benefits
With this feature, the operator can obtain the audience rating statistics on MBMS channels
and their occupation in system resources.

Description
This function takes traffic statistics based on MBMS channels. Up to five channels to be
measured can be set on the M2000, then the channels ID will be sent to the corresponding
RNC. The RNC takes statistics of the following counters:

Average number of users in PTP mode

Average number of users in PTM mode

Time for channels remaining in PTM mode

Time for channels remaining in PTP mode

Based on the previous counters, the average time for each online user of the channel can be
calculated.
Currently, general counters are measured on the basis of a cell.
As the operator has a strong desire to obtain the counters based on MBMS channels, this
feature is a very important function.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The BMSC on the CN side shall identify the channels with a fixed TMGI when
delivering the program source.

Other Features
WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

1.5 LCS
1.5.1 WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based
LCS
Model
QW1SCIDRTV00
QW1SCIDRTP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
With this feature, Huawei RAN supports location services based on Cell ID + RTT.

Benefits
This feature provides a location service for operators.

Description
Huawei RAN supports location service based on Cell-Id + RTT which locates the UE (CELLDCH) position by computing the TOA. (Time of Arrive).

The TOA can be derived by the NodeB RTT (Round Trip Time) measurement and the UE RxTx time difference Type 2 measurement.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

In the CELLID+RTT positioning method, the simplest solution is to take the geometrical
center of the reference cell coverage area as the positioning result. This solution requires no
positioning-related measurement and provides the shortest response time.
If the CN requires a positioning of high accuracy, the CELLID+RTT method must employ
more measurements as follows:

The RNC asks all cells in the active set to perform the RTT measurement.

The RNC asks the UE to perform the UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement of the
corresponding cell. If the UE does not support the UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurements, the
RNC will ask the UE to perform the UE Rx-Tx type 1 measurement.

When the cell is located in different RNCs, the location over Iur is supported.

Enhancement

RAN5.1
Location over Iur interface is supported in RAN5.1.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE is needed to report the relevant measurement results.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN is needed to trigger the location request.

Other Features
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

1.5.2 WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS


Model
QW1SLAGPSV00
QW1SLAGPSP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
With this feature, Huawei RAN supports network-assisted GPS location services.

Benefits
This feature provides a highest accuracy location service.

Description
Huawei supports the UE-based and UE-assisted location services. To support this method,
RNC may deploy a GPS reference receiver to keep tracking the latest GPS data including
ephemeris, almanac, and DGPS data, and calculates the fresh GPS assistance data for UE
according to the latest GPS data and the UE's reference position.
When RNC receives a LOCATON REPORT CONTROL message and the A-GPS method is
selected, it sends a GPS measurement request to UE with the GPS assistance data calculated,
and calculates the position of UE when it receives the GPS measurement report. For UEbased A-GPS method, RNC directly forwards the location estimate from UE to MSC/SGSN.
When the cell is located in different RNCs, the location over Iur is supported.

Enhancement

RAN5.1
RAN5.1 supports the positioning through the Iur interface.

Dependency

RNC
If GPS receiver is located at RNC, the RNC must be configured with a clock board that
has a GPS module.

NodeB
If GPS receiver is located at Node B, Node B should be equipped with USCU card with
GPS function.

UE
UE is needed to report the relevant measurement results.

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

CN
CN is needed to trigger the location request.

Other Features
NA

1.5.3 WRFD-020804 LCS Classified Zones


Model
QW1SLCSCZV00
QW1SLCSCZP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
This feature enables a classified zone set on the OAM to be mapped to a specific service area.
When a classified zone of the UE is changed, the RNC sends a location report to the CN.

Benefits
The operator can provide the information and service for the subscriber actively according to
the location of the subscriber.The subscriber in movement can obtain itslocation information
quickly.

Description
The RNC supports mapping a classified zone set by OAM to a specific Service Area. When a
mobile enters or leaves a classified zone, the RNC will generate a location report and send the
location report to corresponding CN through Location Report procedure. In LOCATION
REPORT message, the Service Area of the UE in the Area Identity IE will be included. The
CN shall react to the LOCATION REPORT message with service vendor specific actions.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Network Units


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

NA

CN
CN node must support this feature simultaneously.

Other Features
NA

1.5.4 WRFD-020805 LCS over Iur


Model
QW1SLCIURV00
QW1SLCIURP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.1.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
With this feature, Huawei RAN can provide location services through the Iur interface to
extend the positioning area.

Benefits
As enhancement to location service, the positioning area is widely extended, and more
reliable and precise positioning capability is achieved.

Description
Location service over Iur is supported for CELL ID+RTT and A-GPS positioning.

CELL ID+RTT
CELL ID+RTT positioning is based on the cell position information and TOA (Time of
Arrival), for which RTT (Round Trip Time), UE RxTx time difference measurements are
needed. In case (illustrated in figure below) inter-RNC handover happened during the
positioning with CELL ID+RTT, CELL ID+RTT positioning over Iur should be
performed, including Iur interface dedicated measurement for RTT and information
exchange for neighbor RNC cell reference position (Geographical Coordinates).

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

SHAPE

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Dedicated measurement over Iur for RTT


Iur dedicated measurement procedure for acquisition of RTT is illustrated in figure
below.

SHAPE
Information exchange over Iur for cell reference position
To get the neighbor RNC cell reference position, information exchange procedure should be
performed, with "Information Type" IE set to "UTRAN Access Point Position", illustrated in
figure below.

SHAPE

A-GPS

GPS information is required by A-GPS positioning. RNC maintains the updated GPS data
from itself or neighboring RNCs. After the reference GPS receiver is configured, the GPS
data should be obtained from neighboring RNCs and the information exchange procedure
over Iub should be performed.
During the positioning, if reference cell is located in DRNC, then GPS data from DRNC will
be preferred, and information exchange over Iur for reference cell geographical position will
be triggered.
Information exchange over Iur for GPS information
Information exchange procedure for neighboring RNC's GPS information (with "Information
Type" IE set to "GPS Information") is illustrated in figure below. To get the updated
information, periodic information reporting is applied.

SHAPE
Information exchange over Iur for reference cell geographical position
To get geographical position of reference cell, information exchange procedure is triggered on
demand, for every positioning.

SHAPE

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


The neighbouring RNC should support the information exchanging and related
procedures.

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS or WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based
LCS

1.5.5 WRFD-020807 Iupc Interface for LCS service


Model
QW1SIULCSV00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
This feature supports to connect RNC and SAS (Stand-Alone SMLC) with Iupc interface
which is fully compliant with 3GPP. In this way the LCS function is working under SAScentric mode. This feature is usually employed when one SAS connects with many RNCs.

Benefits
This feature offers a SAS centric Position Service mode. The merits of SAS centric mode are:
The deployed LCS algorithm and the accuracy for a certain LCS procedure are controlled by
the SAS. The operator can conveniently do the LCS service maintenance without the
technical support of RNC vendors.
In SAS-centric mode, the SAS calculate the location data. In this way, the RNC does not need
to reserve resource for LCS services.

Description
3GPP protocol offers SAS-centric mode and RNC-centric mode LCS functions.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

When it works in SAS-centric mode, SAS can receive location request via RNC from CN, it
will initiate measurement request to RNC, RNC will trigger UE measurement and send the
measure result to SAS, SAS calculate the location and send the location result to CN via
RNC.
The SAS-centric mode is illustrated in the network diagram below:

Huawei supports to connect RNC and SAS with Iupc interface. The Iupc interface is fully
compliant with the 3GPP protocol. The Iupc interface is available with IP connection. All the
IP interface boards for Iu/Iur interface in RNC support Iupc with SCCP connection.
Huawei RNC supports the following functions:
SAS-centric mode: LCS algorithm and process are controlled by SAS, the RNC only offers
LCS measurement;
In SAS-centric mode, RNC supports A-GPS and CELLID+RTT LCS method;
If the operator needs to use other LCS algorithm or process, the RNC-centric mode is
recommended.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
Only the IP interface boards support this feature.

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Other Features
When the operator employs Cell ID+RTT algorithm, the feature WRFD-020801 Cell ID
+ RTT Function Based LCS is needed.
When the operator employs A-GPS algorithm, the feature WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based
LCS is needed.

1.6 PTT
1.6.1 WRFD-020134 Push to Talk
Model
QW1SPTALKC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature is a part of end-to-end PTT solution. PTT needs support from the UE, RAN, CN,
and PTT server. In this feature, the RAN identifies PTT services and implements technologies
to reduce the delay of PTT services.

Benefits
This feature supports PTT solution from RAN side. By reducing the delay of PTT service, this
feature can also help to improve user satisfaction.

Description
PTT is a service option of conversing on half-duplex and point-to-point or point-to-multipoint
communication lines. A PTT connection connects instantly without ringing after a subscriber
simply presses a key. In addition, a caller can speak to a group of persons with a single button
press. Therefore, PTT is characterized by quick call establishment and convenient team
communication. The following figure shows an application of PTT in a UMTS network.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

PTT services consist of start-up process and call setup process:


Start-up process
After a UE starts the PTT client, the startup process begins. The process includes the
following actions:
PTT UE registration
In this process, UE registers itself in PTT server by message exchange.
PTT UE identification
In this process, RNC will identify the PTT UE when receiving a RAB Assignment with
special QoS parameters and then keep the UE in CELL_PCH/URA_PCH state.
Call setup process
After a subscriber presses the PTT button, the call setup process begins. The network will
setup channel for the PTT service.
The delay of PTT call establishment should be short. To reduce the end-to-end delay, the
following technologies are used in the call setup process.
Always On: RNC retains the UE in CELL_PCH/URA_PCH state when there is no data
activity, that is, the UE is always on in RNC. CN also has mechanism to keep UE always on.
The Always On state allows when the UE has traffic, it need not to re-setup the RRC
connection and perform activation procedure.
P2D direct state transition: A PTT UE directly transfers its state from the
CELL_PCH/URA_PCH state to the CELL_DCH state. This is to reduce the PTT transmission
delay and improve the PTT call setup performance.
Preferred paging: The RNC prioritizes PTT paging over paging of other lower priority
applications to improve PTT call setup delay performance.
Early Reception and Transmission: RAN supports the reception of PTT user data on E-DCH
before receiving the Cell Update Confirm Response message from the PTT UE; RAN also
supports transmit message to the PTT UE over the HS-DSCH channel without waiting for the
Cell Update Confirm Response to reduce the delay.
Fast L1 synchronization: The TS 25.331 in 3GPP Release 6 introduces the "Post-verification
period" IE to indicate whether a UE uses fast L1 synchronization. This IE is included in the
Radio Bearer Reconfiguration and Cell Update Confirm messages. Fast L1 synchronization
allows PTT UEs to perform uplink and downlink L1 synchronization concurrently, reduces
the PTT call setup delay for PTT UEs in CELL_PCH/URA_PCH state at the start of the call.
Scheduling: PTT services are carried on the HSPA, NodeB schedules PTT as VoIP in the
downlink, and NodeB applies non-scheduling policy for PTT in the uplink.
Enhanced CELL-PCH: With E-PCH function, PCCH can be mapped to HS-DSCH when UE
in URA_PCH state, PCCH/DCCH/DTCH can be mapped to HS-DSCH when UE is in
CELL_PCH state, UE can directly receive data on HS-DSCH without any state transfer, so
the data transmission delay will be reduced.
With these technologies, the PTT call setup time can be reduced to about 1.1-1.3s.

Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

1 Voice & Other Services

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE need to support this feature

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN need to support this feature

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package
WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH
WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Data Services

2.1 HSDPA 7.2Mbps


2.1.1 WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package
Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R5.

Summary
High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) is one of the important features defined in
3GPP specifications. HSDPA can greatly increase the peak rate per user, shorten the round trip
delay, and improve the system capacity. This feature package provides the basic functions of
HSDPA to meet the requirements for test or trial operations of HSDPA services.

Benefits
HSDPA improves the performance of the UMTS network in the following aspects:

Providing high rate throughput

Shorter round trip time

Higher system capacity

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Description
High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) is an important feature of 3GPP Release 5.
The maximum downlink throughput is achieved by sharing CE resources, power resources,
and code resources with new physical channels and downlink shared transport channel for
HSDPA. The physical channels are HS-SCCH, HS-PDSCH, and HS-DPCCH, and the
transport channel is HS-DSCH. HD-PDSCH (SF = 16) will utilize the remaining TX power
and codes in a cell, which enables the resource to be dynamically shared among users.
Some key functions are also used in HSDPA for maximizing resource utilization, including 2
ms TTI, hybrid ARQ with soft combining (HARQ), Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC),
and fast scheduling algorithm.
The application of 2 ms TTI greatly reduces the round trip time. At the same time, some
functions are moved down to the NodeB that also contributes to reducing the round trip time.
When compared with RLC re-transmission, HARQ provides a more highly efficient retransmission mechanism. The UE can request for retransmission of only erroneously received
data immediately and combine the retransmission data with original transmission data through
soft combining.
AMC enables the system to decide the Transport Block (TB) size and the modulation mode
according to estimated channel condition indicated by the UE. When the UE is in favorable
radio environment, the transmission can adopt 16 QAM modulation mode and large transport
blocks to increase the capacity and data rate.
The fast scheduling algorithm includes Max C/I, Round Robin, Proportional Fair (PF), and
Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF). EPF is based on the PF algorithm which can provide users
with Guaranteed Bit Rate service for I/B services.
HSDPA is mainly used for packet services and can bear the interactive, background, and
streaming services. The HSDPA traffic can use a dedicated carrier or a shared carrier with
R99. The system should be capable of handling both cases.
The system should consider the mobility management of the HSDPA services, such as the
intra-RNC handover, inter-RNC handover, and soft handover for the DCH.

Enhancement

RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, HSDPA Introduction Package is enhanced. For details, see the enhancement
of the sub-features in the HSDPA Introduction Package.

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, HSDPA Introduction Package is enhanced. For details, see the enhancement
of the sub-features in the HSDPA Introduction Package.

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, HSDPA Introduction Package is enhanced. For details, see the
enhancement of the sub-features in the HSDPA Introduction Package.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NBBI and NDLP do not support this feature.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

UE
UE should have the HSDPA capability.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

2.1.2 WRFD-01061017 QPSK Modulation


Model
QW1SDPAINP00
QWMS00QPSK00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature is related to QPSK modulation. QPSK modulation is a basic downlink data
modulation function that is used after HSDPA is introduced.

Benefits
This feature provides higher service bit rate to enhance the user experience.

Description
Quaternary Phase Shift Keying (QPSK)
The HS-PDSCH is used to carry the HS-DSCH data. HS-PDSCH can use QPSK or 16QAM
modulation symbols.
When the UE is in the unfavorable radio environment, the transmission can adopt the loworder QPSK modulation mode and small transport blocks to ensure communication quality.
When the UE is in the favorable radio environment, the transmission can adopt the high order
16QAM modulation mode and large transport blocks to reach a high peak rate.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.3 WRFD-01061001 15 Codes per Cell


Model
QW1SDPAINP00
QWMS0HDPAC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature provides code resources occupied by Huawei HSDPA services. The HS-PDSCHs
can use up to 15 codes in a cell.

Benefits
HSDPA with 15 codes makes it possible to introduce higher bit rate service from day one and
improve system capacity.

Description
High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) is an important feature of 3GPP Release 5,
which provides high speed downlink services. A new downlink shared transport channel, HSDSCH, is introduced for carrying services. The transport channel HS-DSCH is mapped on
one or several High-Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channels (HS-PDSCHs) which are
simultaneously received by the UE. In the 3GPP standard, there are up to 15 HS-PDSCHs per
cell with the spreading factor fixed to 16. The number of HS-PDSCHs per NodeB is
configurable and depending on the license, the NodeB can dynamically share codes licenses
to HS-PDSCH between cells.
The HS-PDSCHs can use up to 15 codes in one cell by which the supported peak rate of air
interface can reach up to 14.4 Mbit/s. The system capacity is improved by supporting 15
codes.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.4 WRFD-01061018 Time and HS-PDSCH Codes


Multiplex
Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature enables the allocation of different codes in the same TTI to different users or the
time division multiplexing of the same code in different TTIs for different users to provide the
utilization of code resources and the system throughput.

Benefits
This feature improves the efficiency and performance of HSDPA service.

Description
The parallel data transmission of multiple users over HS-DSCH requires more HS-SCCH
codes and HS-PDSCH codes within a single TTI. Code multiplexing is adopted and is found
useful when the NodeB has more HS-PDSCH codes for allocation than those supported by the
UE. For instance, the UE supports 5 codes and the NodeB has 10 codes available in a single
TTI. The code multiplexing can increase the resource utilization and system throughput.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.5 WRFD-01061009 HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling


(MAX C/I, RR and PF)
Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature is related to hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) and HSDPA scheduling
algorithms. Huawei provides multiple HSDPA scheduling algorithms such as Max C/I, RR,
PF, and EPF.

Benefits
This feature provides the flexibility for the operator to select the scheduling algorithm, after
considering the system capacity and fairness among the users.

Description
HARQ
For the HSDPA services at the physical layer, if errors occur in decoding, the HARQ reserves
the data before the decoding and combines it with the retransmitted data.
Compared with R99, HARQ retransmission is faster and more efficient than RLC
retransmission. In this sense, the HARQ can be called a new technology and a combination of
the Forward Error Correction (FEC) and ARQ. HARQ has a higher downlink performance
gain.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

At every TTI (2 ms), the scheduling algorithm enables the system to decide the UEs for data
transmission. This feature provides different HSDPA schedule algorithms, considering the
tradeoff between system capacity and fairness among the users.
Four scheduling algorithms are provided and the operator decides which algorithm to choose.

Max C/I

RR (round Robin)

PF (proportional fair)

During the scheduling procedure, the several aspects to be considered include CQI, user
priority, channel quality, service bit rate, and re-transmission. All scheduling algorithms
support the retransmission priority rule. If a UE requires retransmission at a certain
scheduling time, the UE is scheduled at a higher priority.
In addition, two factors may affect the accuracy of the CQI reported by the UE:

Channel environment of the UE

Measurement error of a specific UE

If the CQI reported by the UE does not reflect the actual radio conditions, this will lead to the
decrease of HS-DSCH transmission efficiency, because both scheduling and TFRC selection
are performed on the basis of the reported CQI.
To avoid the negative impact on the system caused by inaccurate CQI reports, the CQI
adjustment algorithm can revise the reported CQI according to the ACK or NACK of initial
transmission and the initial BLER target. The adjusted CQI is used for MAC-hs scheduling
and TFRC selection.

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, the functionality of compressed mode tracing during scheduling is
supported. That is, if a TTI is overlapped with a UE's compression mode gap, this UE
should not be scheduled in this TTI.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

2.1.6 WRFD-01061005 HSDPA Static Code Allocation


and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation
Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature is related to HSDPA static code allocation and RNC-controlled dynamic code
allocation. When R99 and HSDPA services co-exist, this feature enables full use of
channelized code resources to improve the efficiency and system capacity.

Benefits
The HSPDA static code allocation function helps to improve the system throughput of
HSDPA service and achieve high code utilization. R99 service and HSDPA service can coexist with less conflict of resources.

Description
Before the NodeB starts to transmit data on the HS-DSCH, the RNC shall allocate the
channelization code for HS-SCCH with an SF of 128 and for HS-PDSCH with an SF of 16.
Generally, the RNC allocates as many HS-PDSCH codes to the NodeB as possible to improve
the system capacity and spectral efficiency. On the other hand, the channelization codes
reserved for HS-PDSCH transmission cannot be simultaneously used for transmission of the
R99 channel, and hence the allocation of many HS-PDSCH codes might eventually result in
blocking of R99 users. Therefore, it is important for the RNC and NodeB to properly utilize
the channelization code resources to improve both efficiency and system capacity.
There are two strategies for allocating HS-PDSCH codes: static allocation and dynamic
allocation. The two strategies have different effects on the HSDPA service.
There defined two types of code strategy for HS-PDSCH code allocation, which can take
different effects on the HSDPA service, static allocation, and dynamic allocation.
Static allocation is generally used at the initial HSDPA deployment stage because there are
less HSDPA users and more R99 users at this stage. The RNC reserves some codes for the
HS-PDSCH and the DPCH while other common channels use the rest codes. The number of
reserved codes for the HS-PDSCH is configurable.

With the increasing demand for the HSDPA service, dynamic HS-PDSCH code allocation is
needed to increase code utilization efficiency. According to the code allocation controller, the
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

code allocation is of two types, namely the RNC-controlled dynamic HS-PDSCH code
allocation and the NodeB-controlled dynamic HS-PDSCH code allocation.
In the RNC-controlled dynamic HS-PDSCH code allocation, the RNC determines the
maximum number and minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes that NodeB can use and then
informs the NodeB about the code information through the Physical Shared Channel
Reconfigure Request signaling message. The code resources between the maximum number
of codes and the minimum number of codes are shared codes. If the shared codes are available
for HSDPA, the RNC increases the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes and informs the
NodeB about this information. The RNC is in charge of the code management.

Enhancement

RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, the RNC-controlled dynamic HS-PDSCH code allocation is introduced.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.7 WRFD-01061004 HSDPA Power Control


Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Summary
This feature enables the operator to properly configure the power control mode of the HSSCCH, improving the power efficiency and obtaining higher system capacity and user
experience.

Benefits
This feature enables the system to provide reliable reception quality for the HS-SCCH. It can
increase system capacity and reduce the NodeB power output for the HS-SCCH, raising the
total transmission power utilization.

Description
When the HSDPA service is introduced, the total transmit DL power resource per cell is
divided into three parts, namely, common channel power, DPCH power, and HSDPA physical
channel power (HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH).
In order to achieve high HSDPA performance, the power resource, except for those reserved
for common channel, is dynamically allocated between DPCH and HSDPA physical channel.
In the case of the R99 service, the power of DPCH is adjusted through inner and outer loop
power control. The power of HSDPA channel is allocated and adjusted dynamically among
users through the NodeB scheduling algorithm.
With dynamical power allocation, the NodeB estimates the power available for the entire
HSDPA channel per TTI by using the following formula:
P(hs) = P(total) - P(margin) - P(non-hsdpa).
The P(total) is the maximum downlink transmission power for the cell that is configured in
the RNC. The P(non-hsdpa) is the total transmitted carrier power of all codes not used for HSPDSCH and HS-SCCH. P(margin) is a configurable value which is used for the power
increase caused by R99 power control at every 2 ms TTI.
The NodeB then adjusts the power between HS-SCCH and HS-PDSCH. Normally, there are
two types of power control methods for the HS-SCCH:

Fixed transmitting power of the HS-SCCH

Based on CQI report

In the NodeB, the fixed transmit power of the HS-SCCH can be configured by the operator.
For the power control based on CQI report, the HS-SCCH transmit power is adjusted on the
basis of the CQI report received from the user.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

UE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.8 WRFD-01061003 HSDPA Admission Control


Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature implements admission control over HSDPA users in the aspects such as the
number of HSDPA users, remaining power resources, Iub interface resources, and service rate
thresholds. This feature can ensure QoS of the existing HSDPA users while fully utilizing the
resources.

Benefits
This feature enables HSDPA services to properly utilize system resources and enables HSDPA
and R99 services to exist in the same cell. The system resource can be reserved in terms of the
Iub transport resource, power resources, and user number resources to provide high bit rate
service for users.

Description
HSDPA service admission control enables HSDPA service to access the network with other
R99 services by using the remaining power resource as well as other resources. It can utilize
the system resources greatly.
In the HSDPA admission control procedure, the maximum number of HSDPA users per
NodeB and per cell is dependent on the configuration.
If the downlink carrier power is dynamically allocated between R99 and HSDPA channels, the
admission control will involve not only the limitation of total HSDPA user number for best
effort services, but also the sum of downlink code transmission power for both DPCH and
HS-PDSCH carrying streaming service.
Iub interface resources check is performed during the admission control to allow HSDPA
service and other R99 services to be admitted under a certain ensured QoS.
During the admission control, the RNC will decide whether to map the service onto the HSDSCH by setting service rate thresholds in the RNC. The thresholds include a DL streaming
service HSDPA threshold and a DL BE service HSDPA threshold. The call can be mapped on
HSDPA only when the requested bit rate of the incoming call is greater than the threshold.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Enhancement

RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, GBR for BE (interactive/background) over HSPA can be configured, so the
minimum throughput for BE over HSPA should be guaranteed. GBR is used to estimate
whether the maximum available power for HSDPA can satisfy the requirement of
interactive/background service in RAN5.1.
In RAN5.1, the power available for HSDPA GBR services shall be guaranteed during the
admission control. This part of the power shall not be pre-empted by R99 services,
although the power is shared between R99 and HSDPA.

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, queuing and pre-emption are considered for HSDPA if admission control
fails.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.9 WRFD-01061020 Improvement of User


Experience in Low Traffic Service
Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
This feature is implemented in the following procedure: NodeB identifies the characteristics
of services carried on the HSPA channel to find the low traffic services, such as gaming
service and chat service (MSN messenger for example), which have a small number of data to
transmit each time. Then, improve the capability of services to obtain resources on the basis
of the scheduling and flow control principles of HSPA, improving the low traffic service delay
experience.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Benefits
UEs can obtain good delay experience when they use the services with burst low traffic.

Description
The HSPA provides higher bandwidth and supports more services.
However, UMTS network is a radio network whose radio resources are shared by all the UEs
in a cell. When the traffic volume in a cell is high, the QoS of low traffic services is easily
impacted by other services, such as gaming and chatting. This feature identifies a burst service
based on the traffic features, and then reallocates much higher bandwidth to it. Therefore, a
larger bandwidth is available for the data transmission of the low traffic service, and the UE
obtains better service delay experience.
The priority of the UE can be considered in the feature to provide differentiated services to
low traffic services.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EULP,
EBBI, EBOI or EULPd board. The BBU3806 should be configured with the EBBC or
EBBCd board. The BBU3900 should be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or
WBBPf board.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package or WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction
Package

2.1.10 WRFD-01061019 HSDPA Dynamic Power


Allocation
Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Summary
This feature enables R99 and HSDPA services to share the cell power. This feature can ensure
the requirements of R99 users and make HSDPA users obtain a higher throughput, greatly
improving the power efficiency.

Benefits
This feature enables HSDPA services to properly utilize system resources and enables HSDPA
and R99 services to exist in the same cell. The system resource can be reserved in terms of the
Iub transport resource, power resources, and user number resources to provide high bit rate
service for users.

Description
The cell total transmit power is the constant resource. The DL power consists of the following
three parts:

Power of the HSDPA DL physical channel (HS-SCCH and HS-PDSCH)

Common channel power

DPCH power

Among the three parts, the second is reserved and the first is allocated by the NodeB.
Except those reserved for the common channels, the remaining power resources of the cell are
allocated dynamically between the DPCH and the HSDPA DL physical channels. The DPCH
assumes higher priority with regard to using the remaining power resources.

As shown in the figure above, the NodeB detects the R99 power load every 2 ms to determine
the available power for HSDPA. In this way, the cell load is more stable.
To obtain the available power for HSDPA, a power margin must be set aside to handle the
power increase caused by R99 power control every 2 ms.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.11 WRFD-01061010 HSDPA Flow Control


Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature enables the resource information interaction between the RNC and NodeB to
ensure that the data to be transmitted by the UE matches the scheduled one. In addition, this
feature can minimize the buffer size and buffer time of the NodeB to avoid data loss probably
caused by overtime data buffering.

Benefits
This feature can prevent packet loss and maximize the utilization of power and code
resources. It enables the service scheduling and re-transmission functions in the NodeB and
reduces the data transmission latency.

Description
HSDPA flow control ensures that the NodeB queue has enough data to be transmitted for a
UE when this UE is scheduled. At the same time, flow control feature can minimize the buffer
size and buffer time in the NodeB in order to avoid data loss probably caused by overtime
data buffering.
The RNC sends CAPACITY REQUEST control frame to the NodeB through the Iub
interface. The NodeB will monitor the buffer status and measure the throughput when the UE
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

is scheduled. Meanwhile, the NodeB considers the Iub interface throughput as well as the Iub
bandwidth. A CAPACITY ALLOCATION message will be sent to the RNC after the NodeB
decides how much data to send.
The NodeB can also initiate the update of capacity allocation towards the RNC based on the
buffer size of the queue and the available bandwidth on the Iub interface.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.12 WRFD-01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management


Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature is related to HSDPA mobility management in different scenarios. This feature
ensures that the HSDPA services are continuous.

Benefits
This feature reduces the service disruption of the UE in movement when performing the
HSDPA service, enhancing user experience. In addition, this feature ensures that the services
between R99 and HSDPA cells are continuous.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Description
The HSDPA mobility management function enables an HSDPA user to change the cell to an
R99 cell or another HSDPA cell when the HSDPA user is in movement. The mobility feature
also enables an HSDPA user to change the servicing cell with less service interruption.
The difference in mobility handling is that the HS-DSCH cannot perform soft handover
compared with the DCH. In addition, there is only one serving HSDPA cell or HSDPA
connection for the HSDPA user. The HSDPA cell change procedure is used for the HSDPA
user mobility solution. The associated DCH can undergo soft handover and maintain the
Active Set as described in Release 99.
The similarity in mobility handling is that both HS-DSCH and DCH handovers are based on
the measurement report of the UE and controlled by the network. If the UE has both the
HSDPA and the DPCH connections, the measurement and the handover decision are made
separately.

Handover from HSDPA Cell to R99 Cell


When the UE is moving from an HSDPA cell to a R99 cell (intra-frequency) and event
1B, 1C or 1D is triggered, the HSDPA connection between UE and HSDPA cell will be
changed to the DCH connection between UE and R99 cell through DCH soft handover
and HS-DSCH radio link reconfiguration. The HSDPA cell is no longer the best cell in
the Active Set and the target cell does not support HSDPA. Therefore, the current HSDSCH cell will be replaced or removed from the Active Set and the service will be
changed to the DCH instead of the HS-DSCH for service continuity.
If the neighboring cell of HSDPA cell is an inter-frequency cell and does not support
HSDPA, a hard handover will be performed. The HSDPA handover decision is based on
the measurement report of the pilot channels of neighboring cells.

Handover from R99 Cell to HSDPA Cell


When an HSDPA capable UE with interactive/background/streaming service accesses the
R99 cell, only the DCH is used to carry these services. And when the UE is moving from
R99 cell to HSDPA cell (intra-frequency or inter-frequency), the system can change the
service to HS-DSCH channel.
For intra-frequency cell, the DPCH connection between UE and HSDPA cell will be set
up first due to event 1A. When the HSDPA cell becomes the best cell and event 1D is
triggered, the service will be switched from the DPCH to the HS-PDSCH of the HSDPA
cell carrying the PS service.
For inter-frequency cell, when the UE moves, an inter-frequency handover is triggered if
the quality of the signals of HSDPA cell improves. The UE changes from R99 cell to
HSDPA cell and the PS service will be switched from the DPCH to the HS-PDSCH.

Handover Among HSDPA Cells


For intra-frequency cell, cell change takes place when the HSDPA connection is moved
from one HSDPA cell to another. The source HSDPA cell is removed from the Active Set
trigged by event 1D and target HSDPA cell is added to the Active Set as a best cell.
For inter-frequency cell, an inter-frequency handover between HSDPA cells is triggered.
The service will be changed to the HS-DSCH of the target cell. The hard handover
depends on the UE measurement.

Handover from HSDPA Cell to 2G cell


The handover from an HSDPA cell to a 2G cell is triggered by normal inter-RAT
handover. For details, refer to the features of inter-RAT handover. Whether to downgrade
the HSDPA service to the R99 service before handover can be configured by the
operator.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Inter RNC mobility for HSDPA


For cell change between RNCs, the Directed Signaling Connection Re-establishment
(DSCR) and SRNC relocation procedure will be used. The DSCR is used for the UE
moving between RNCs without the Iur interface. The procedure is trigged by the UE
which sends the RRC CONNECTION SETUP REQUEST message in the DRNC. At this
time, the UE moves to the cell of the DRNC and no handover or relocation occurs.

Enhancement

RAN16.0
RAN16.0 has the following enhancements:

The size of the HSDPA serving cell change message is reduced.

The Delay restriction flag IE, introduced in 3GPP Release 6, is included in the
HSDPA serving cell change message.

A parameter indicating the time offset used to activate a new configuration is added
to the HSDPA serving cell change procedure.

These enhancements can significantly reduce HSDPA serving cell change delays.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.13 WRFD-01061014 HSDPA Transport Resource


Management
Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0

Summary
This feature enables different HSDPA services to be mapped to different paths for classified
management, optimizing the utilization of Iub transmission resources for the HSDPA services.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Benefits
Differentiated service is implemented on different paths and the QoS and network
performance are optimized.Improve the transport resource utilization and save OPEX for Iub
transmission.

Description
With the introduction of the HSDPA feature, the throughput over the Iub interface may be
increased and varied greatly. This feature is used to optimize the usage of Iub transport
resources for the HSDPA services. The features concerned are as follows:

Differentiated services mapping

Transport resource load control

I. Differentiated services mapping


The CS conversational, PS conversational, PS streaming and best effort services can be setup
on HSDPA. Different services have different QoS requirements, in RAN11.0 HSDPA services
are considered unified with common channel and R99 services in Transmission Resource
Mapping. The details of unified Transmission Resource Mapping belongs to optional feature
WRFD-050424 Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources. By using this feature,
different services are carried on corresponding paths, and the differentiated service is
implemented.
II. Transmission resource load control
Transmission resource load control includes admission control and congestion control.
For the admission control, the Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) will be considered in the HSDPA
service admission procedure. The GBR belongs to the optional feature WRFD-01061003
HSDPA Admission Control.
For the congestion control, the load reshuffling strategies will be applied to inter-RAT
handover which belongs to the optional feature WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on
Load.

Enhancement

RAN6.1
In RAN6.1, each traffic class mapped onto transmission resource can be configured
separately.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.14 WRFD-01061008 Interactive and Background


Traffic Class on HSDPA
Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature enables interactive and background services to be mapped to the HS-DSCH to
obtain a higher service rate and enhance user experience.

Benefits
This feature enables the system to support a higher speed RAB of PS background and
interactive service.

Description
This feature enables the best effort service (interactive and background) to be mapped onto
the HS-DSCH as long as the UE supports HSDPA. The system can set the service rate
threshold and only when the requested service bit rate is higher than the threshold, the request
service can be mapped onto the HS-DSCH. Otherwise, the requested service will be mapped
onto the DCH. The service rate threshold can be configured by the operator. When the best
effort service is carried on the HS-DSCH, the maximum downlink bit rate can be up to 1.8
Mbit/s (MAC layer).
When a UE is performing interactive or background service, it can use another CS RAB or
another PS RAB. If allowed, the UE can use two HSDPA BE RABs simultaneously.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Network Units


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.15 WRFD-01061002 HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28


Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature can provide suitable HSDPA services for the UEs of category 1 to category 28.

Benefits
This feature supports HSDPA services for 28 categories of UE so as to provide high bit rate
services for different categories of UEs. The maximum bit rate that can be achieved by the UE
depends on the UE specification.

Description
High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) is an important feature of 3GPP Release 5
which can provide high speed service for the downlink. In order to provide multiple bit rate
services, 28 UE categories are defined in 3GPP. Different UE categories can support different
maximum codes for the HS-DSCH, which means that different maximum bit rates can be
achieved.
HS-DSCH
Category

Maximum
Number of
HS-DSCH
Codes
Received

Minimum
Inter-TTI
Interval

Maximum
Number of
Bits

Maximum
Bit Rate

Category 1

7,298

3.649

Category 2

7,298

3.649

Category 3

7,298

3.649

Category 4

7,298

3.649

Category 5

7,298

3.649

Category 6

7,298

3.649

Category 7

10

14,411

7.2055

Category 8

10

14,411

7.2055

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

(Mbit/s)

84

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

HS-DSCH
Category

2 Data Services

Maximum
Number of
HS-DSCH
Codes
Received

Minimum
Inter-TTI
Interval

Maximum
Number of
Bits

Maximum
Bit Rate

Category 9

15

20,251

10.1255

Category 10

15

27,952

13.976

Category 11

3,630

1.815

Category 12

3,630

1.815

Category 13

15

35,280

17.64

Category 14

15

42,192

21.096

Category 15

15

23,370

23.37

Category 16

15

27,952

27.952

Category 17

15

35,280

17.64

23,370

23.37

42,192

21.096

27,952

27.952

Category 18

15

(Mbit/s)

Category 19

15

35,280

35.280

Category 20

15

42,192

42.192

Category 21

15

23,370

23.370

Category 22

15

27,952

27.952

Category 23

15

35,280

35.280

Category 24

15

42,192

42.192

Category 25

15

23,370

46.740

Category 26

15

27,952

55.904

Category 27

15

35,280

70.560

Category 28

15

42,192

84.384

Note: In the "Maximum Number of Bits"column, the bits refer to bits received by the HSDSCH transport block during a TTI on the HS-DSCH.
In the preceding table,
UEs of category 13 and category 14 are only required to support 64QAM.
UEs of category 15 and category 16 are only required to support MIMO.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

UEs of category 17 and category 18 support 64QAM and MIMO, but not simultaneously.
UEs of category 19 and category 20 support 64QAM+MIMO.
UEs of category 21 and category 22 support 16QAM+DC-HSPA \.
UEs of category 23 and category 24 support 64QAM+DC-HSPA.
UEs of category 25 and category 26 support 16QAM+MIMO+DC-HSPA.
UEs of category 27 and category 28 support 64QAM+MIMO+DC-HSPA.

Enhancement

RAN11.0
In RAN11.0, UEs of category 13, category 14, category 15, category16, category17, and
category18 are introduced.

RAN12.0
In RAN12.0, UEs of category 19 to category 24 are introduced.

RAN13.0
In RAN13.0, UEs of category 25 to category 28 are introduced.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.16 WRFD-01061015 HSDPA 1.8Mbps per User


Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature enables the HSDPA rate to reach a maximum of 1.8 Mbit/s for each user.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Benefits
This feature provides a higher peak bit rate and enhances the user experience.

Description
High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) is an important feature of 3GPP Release 5
which can provide high speed service for the downlink. With this feature, the UE with
interactive or background service on the HS-DSCH can reach a peak rate of up to 1.8 Mbit/s
(MAC layer), greatly enhancing user experience.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should have the capability of HSDPA Category 12(or later)category
34567891012,
13141516171819202122232425262728

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN support user rate of 1.8Mbps or above.

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.17 WRFD-01061016 16 HSDPA Users per Cell


Model
QW1SDPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature enables a single HSDPA cell to support 16 HSDPA users simultaneously. If the
number of HSDPA users exceeds 16, the DCH is used for service provisioning.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Benefits
This feature provides operators with a maximum of 16 HSDPA users in an HSDPA capable
cell.

Description
A maximum of 16 HSDPA users can be served simultaneously in an HSDPA capable cell with
this feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.18 WRFD-010620 HSDPA 3.6Mbps per User


Model
QW1SDP3.6M00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.1.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R5.

Summary
This feature enables the HSDPA rate per user to reach a maximum of 3.6 Mbit/s.

Benefits
This feature provides a higher peak bit rate and enhances user experience.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Description
HSDPA is an important feature of 3GPP Release 5 that can provide high speed service for
downlink. With this feature, the UE with interactive or background services on the HS-DSCH
can reach the peak bit rate up to 3.6 Mbit/s (MAC layer). Therefore, user experience is greatly
enhanced.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should have the capability of HSDPA Category 5(or later)category 5,
6789101314151617181920212223242526
2728

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN support user rate of 3.6Mbps or above.

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.19 WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation


Model
QWMS016QAM00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R5.

Summary
Compared with the QPSK modulation, the 16QAM modulation is a higher-order downlink
data modulation mode. This feature enables the peak rate on the Uu interface to reach 14.4
Mbit/s.

Benefits
Provides higher peak bit rate HSDPA service for HSDPA users.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Description
The HS-PDSCH is used to carry the HS-DSCH data. The HS-PDSCH may use QPSK or
16QAM modulation symbols.
When the UE is in the unfavorable radio environment, the transmission can adopt the loworder QPSK modulation mode and small transport blocks to ensure communication quality.
When the UE is in good radio environment, the transmission can adopt the high-order
16QAM modulation mode and large transport blocks to achieve high peak rate.
The UE of category 10 can support a maximum of 15 HS-PDSCH codes and 16QAM
modulation mode. The supported peak rate on the air interface can reach 14.4 Mbit/s.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should have the capability of HSDPA besides Category 11 and Category 12
category
1234567891013141516171819202122
232425262728

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.20 WRFD-010631 Dynamic Code Allocation Based


on NodeB
Model
QWMS00DHCA00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Summary
This feature implements dynamic code allocation on the NodeB side. The NodeB adjusts the
allocation of code resources in each TTI according to available code resources and scheduling
algorithms. This feature can further improve the utilization of code resources.

Benefits
This feature increases the resource utilization and system throughput.

Description
In NodeB-controlled dynamic HS-PDSCH code allocation, NodeB determines the HSPDSCH code use according to the code availability and scheduling algorithm in each 2ms
TTI. NodeB-controlled dynamic HS-PDSCH code allocation is more efficient and flexible
than RNC-controlled dynamic HS-PDSCH code allocation. The resource can be scheduled
and used in a short time in the NodeB, compared with signaling message transmission on the
Iub interface using RNC-controlled dynamic HS-PDSCH code allocation.
HS-DSCH transmission to multiple users in parallel during a single TTI requires more HSSCCH codes and more HS-PDSCH codes. Code multiplexing is adopted and is found useful
in cases where the NodeB has allocated more HS-PDSCH codes than what is supported by the
UE. For instance, the UE supports 5 codes and the NodeB has 10 codes available in a single
TTI. The code multiplexing can increase the resource utilization and system throughput.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.21 WRFD-010621 HSDPA 7.2Mbps per User


Model
QW1SDP7.2M00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature enables the HSDPA rate per user to reach a maximum of 7.2 Mbit/s.

Benefits
This feature provides a higher peak bit rate and enhances user experience.

Description
HSDPA is an important feature of 3GPP Release 5 that can provide high speed service for
downlink. With this feature, the UE with interactive or background services on the HS-DSCH
can reach the peak bit rate of up to 7.2 Mbit/s (MAC layer). Therefore, user experience is
greatly enhanced.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should have the capability of HSDPA Category 7(or later)category
78910131415161718192021222324252627
28

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN support user rate of 7.2Mbps or above.

Other Features
WRFD-010620 HSDPA 3.6Mbps per User WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation

2.1.22 WRFD-010622 32 HSDPA Users per Cell


Model
QW1S32DPAU00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.1.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Summary
This feature enables a single HSDPA cell to simultaneously support 32 HSDPA users. If the
number of HSDPA users exceeds 32, the DCH is attempted for service provisioning.

Benefits
This feature provides HSDPA services at a higher peak bit rate for up to 32 users per cell.

Description
Up to 32 HSDPA users can be admitted to a HSDPA cell.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.23 WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package


Model
QW1S0DENIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.1.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R5.

Summary
This feature provides a series of enhanced HSDPA functions to meet the commercial
requirements of HSDPA services.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Benefits
Enhance the HSDPA performance by introducing the GBR-based QoS guarantee mechanism.
Enhance the HSDPA networking capability to meet HSDPA networking requirements.

Description
HSDPA enhanced package is introduced on the basis of WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction
Package, and provides enhancement features to meet the QoS and HSDPA network
requirements. Related features include:

EPF and GBR Based Scheduling

HSDPAState Transition

HSDPA DRD (Direct Retry Decision)

HS-DPCCH preamble support

Enhancement

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, this feature is enhanced. For details, refer to the enhancement of the features
in the package.

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, this feature is enhanced. For details, refer to the enhancement of the
features in the package.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should support the functions connected with HSDPA Enhanced package.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.24 WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF


and GBR
Model
QW1S0DENIP00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.1.

Summary
The operator can set different QoS parameters (such as priority, weight, and GBR) for
different users. Based on the QoS parameters, the EPF algorithm can accurately allocate
resources by proportion. This feature can make different users obtain accurate differentiated
experience.

Benefits
By satisfying quality requirements of different traffic types, the system capacity is maximized.

Description
Scheduling algorithm is to schedule UEs'transmission every 2ms TTI. Considering a
compromise between the system capacity and user fairness, this feature provides four HSDPA
scheduling algorithms for the operators to choose from:

Max C/I

Round robin algorithm

Proportional Fair algorithm (PF)

Enhanced Proportional Fair algorithm (EPF)

1. In enhanced proportional fair algorithm (EPF), HSDPA carrying services are divided into
two categories: delay-sensitive and throughput-sensitive. Priority is given to delay-sensitive
services during schedule ordering.
2. During uncongested periods in the cell, the EPF algorithm (which is based on the PF
algorithm) can fulfill the latency requirements of delay-sensitive services, and also provide
Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) to throughput-sensitive services. In this way fairness can be
effectively guaranteed between the user and a low QoS priority requirement service.
3. During uncongested periods in the cell after fulfilling the basic QoS requirements of every
user, the EPF algorithm can distribute surplus resources according to Scheduling Priority
Indicator (SPI) weight, allowing throughput-sensitive services to attain higher speeds. In order
to satisfy more users, once BE services have achieved Happy Bit Rate (HBR), the scheduling
priority is reduced significantly, thereby letting the resources to be distributed among other
users. HBR can be configured by the operator.
4. When a cell is uncongested, EPF algorithm will give priority to delay-sensitive services
during resource distribution, thereby guaranteeing the networks basic traffic QoS. In case of
surplus resources, remaining resources will be assigned to throughput-sensitive services.
Moreover, the services will be provided with GBR speed services according to the traffic's
SPI sequence.
5. SPI weight depends on the traffic class, user priority and traffic handling priority (THP).
6. Users can be divided into Gold, Silver and Bronze categories, all mapped by ARP, which
are configurable. Moreover, uplink and downlink GBR configuration is also based on user
priority, and is used for HSDPA scheduling algorithms. Through this feature, HSDPA's QoS
guarantee mechanism is enhanced.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

7. EPF algorithm was introduced in RAN5.1. Based on ARP, SPI mapping also receives
further optimization. Moreover, the minimum throughput of GBR services including BE
services can be configured. Minimal limitations during the scheduling process need to receive
strict assurances.

Enhancement

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, the GBR for Gold/Silver/Bronze users can be configured, this enhances QoS
guarantee mechanism.

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, the scheduling function concerning the signaling RB is added to the EPF
algorithm. In addition, the traffic is classified into delay-sensitive services and
throughput-sensitive services.

RAN11.0
In RAN11.0 EPF algorithm increased the scheduling capabilities of CELL_FACH's
status queue, moreover it introduced HBR, in order to improve user satisfaction.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Differentiated QoS Service

2.1.25 WRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition


Model
QW1S0DENIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Summary
This feature enables the handover between the DCH and HS-DSCH and makes it possible for
the UE to enjoy the high-speed service. When the UE is in the inactive state, this feature
enables the UE to be handed over to the CELL_FACH to save the system resources when
there is no data transferred for a long time.

Benefits
This feature supports the switching between DCH and HS-DSCH and makes it possible for
the UE to enjoy the high speed service. Meanwhile, the system resource is saved by moving
the UE to CELL_FACH when there is no data transferred for a long time.

Description
This feature enables the UE to perform a state transition between CELL_DCH (HS-DSCH),
CELL_DCH, and CELL_FACH. With the introduction of HSDPA, a new RRC state of
CELL_DCH (HS-DSCH) is provided. The following figure shows the RRC state relationship.

Channel Switching Between CELL_DCH (HS-DSCH) and CELL_FACH


If the HS-DSCH is carrying BE service or streaming service and there is no data to be
sent for a long time, the transition from CELL_DCH (HS-DSCH) to CELL_FACH is
triggered. Actually, this feature is supported in the same way as the state transition from
CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.
A UE on CELL_FACH will be switched to CELL_DCH (HS-DSCH) due to a higher bit
rates request on downlink.

Channel Switching Between CELL_DCH (HS-DSCH) and CELL_DCH


The channel switching between HS-DSCH and DCH is mainly triggered by mobility
management. The transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_DCH (HS-DSCH) can be
triggered by periodical retry and the traffic volume
The mobility triggering is described in WRFD-01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management
feature.
The traffic volume report that indicates a higher bit service needs to be transferred. The
UE in CELL_DCH will be transferred to CELL_DCH (HS-DSCH) if it is an HSDPA
capable cell and the UE has HSDPA capability. This feature enables the UE to enjoy high
speed service.
If an HSDPA capable UE is set up on the DCH for BE services for some reasons, for
example, the admission of the HS-DSCH fails, then a periodical retry mechanism is

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

triggered, allowing the UE to enter the CELL_DCH (HS-DSCH). The retry time is
configurable.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS SmartPhone Solution Service

2.1.26 WRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD


Model
QW1S0DENIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.

Summary
This feature enables HSDPA suitable service to be established on the HS-DSCH cell as much
as possible if a UE is HS-DSCH capable, achieving better service performance.

Benefits
This feature enables HSDPA suitable service to be established on the HS-DSCH cell as much
as possible if a UE is HS-DSCH capable, achieving better service performance.

Description
This feature enables HSDPA suitable service be mapped onto the HS-DSCH as soon as
possible if a UE is HS-DSCH capable.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

When a UE camps on an R99-concentric cell and requests for a streaming or BE service


which is HSDPA suitable, the service will be mapped onto the HS-DSCH of the HSDPA
capable cell if allowed by the HSDPA admission control.
In the case a UE camps on an HSDPA cell and requests for a streaming or BE service which is
compatible with HSDPA, if the HSDPA admission fails on the current cell but another
HSDPA capable cell which has the same center as the current cell is available, then the service
will be mapped onto the HS-DSCH of the HSDPA capable cell that has the same center as the
current cell if it is allowed by the HSDPA admission control.
An HSDPA capable UE has an HSDPA suitable service but is currently mapped onto the DCH
due to some limitations (for example, the current cell does not support HSDPA or the HSDPA
admission control fails). If the UE moves around and the best cell begins to support HSDPA,
the service will be re-mapped onto the HS-DSCH of the best cell if allowed by the HSDPA
admission control. If the best cell does not support HSDPA, but there is an HSDPA capable
concentric cell and the HSDPA admission control is allowed, the service will be re-mapped
onto the HS-DSCH of that concentric cell.
An HSDPA capable UE has an HSDPA suitable service, but is currently mapped onto the
CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH (DCH only). In addition, there is a data transmission request on
the downlink, and the concentric cell supports HSDPA instead of the current cell. In this case,
the service will be re-mapped onto the HS-DSCH of that HSDPA capable cell.

Enhancement

RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, in any condition, if an HSDPA capable UE has an HSDPA suitable service,
but is currently not mapped onto the HS-DSCH, and if the current best cell or the
concentric cell of the best cell is HSDPA capable, the RNC will periodically attempt to
re-map the service onto the HS-DSCH until the service retry succeeds.

RAN12.0
In RAN12.0, to reduce the call drop rate, a punishment mechanism is implemented. The
D2H DRD is forbidden for the users which encountered DRD failure at the RAB Setup
procedure. This mechanism can be configured by operator.
In RAN12.0 Periodically DRD based on measurement is introduced, RAB can be setup
in the original DCH cell, and by following inter frequency measurement to chose a
HSDPA cell to perform DRD, reduce the drop rate caused by blind handover. The
Periodically DRD based on blind handover or based on measurement can be selected by
operator.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package

2.1.27 WRFD-01061113 HS-DPCCH Preamble Support


Model
QW1S0DENIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature enables the transmission of dedicated preamble subframes before ACK/NACK
subframes are transmitted on the HS-DPCCH, improving transmission reliability.

Benefits
HS-DPCCH preamble mode technology enables the NodeB to distinguish between DTX and
ACK/NACK without requiring high ACK transmit power
The uplink coverage gain is about 0.2 dB to 0.9 dB with different accompanying DPCH
services.

Description
The High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH) carries uplink feedback
signaling related to downlink HS-DSCH transmission. The HS-DSCH-related feedback
signaling consists of Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgment (HARQ-ACK) and Channel-Quality
Indication (CQI).
If UE detects the HS-SCCH control message, it will reply with an ACK or NACK message
based on the result of the decoding and it will inform the sender of the result to further request
retransmissions.
If the UE does not detect the HS-SCCH control message, it will reply with a DTX message.
To reduce the probability that the NodeB decodes this DTX as ACK by mistake, the transmit
power of the ACK/NACK message should be high.
Huawei supports HS-DPCCH preamble mode detection. The proposed enhancement is to
send special Preamble sub-frames in the uplink HS-DPCCH before an ACK/NACK subframe. This method reduces the probability of a DTX->ACK error in the NodeB, because the
NodeB has to decode at least two successive timeslots erroneously before the earlier
mentioned scenario can take place. Due to the prior preamble information detection, the same
performance of the HARQ-ACK field detection can be sustained with lower power.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board, EBOI
board, EULP or EULPd board.
The BBU3806 need to configure EBBC or EBBCd board.
The BBU3900 need to configure WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
UE should have the capability of HSDPA Category 6(or later) and support this feature.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.28 WRFD-010630 Streaming Traffic Class on


HSDPA
Model
QW1SSTCODP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

This feature is introduced in 3GPP R5.

Summary
This feature enables the streaming services to be mapped onto the HS-DSCH, improving the
utilization of cell resources.

Benefits
This feature enables the system to support a higher speed RAB of PS streaming service.

Description
This feature enables the streaming service to be mapped onto the HS-DSCH if a UE is
HSDPA capable. The system sets a switch to enable or disable the feature that streaming
service is mapped onto the HS-DSCH. A service rate threshold is also set only when the
requested service bit rate is higher than the threshold. At this time, the requested service can
be mapped onto the HS-DSCH. Otherwise, it will be mapped onto DCH. The service rate
threshold can be configured by the operator.
When the streaming service is carried on the HS-DSCH, the maximum downlink bit rate can
reach 384 kbit/s.
When a UE has a streaming service on the HS-DSCH, it can use another CS RAB or another
PS RAB simultaneously. One HSDPA BE RAB and one HSDPA streaming RAB can be used
by one UE simultaneously if the UE capability permits.

Enhancement

RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, GBR of streaming traffic is used to estimate whether the maximum available
power for HSDPA can satisfy the requirement of streaming service and
interactive/background service in admission control in RAN5.1.
The HSDPA scheduling algorithm also considers the GBR information of streaming
traffic so that all HSDPA streaming services are guaranteed when the bit rate is not less
than GBR.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

2.1.29 WRFD-010651 HSDPA over Iur


Model
QW1S0DIURP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R5.

Summary
This feature enables HSDPA services to be carried on the Iur interface and provides
continuous HSDPA services for UEs moving between RNCs.

Benefits
HSDPA over Iur provides continuous HSDPA services for mobile users moving between
RNCs. It enlarges the range of HSDPA services to the RNCs that have Iur connections with a
certain RNC.

Description
HSDPA over Iur is the scenario where the HSDPA serving cell is carried at the DRNC. The
feature includes HSDPA service management over Iur, HSDPA mobility management over
Iur, and so on.

HSDPA service management over Iur


HSDPA service management over Iur refers to HSDPA service setup, modification,
release, and state transition.
When the UE is in the CELL_DCH state and the DRNC cell is in the active set or the UE
is in the CELL_FACH state and camps in a DRNC cell, the HSDPA service can be setup,
modified, and released over Iur.
The service over Iur can be reconfigured between HSDPA and R99 with UE state
transition between CELL_DCH and CELL_FACH.

HSDPA mobility management over Iur


HSDPA mobility management over Iur includes hard handover, cell update (caused by
radio link failure), and serving cell change.
The process is similar to the corresponding mobility management described in WRFD01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management, and the difference is that the cells change
between RNCs.

HSDPA static relocation


If the HSDPA service is over Iur and the radio links are provided only by the target RNC, the
static relocation can be triggered by Iur congestion.
HSDPA service pre-emption at the DRNC
When the new HSDPA service is not admitted to access the network, the CRNC may trigger a
pre-emption of other HSDPA services with lower priorities. If the CRNC is the DRNC, it
sends RADIO LINK PREEMPTION REQUIRED INDICATION to the SRNC and the SRNC
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

releases the HSDPA services indicated in the RADIO LINK PREEMPTION REQUIRED
INDICATION.
Other functions of this feature, such as HSDPA power offset adjustment over Iur and
HSDPA radio link parameter update over Iur are similar to the processes realized on the
Iub interface.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


The neighbouring RNC should also support HSDPA over Iur.

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.30 WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA


Model
QW1S0DSRBP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
SRB over HSDPA enables the DL SRBs of multiple UEs to be carried over HSDPA through
the FDPCH multiplexing technology, reducing the consumption of DL code resources and the
call setup delay.

Benefits

This feature provides a higher signaling rate and reduces the call process delay.

Compared with the scenario where the SRB is carried on the DCH, code resources are
saved and cell load is reduced when the SRB is carried on HSDPA.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Description
The signaling over the SRB is delay sensitive and irregular. In some cases, the code may be
limited prior to power and the cell capacity is affected. Therefore, it is more appropriate to set
up SRB over the HSDPA rather than the DCH. When compared with SRB over DCH, SRB
over HSDPA and F-DPCH multiplexing can save code resources.
SRB over HSDPA can be applied during the RRC connection setup procedure or other
procedures such as mobility management.
If the SRB is set up over the DCH, it can be reconfigured to the mapping on HSDPA in some
cases, for example, the target cell of handover supports HSDPA while the source cell does not.
Inversely, the SRB mapping on HSDPA can also be reconfigured to the mapping on DCH if
the target cell of handover does not support HSDPA.
SRB over HSDPA is configurable. The operator can also configure whether SRB over HSDPA
is applied to RRC connection setup or not.

Enhancement

RAN11.0
Enhanced F-DPCH is supported in RAN11.0.

RAN15.0
RAN15.0 supports the coverage- and load-based SRB H2D functions. As HSDPA does
not provide soft combination gains, SRB over HSDPA increases the call drop rate
compared with SRB over DCH. The coverage- and load-based SRB H2D functions
decrease the call drop rate.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board,EBOI
board or EDLP board.
The BBU3806 need to configure EBBC or EBBCd board.
The BBU3900 need to configure WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
UE should support FDPCH/EFDPCH

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

2.1.31 WRFD-010623 64 HSDPA Users per Cell


Model
QW1S64DPAU00
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature enables a single HSDPA cell to simultaneously support 64 HSDPA users. If the
number of HSDPA users exceeds 64, the DCH is attempted for service provisioning.

Benefits
This feature provides HSDPA services at a higher peak bit rate for up to 64 users per cell.

Description
Up to 64 HSDPA users can be admitted to a HSDPA cell.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010622 32 HSDPA Users per Cell

2.1.32 WRFD-030010 CQI Adjustment Based on


Dynamic BLER Target
Model
QWMSCQIABL00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Summary
In live networks, channel quality fluctuates constantly. To achieve the highest possible
downlink throughput, an appropriate Block Error Rate (BLER) target is required.
This feature helps select the optimum BLER target based on downlink channel quality
fluctuations in real time.

Benefits
This feature increases the downlink throughput in HSDPA cells by up to 10%.

Description
In radio environments, many factors affect downlink throughput, such as multipath fading and
UE movement speeds. To achieve the highest possible downlink throughput for HSDPA users
in an ever-changing radio environment, the NodeB needs to dynamically adjust the BLER
target. This feature enables the NodeB to do so. After adjusting the BLER target, the NodeB
can then adjust the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) to increase the downlink throughput.
This feature supports CQI adjustment based on dynamic BLER target for non-MIMO mode
UE in RAN13.0 and RAN14.0 when HSDPA is both deployed in network side and UE side.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
BTS3812E and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP
board.
BBU3806 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board.
BBU3900 must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Downlink Capacity Improvement Service

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

2.1.33 WRFD-030004 Adaptive Configuration of


Typical HSPA Rate
Model
QW1SACTHRP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
This feature is applicable only to PS best effort (BE) services over High Speed Packet Access
(HSPA) channels. This feature enables the RNC to calculate the actual maximum traffic rate
based on the maximum bit rate (MBR) assigned by the CN.

Benefits
This feature enables mobile operators to quickly and flexibly provide services with various
traffic rates, facilitating new market expansion to increase revenue.

Description
To meet market requirements, mobile operators need to provide services with various traffic
rates over HSPA. Typical traffic rates configured at the RNC, however, are fixed and
separated, and may be inconsistent with the MBR required by mobile operators.
Without this feature, the RNC selects a typical traffic rate closest to the MBR assigned by the
CN if a traffic rate inconsistency occurs between the RNC and CN. This rate, not the MBR, is
then used for calculating the actual maximum traffic rate of the UE. As a result, the rates
propagated by mobile operators are unavailable for UEs, affecting brand image.
With this feature, the RNC can use the MBR assigned by the CN to calculate the actual
maximum traffic rate when the MBR cannot be mapped onto any typical traffic rate.
Note that the MBR assigned to UEs with an HSUPA TTI of 10 ms must be higher than 32
kbit/s and the MBR assigned to UEs with an HSUPA TTI of 2 ms must be higher than144
kbit/s. Otherwise, these UEs cannot achieve traffic rates higher than corresponding MBRs.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI,
EBOI, EULP+EDLP, or EULPd+EDLP boards. Downlink services must be established
on the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board.
The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. Downlin

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction
Package

2.1.34 WRFD-140221 HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE


Location
Model
QWMSDPALOC01

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
Developed on the basis of the EPF algorithm, this feature considers UE locations as the
criterion for adjusting HSDPA scheduling weights. This feature gives more scheduling
opportunities to UEs close to the NodeB and increases the cell throughput on the downlink.

Benefits
This feature increases HSDPA throughput for UEs close to the NodeB and thereby increases
the average throughput of the cell. The amount of the feature's gain is based on the actual
services and the users' location in the cell.

Description
Huawei provides five HSDPA scheduling algorithms: maximum C/I (MAXCI), round-robin
(RR), proportional fair (PF), enhanced proportional fair (EPF), and EPF based on UE location
(EPF_LOC). They are detailed as follows:

MAXCI
This algorithm only considers the radio channel quality and sequences all UEs in a cell
by carrier-to-interference ratio (C/I). This algorithm ensures a high throughput for the
cell but cannot ensure equity among UEs.

RR
UEs are sequenced in descending order of waiting time in the MAC-hs queue. UEs have
equal scheduling opportunities but the cell capacity decreases.

PF
UEs are sequenced in descending order of R/r, where R is the maximum rate
corresponding to the CQI reported by a UE and r is the average rate of the UE at the
MAC-hs layer. This algorithm provides each UE with an average throughput that is

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

proportionate to the maximum rate corresponding to the CQI reported by the UE. This
algorithm compromises cell capacity to increase equity among UEs.

EPF
Developed on the basis of the PF algorithm, the EPF algorithm classifies services into
different types. While ensuring guaranteed bit rates (GBRs), the EPF algorithm allocates
resources based on scheduling priority indicators (SPIs). This balances service
differentiation with equity among UEs.

EPF_LOC
Developed on the basis of the EPF algorithm, the EPF_LOC algorithm considers UE
locations as HSDPA scheduling weights. While ensuring GBRs, the EPF_LOC algorithm
gives more scheduling opportunities and a higher throughput to UEs close to the NodeB.

In the EPF_LOC algorithm, the more weight given to UE locations, the more significantly
UEs at different distances from the NodeB are differentiated between, the more scheduling
opportunities and the higher throughput UEs close to the NodeB have, the fewer scheduling
opportunities and the lower throughput UEs far from the NodeB have. It is recommended that
GBRs be configured for all UEs to ensure service quality for UEs at cell edges.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
All 3900 series base stations support this feature. To support this feature, the 3900
series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.
All DBS3800 series base stations support this feature. To support this feature, the DB

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced
Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Downlink Capacity Improvement Service and
UMTS Differentiated QoS Service

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

2.2 HSDPA 14.4Mbps


2.2.1 WRFD-010650 HSDPA 13.976Mbps per User
Model
QW1SD13XMP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R5.

Summary
This feature enables the HSDPA rate per user to reach a maximum of 13.976 Mbit/s.

Benefits
This feature provides a higher peak bit rate and enhances user experience.

Description
HSDPA is an important feature of 3GPP Release 5 that can provide high speed service for
downlink. With this feature, the UE with interactive or background services on the HS-DSCH
can reach the peak bit rate up to 13.976 Mbit/s (MAC layer). Therefore, user experience is
greatly enhanced.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
This feature requires WFMRc board in BSC6800.

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should have the capability of HSDPA Category 10, 13(or later),category
1013141516171819202122232425262728

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN support user rate of 13.976Mbps or above.

Other Features
WRFD-010621 HSDPA 7.2Mbps per User

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

2.3 HSDPA+ 21/28Mbps


2.3.1 WRFD-010681 HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per
User
Model
QW1SPA+D2100

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R7.

Summary
This feature enables the HSPA+ 64QAM rate per user to reach a maximum of 21 Mbit/s. With
this feature, users can enjoy high-speed data experience.

Benefits

This feature improves the frequency utilization and increases the maximum downlink
rate.

This feature can provide end users with high-speed data experience.

Description
HSPA+ is introduced in 3GPP Release 7 to provide high speed data services. With this
feature, the downlink peak rate increases from 13.976 Mbit/s per user in R6 to 21 Mbit/s per
user (MAC layer).

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board,EBOI
board or EDLP board.
The BBU3806 need to configure EBBC or EBBCd board.
The BBU3900 need to configure WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
The UE category must support cat 14,18,20,24 or 28

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

CN support user rate of 21Mbps or above.

Other Features
WRFD-010683 Downlink 64QAM WRFD-010650 HSDPA 13.976 Mbit/s per User

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.3.2 WRFD-010683 Downlink 64QAM


Model
QWMS064QAM00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R7.

Summary
Compared with the 16QAM modulation, the 64QAM modulation is a higher-order downlink
data modulation mode. This feature enables the peak rate on the Uu interface to reach 21
Mbit/s.

Benefits
Downlink 64QAM increases the peak rate per user and improves the local cell capability.
Operators attach great importance to data service and regard it as a growing point for profits.
Many consulting companies predict that the data traffic volume will grow rapidly and
accordingly raise higher requirements to the network throughput. If the bandwidth remains
unchanged, 64QAM will increase the average throughput of the system by 7% to 16% and
further improves the spectral efficiency of the system. In this way, the system provides users
with higher throughput and ultimately increases operators' profits on the per bandwidth basis.
On the other hand, 64QAM also raises the peak rate per user and provides a higher download
data rate for users. This enhances not only user experience but also operators'
competitiveness.

Description
3GPP R5 introduces 16QAM to increase the peak rate per user and expands the system
capacity, whereas 64QAM introduced in 3GPP R7 protocols is a further enhancement of
16QAM.
With downlink 64QAM, higher order modulation technology than 16QAM can be used when
the channel is of higher quality. Theoretically, 64QAM supports a peak data rate of 21 Mbit/s
and at the same time increases the average throughput of the system. Simulation shows that
compared with 16QAM, 64QAM can increase the average throughput by 7% and 16%
respectively in macro cell and in micro cell, if the UEs in the cells use the type 3 receivers.
The 3GPP R7 protocols define the categories of the UEs that support 64QAM, and add the
information elements (IEs) that support 64QAM in the reporting of local cell capability. The
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

RNC determines whether the RL between the NodeB and the UE supports 64QAM according
to the local cell capability reported by the NodeB and the UE capability. If the RL supports
64QAM, the MAC-hs scheduler of the NodeB determines every 2 ms whether to use 64QAM
according to the following aspects:

Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) reported by the UE

HS-PDSCH code resources and power resources of the NodeB

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board,EBOI
board or EDLP board.
The BBU3806 need to configure EBBC,EBBCd board.
The BBU3900 need to configure WBBPb,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
The UE category must support 64QAM. That is, the UE must belong to category
13141718192023, 242728, as specified by the 3GPP protocols

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package WRFD-010685 Enhanced L2

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.3.3 WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2


Model
QW1S0DEL2M00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R7.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Summary
Downlink Enhanced L2 supports the variable PDU size, which eliminates the contradictions
between the high-speed transmission that requires a large PDU size and the cell-edge
coverage that requires a small PDU size. This feature enables the dynamic adjustment of the
PDU size to improve the transmission efficiency on the Iub and Uu interfaces and increase the
cell edge throughput and coverage radius.

Benefits
This feature is a prerequisite of the 64QAM, MIMO, and enhanced CELL_FACH, which also
improves the transmission efficiency on the Iub and Uu interfaces.

Description
Downlink Enhanced L2 supports the variable PDU size, which eliminates the contradictions
between the high-speed transmission that requires a large PDU size and the cell-edge
coverage that requires a small PDU size. In addition, enhanced L2 reduces excessive overhead
caused by the fixed PDU size, and improves the transmission efficiency on the Iub and Uu
interfaces.
Downlink Enhanced L2 is a prerequisite for 64QAM, MIMO and enhanced CELL_FACH. It
removes the restrictions on the RLC window for users whose transmission rate is more than
14 Mbit/s. At the cell edge, small PDU size requires relative low SNR, better service coverage
and throughput will be attained.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EBOI,
or EDLP board.
If a DBS3800 is configured with a BBU3806, the EBBC or EBBCd board must be
configured. If a DBS3800 is configured with a BBU3806C, an EBBM board must be
configured.
The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf
board.

UE
The UE must be Release7(or later) UE and support this feature.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.3.4 WRFD-010680 HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per


User
Model
QW1SPA+D2800

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R7.

Summary
This feature enables the HSPA+ MIMO rate per user to reach a maximum of 28 Mbit/s. This
feature enhances user experience for high-speed data services.

Benefits

This feature improves the frequency utilization and increases the maximum downlink
rate.

This feature can provide end users with high-speed data experience.

Description
HSPA+ is introduced in 3GPP Release 7 to provide high-rate data services. With this feature,
the downlink peak rate increases from 13.976 Mbit/s per user in R6 to 28 Mbit/s per user
(MAC layer).

Enhancement

RAN12.0
DC-HSDPA is available from RAN12.0. With DC-HSDPA and downlink 16QAM, the
downlink peak rate also can increases from 13.976 Mbit/s per user in R6 to 28 Mbit/s per
user (MAC layer).

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EBBI,
EBOI or EDLP board.
The BBU3806 should be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board.
The BBU3900 should be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.
For the RF part, the RF module of Huawei Node B supports one TX channel each, and
two interconnected RF modules can provide two TX channels to support 2 x 2 MIMO

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

UE
The UE category must support cat16, cat18(or later)

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN support user rate of 28Mbps or above.

Other Features
WRFD-010684 2*2 MIMO WRFD-010650 HSDPA 13.976Mbit/s per User or WRFD010696 DC-HSDPA WRFD-010650 HSDPA 13.976Mbit/s per User

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.3.5 WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA


Model
QWMS000DDC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
The Dual Cell-HSDPA (DC-HSDPA) feature allows the UE to establish connections to two
adjacent inter-frequency same-coverage cells. With this feature, the UE can use the resources
in both cells that perform an operation on different carriers, increasing the peak throughput of
the UE.

Benefits
This feature improves the single-user throughput and the cell throughput.

Single-user throughput

After DC-HSDPA is introduced, the throughput is doubled at the center and border of the cell.
Theoretically, DC-HSDPA in 64QAM mode can provide a peak throughput of 42 Mbit/s at the
center of the cell. The gain also shortens the data transmission delay and improves user
experience.

Cell throughput

After DC-HSDPA is introduced, DC-HSDPA has the cell throughput gain of 5% 10%
relative to the total throughput of the two inter-frequency co-coverage cells. The gain is
inversely proportional to the number of UEs in a cell.

Description

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Configuration of primary and secondary carriers

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

When two frequencies, for example, f1 and f2 are used in DC-HSDPA, one DL frequency
serves as the primary carrier and the other as the secondary carrier, which is defined in 3GPP
TR25.825. In the UL, only one frequency is used, which serves as the primary carrier.
Both DC-HSDPA cells are configured with the PCPICH, SCH, PCCPCH, SCCPCH, and
PRACH. Both cells have the basic common channel (CCH) configuration for retaining and
initiating services. The single carrier (SC) UEs can camp or originate a call in each cell.

DC-HSDPA differentiated bearer policy

The CS service, IMS signaling, SRB signaling, or PS conversational service is carried on a


single carrier instead of DC-HSDPA because the amount of data is small and the gain is
insignificant when DC-HSDPA is used.
The BE or streaming service can be carried over the DC-HSDPA. The BE/streaming
combined service is carried over the DC-HSDPA preferentially.

Mobility management

The active set information and measurement reports are sent on the primary carrier during the
handover of DC users. Whether to perform an intra-frequency or inter-frequency handover
depends on the frequencies of the primary carrier and the neighboring cell.
RAN supports handovers between DC cells, between the DC cell and the SC cell, and
between the DC cell and the system using the other RAT, to ensure seamless roaming of DC
terminals.

State transition in DC-HSDPA

The UE state transition in DC-HSDPA is performed in the same way as the state transition in
SC mode.

Traffic steering in DC-HSDPA

In the original network, R99 services preferentially use f1 and HSPA services use f2. After
DC-HSDPA is introduced, both f1 and f2 can be used for DL DC-HSDPA, and f2 is preferred
for HSUPA. In this way, the UL load on f1 is reduced, without disrupting R99 services.
If the R99 and HSPA services have the same priority on f1 and f2 in the original network,
traffic steering is kept the same as that of HSPA after DC-HSDPA is introduced.
STTD mode on the secondary carrier is not supported when activate DC-HSDPA.

Enhancement

RAN15.0
In RAN15.0, non-adjacent carriers at the same frequency band can be used for DCHSDPA.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The HBBI and HDLP of the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE do not support DC-HSDPA. To
support DC-HSDPA, the EBBI or EDLP board must be configured.
The BBU3806 with EBBC/EBBCd support this feature.
The 3900 series base stations supports the function when the WBBP

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

UE
The HS-DSCH capabilities are classified into category 21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2
WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.3.6 WRFD-010713 Traffic-Based Activation and


Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multicarrier
Model
QWMS0DEASC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature requires the downlink service of the user is carried on DC-HSDPA or DCHSDPA+MIMO and the uplink service is carried on DC or SC-HSUPA. It can deactivate the
supplementary carrier of a UE when the traffic volume to be processed by the UE is low.
When the traffic volume rises, the supplementary carrier can then be activated, the user
becomes dual-carrier user again.

Benefits
Compared with the dual-carrier transmission, because only prime carrier is demodulated by
the UE, the transmission power of HS-DPCCH can be reduced, which decreasing the uplink
transmission load as well.
Taking DC-HSDPA as an example, in the scenario of a large amount of users and low traffic
in the downlink, and the penetration rate of DC-HSDPA terminal is 100%, deactivating the
secondary carrier can theoretically reduce the uplink load by 5% to 10%.

Description
The NodeB decides whether to deactivate the secondary carrier of a UE based on the amount
of data to be transmitted by the UE and the throughput of the UE. Given a small amount of
data and low throughput, the NodeB deactivates the secondary carrier and sends an HS-SCCH
order to notify the UE of the deactivation. When the amount of data becomes large or the
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

throughput becomes high, the NodeB activates the secondary carrier and sends an HS-SCCH
order to notify the UE of the activation.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must support DC-HSDPA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.3.7 WRFD-010684 2*2 MIMO


Model
QWMS00MIMO00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R7.

Summary
Based on space dimension resources, MIMO uses the multi-antenna technology at the
transmit end and receive end. This feature can double the transmission capacity of the
wireless communication system in a high SNR environment without the transmit power
added.

Benefits
2x2 MIMO increases the average throughput and peak rate of the cell. In the case of
unchanged bandwidth, 2x2 MIMO increases the average throughput of the system by 14% to
23%. Theoretically, the peak rate per 2X2 MIMO user can be twice the original peak rate. In
addition, MIMO has gains even under lower geographical factors (G = Ior/Ioc) and have more
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

gains under higher Ior/Ioc. From the service point of view, MIMO has a similar driving force
to 64QAM.

Description
2x2 Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) uses two transmit antennas in the NodeB to
transmit orthogonal (parallel) data streams to the two receive antennas at the UEs. Using two
antennas and additional signal processing at the receiver and the transmitter, 2x2 MIMO can
increase the system capacity and double user data rates without using additional bandwidth.
2x2 MIMO adopts different modes in the 3GPP protocols, with QPSK and 16QAM in R7, and
later with 64QAM in R8. With dual-stream dual-antenna mode and 16QAM modulation, the
peak data rate per user is doubled to 28 Mbit/s and the average throughput of the system is
enhanced.
The 3GPP R7 protocols define the categories of the UEs that support MIMO, and add the
information elements (IEs) that support MIMO in the reporting of local cell capability. The
RNC determines whether the RL between the NodeB and the UE supports MIMO according
to the local cell capability and UE capability reported by the NodeB. If the RL supports
MIMO, the MAC-hs scheduler of the NodeB determines every 2 ms whether to use MIMO
according to the following aspects:

Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) reported by the UE

Precoding Control Indication (PCI)

HS-PDSCH code resources and power resources of the NodeB

For MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier scenario, refer to WRFD-010700 Performance


Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board,EBOI
board or EDLP board.
The BBU3806 need to configure EBBC,EBBCd board.
The BBU3900 need to configure WBBPb,WBBPd or WBBPf board. For the RF part,
the RF module of Huawei Node B sup

UE
The UE must belong to category 15(or later),that is category
1516171819202122232425262728

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Features

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2


WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.3.8 WRFD-030011 MIMO Prime


Model
QWMS0MIMOP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
MIMO Prime is one of Huawei's proprietary performance technologies. Based on dualtransmission RF modules, it can greatly improve spectrum utilization and increase network
capacity.

Benefits
In the scenario of the large traffic in down link, MIMO Prime can increase the capacity of the
cell in which MIMO has not been implemented by about 5% to 10%. The increase in the
overall cell throughput helps to greatly improve the experience of users in medium and bad
radio conditions. The trial test shows that this feature can increase the throughput of the single
user in medium and bad radio conditions by about 15% and 20% respectively.
MIMO Prime does not depend on the UE and is applicable to various services including
HSDPA and 64QAM. Furthermore, it does not affect the performance of traditional UEs.
When the penetration of MIMO-capable UEs is low, MIMO Prime can effectively protect the
investments of operators who have already deployed MIMO-capable RF modules but haven't
implemented MIMO. As the number of MIMO-capable UEs increases, operators can
gradually enable the MIMO feature to achieve the maximum benefits in terms of capacity and
user experience.

Description
MIMO Prime is based on Virtual Antenna Mapping (VAM), which applies matrix processing
to the original signal before sending it over the antennas. The original signal is allocated to the
two antennas with equal power. After VAM is enabled, each signal is split into two signals.
This results in a certain phase difference in the two received signals, which affects the
strength of the signals after they are combined. MIMO Prime supports automatic phase
adjustment based on the signal environment, thereby achieving increased UE throughput by
enhancing the reception quality of the UE.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Figure2-6-14-1 Principles of MIMO Prime

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
This feature is supported only by the 40W RRU3801C, RRU3804, RRU3806,
RRU3808, WRFU, RRU3805, WRFUd, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929,
MRFUd, MRFUe, as well as the RRU3908 V1 operating in 850 MHz, 900 MHz, and
1900 MHz.
For RF modules providing only one transmit channel, two such RF modules need to be
interconnected to support this feature.
The BBU3900 must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf.
The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE do not support this feature.
The DBS3800 doesn't suppport this feature.
RRU3908 V2 and MRFU V2 modules support this feature from RAN14.0.0.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Downlink Capacity Improvement Service

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

2.3.9 WRFD-010700 Performance Improvement of


MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier
Model
QWMS0PIMHC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
The performance of MIMO cells configured with Spatial Time Transmit Diversity (STTD)
deteriorates obviously, because the receivers of legacy HSDPA-supportive UEs fall back from
equalizer to rake. At an early phase of MIMO deployment, a large number of legacy HSDPAsupportive UEs are in use on networks. In the MIMO and HSDPA co-carrier case, the
deterioration in system performance has become the greatest obstacle to commercial launch of
MIMO.
To improve the MIMO and HSDPA co-carrier performance, Huawei develops PSP-based
MIMO, where PSP refers to the Primary/Secondary common Pilot mode.

Benefits
This feature solves performance deterioration in networks where STTD is employed and
legacy HSDPA-enabled UEs are used. This feature helps implement the MIMO and HSDPA
co-carrier deployment.
With this feature, MIMO and HSDPA can be properly deployed on the same carrier so that
frequency resources are saved.

Description
MIMO-supportive UEs estimate the characteristics of channels transmitted from each
antenna, based on the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH). In a cell, signals are transmitted over
the CPICH in two modes: STTD on the Primary CPICH (P-CPICH) and PSP.
In STTD mode, the receivers of legacy HSDPA-supportive UEs fall back from equalizer to
rake. This causes obvious deterioration in the system performance.
This feature adopts PSP-based MIMO to improve the MIMO and HSDPA co-carrier
performance. The key techniques involved are PSP, Intelligent Interference Control (IIC), and
Virtual Antenna Mapping (VAM).

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

PSP is applied in MIMO mode. The P-CPICH is configured on one antenna and the S-CPICH
is configured on the other antenna so that diversity is prevented. The P-CPICH and S-CPICH
are used for channel estimation of MIMO users. In this way, the receivers of HSDPAsupportive UEs do not fall back from equalizer to rake.
If PSP is enabled, the signals transmitted from the secondary antenna are unknown to
HSDPA-supportive UEs, and therefore the receivers of the UEs cannot suppress the multipath
interface caused by the signals from the secondary antenna. In this case, the system
performance deteriorates. IIC is applied. IIC monitors the percentage of each type of UE in a
cell in an intelligent manner and dynamically adjusts the available power that is allocated to
MIMO users and HSDPA users. In this way, IIC controls the interference caused by the
signals from the secondary antenna to the signals of legacy HSDPA-supportive UEs.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
Only 40W
RRU3801CRRU3804RRU3806RRU3808WRFURRU3805WRFUdRR
U3828RRU3829RRU3928RRU3929MRFUdMRFUe and
850M/900M/1900M
RRU3908V1 can support this feature.
BTS3812E/AE cannot support this feature.
RRU3908 V2 and MRFU V2 modules support this feature from RAN14.0.

UE
The UE must be support 2x2 MIMO. That is, the UE category must be category 15, 16,
17, or 18 as defined by 3GPP

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2


WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.3.10 WRFD-010704 Flexible HSPA+ Technology


Selection
Model
QW1S0FHTSP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature allows dynamic selection of DC-HSDPA or MIMO for newly admitted users
according to the number of HSDPA users (including SC-HSDPA and DC-HSDPA users) and
the downlink load status.

Benefits
This feature selects DC-HSDPA or MIMO for newly admitted users according to the number
of HSDPA users and the downlink load status. This allows users to obtain the optimum bearer
mode and the highest possible throughput.

Description
DC-HSDPA and MIMO provide differing benefits in different scenarios: Carrying traffic over
DC-HSDPA when the number of HSPDA users is low and cell load is light provides relatively
high throughput. Likewise, carrying traffic over MIMO when the number of HSDPA users is
high and cell load is heavy also provides relatively high throughput.
Under DC-HSDPA networking scenarios, one or two carriers may simultaneously support
MIMO depending on the configuration by the operator. The number of HSDPA users and the
downlink load carried on each carrier change over time. The optimum bearer mode varies in
different circumstances. In scenarios supporting both of these technologies, this feature allows
dynamic selection of DC-HSDPA or MIMO for newly admitted users according to the current
number of HSDPA users and the downlink load carried on the two carriers. This allows users
to use the best relative HSPA+ technology and experience high throughput in different
scenarios, thereby improving the user experience.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

RNC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

NA

NodeB
BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should configure EBBI, EBOI, and EDLP
boards. In addition, uplink services cannot be established on HBBI or HULP boards.
The BBU3806 of the DBS3800 must configure the EBBC or EBBCd board.
The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf
board.
If the RF modules support only one transmission channel, MIMO requires
interconnection of two RF modules.

UE
UEs must be HSDPA category 21 or higher. That is: HSDPA category 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,
26, 27, 28

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA WRFD-010684 22 MIMO

2.4 HSDPA+ 42Mbps


2.4.1 WRFD-010689 HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per
User
Model
QW1SPA+D4200

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0. It is introduced in 3GPP Release 8.

Summary
This feature enables the peak rate of the data service over HSPA+ to reach 42 Mbit/s per user.

Benefits

This feature improves the frequency utilization and increases the maximum downlink
rate.

This feature provides end users with high-rate data services.

Description
HSPA+ is introduced in 3GPP Release 7 to provide high-rate data services. With the
2*2MIMO+64QAM or 64QAM+DC HSDPA technologies introduced in R8 and the enhanced
performance of relevant NEs, the downlink peak rate per user reaches up to 42 Mbit/s.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

TCP protocol is widely used in data transmission. As a file is being downloaded, the TCP
acknowledgment is sent in uplink. The higher the rate of download is, the larger the
bandwidth is required in uplink. If the download rate reaches up to 42 Mbit/s, the rate of TCP
acknowledgment in uplink is much higher than 384 kbit/s which is the highest rate supported
by DCH. HSUPA bearer is required to provide high bandwidth in uplink to transmit TCP
acknowledgment in time. DL 42 Mbit/s per user can be supported only in case of HSUPA
being used.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
To enable this feature on a BSC6900, you are advised to configure a DPUe board in the
BSC6900 to support more peak-rate UEs.

NodeB

The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI,


EBOI or EDLP board.

The BBU3806 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd card.

The BBU3900 must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board.

For the RF part which supports only one TX channel, two interconnected RF modules
can provide two TX channels to support 2 x 2 MIMO. In terms of RF modules
including 2 Tx channels, no additional RF modules is required for 2*2MIMO.

UE
The UE should support category of 21(or later), categorie:
2122232425262728

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN needs to support sending RAB assignment with relate data rate.

Other Features
WRFD-010681 HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbit/s per User plus WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA
plus WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package,
or
WRFD-010681 HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbit/s per User plus WRFD-010680 HSPA+
Downlink 28Mbit/s per User plus WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO plus WRFD010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.4.2 WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO


Model
QWMS0D64QM00
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
MIMO and 64QAM are introduced in 3GPP Release 7 and can only be used independently. In
3GPP Release 8, however, MIMO and 64QAM can be used in combination to increase the
peak throughput of a single user.

Benefits
With 64QAM+MIMO, the peak throughput of a single user can reach 42 Mbit/s, compared to
28 Mbit/s with 16QAM+MIMO or 21 Mbit/s with 64QAM only.

Description

Channel bearer
The SRB, CS service, IMS signaling, and PS conversational services are not carried on
MIMO, 64QAM, or MIMO+64QAM because the data flow is small and the gain is
insignificant. The PS streaming service, PS interactive service, PS background service,
and the combined services with previous services can be carried on MIMO+64QAM.

Scheduling
The user scheduling based on a new extended CQI table for the MIMO+64QAM user is
supported.

Mobility management
The UE can be handed over from an MIMO+64QAM capable cell to an MIMO+64QAM
incapable cell and the MIMO+64QAM falls back. If UE moves in the opposite direction,
the MIMO+64QAM can be reconfigured to the UE after handover.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The HBBI and HDLP of the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE do not support 64QAM+MIMO.
To support 64QAM+MIMO, the EBBI or EDLP must be configured.
The BBU3806 of the DBS3800 does not support 64QAM+MIMO. To support
64QAM+MIMO, the EBBC or EBBCd board must be configured.
The 3900 series base stations supports 64QAM+MIMO when the WBBPb, WBBPd or
WBBPf board is configured.

UE
The UE must support HS-DSCH category 19 or 20.

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

NA

Other Features
WRFD-010683 Downlink 64QAM WRFD-010684 22 MIMO

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.5 HSDPA+ 84Mbps


2.5.1 WRFD-010703 HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per
User
Model
QW1SPA+D8400

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature provides a downlink peak rate of 84 Mbit/s for a single user through the
simultaneous use of 64QAM, multiple-input multiple output (MIMO), and dual-cell HSDPA
(DC-HSDPA).

Benefits
This feature enables end users to enjoy high-speed data services.

Description
3GPP Release 9 defines the scenario where MIMO and DC-HSDPA are used together. When
the techniques 64QAM, MIMO, and DC-HSDPA are jointly used, a downlink peak rate of 84
Mbit/s can be achieved for a single user.

Enhancement

RAN15.0
DB-HSDPA+MIMO can be used together with 4C-HSDPA or downlink 64QAM+MIMO
from RAN15.0. With either feature group, the downlink peak rate can reach 84 Mbit/s
per user.

Dependency

RNC
To enable this feature on a BSC6900, the DPUe board must be configured for the data
plane and the interface board FG2a (GE port), FG2c (GE port), GOUa, or GOUc must be
configured.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

To enable this feature on a BSC6910, the interface board FG2c (GE port)

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812AE, and DBS3800 don't support this feature.
The 3900 series multi-mode base stations need to be configured with the
WBBPf/WBBPd/WBBPb3/WBBPb4 board.

UE
The UE must be of category 28, 31 or 32 to support 84 Mbit/s in the downlink, according
to 3GPP Release 9.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN support user rate of 84Mbps or above.

Other Features
WRFD-010689 HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbit/s per User
WRFD-010693 Downlink 64QAM+MIMO
WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA+MIMO
Or
WRFD-010689 HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbit/s per User
WRFD-150207 4C-HSDPA
Or
WRFD-010689 HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbit/s per User
WRFD-010693 Downlink 64QAM+MIMO
WRFD-150227 DB-HSDPA+MIMO

Professional Service
It is recommended that this feature be used together with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service.

2.5.2 WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA+MIMO


Model
QWMSDCMIMO00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
DC-HSDPA+MIMO is introduced in 3GPP Release 9. This feature combines DC-HSDPA
(introduced in 3GPP Release 8) and MIMO (introduced in 3GPP Release 7). This feature
allows the NodeB to send HSDPA data to a UE simultaneously over two carriers on the same
frequency band within the same coverage area by using MIMO.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Benefits
This feature fully utilizes the advantages of dual-carrier and dual-antenna techniques of DCHSDPA and MIMO respectively. It improves the spectrum efficiency and significantly
increases the single-user peak throughput, cell-edge-user throughput, and cell capacity.

Increasing the single user peak throughput


DC-HSDPA+MIMO achieves higher spatial multiplexing gain than DC-HSDPA. This
feature doubles the single-user peak rate from 28 Mbit/s to 56 Mbit/s (When using
16QAM modulation) or from 42 Mbit/s to 84 Mbit/s (with 64QAM).
DC-HSDPA+MIMO uses two carriers simultaneously while SC-HSDPA uses only one
carrier. This feature doubles the single-user peak rate, as mentioned previously.

Increasing the cell-edge-user throughput


DC-HSDPA+MIMO achieves closed-loop transmit diversity gain on the cell edge,
compared with DC-HSDPA.
DC-HSDPA+MIMO use two carriers and doubles the throughput, compared with SCHSDPA+MIMO.

Increasing the cell capacity


DC-HSDPA+MIMO improve the spectrum efficiency within 10 MHz bandwidth and
Huawei simulation test shows that it can increase the system throughput by 10% to 20%,
compared with DC-HSDPA.

Description
The following figure shows the basic principles of DC-HSDPA+MIMO.

The DC-HSDPA+MIMO feature brings together the performance enhancement benefits of the
two different technologies DC-HSDPA and MIMO.
RAN13.0 supports the configuration of MIMO on one or two carriers to reach the theoretical
peak rate of 63 Mbit/s or 84 Mbit/s respectively.
The PS best effort services are carried over DC-HSDPA+MIMO.
DC-HSDPA+MIMO apply the same principles as DC-HSDPA in load control and mobility
management.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

RNC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE need to be configured with the EBBI or EDLP board,
and the uplink services cannot be setup on HBBI/HULP board.
The DBS3800 needs to be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. In addition,
the DBS3800 supports a maximum of DC+MIMOx1, that is, only one frequency in the
DC-HSDPA cell can be configured with the MIMO feature.
The 3900 series multi-mode base stations need to be configured with the WBBPb,
WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
The UE must be of HS-DSCH category 25, 26, 27, or 28.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA
WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.6 HSDPA+ Flexible Carrier


2.6.1 WRFD-150208 Flexible Dual Carrier HSDPA
Model
QWMSFLEDPA00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
Flexible Dual Carrier HSDPA allows UEs to set up HSDPA connections with any two interfrequency same-coverage cells under a NodeB. A pair of these cells is a DC-HSDPA group.
The RAN schedules services in all DC-HSDPA groups, which improves the UE data rate and
system capacity.

Benefits
This feature enables cells to form as many DC-HSDPA groups as possible. The DC-HSDPA
groups dynamically use instantaneous idle frequency resources in a cell, increasing the UE

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

data rate and system capacity. In the case of three carriers, this feature increases the UE data
rate by about 20% when UEs are processing burst services.
This feature supports smooth evolution to future technologies.

Description
This feature enables cells to form as many overlapping DC-HSDPA groups as possible. With
this feature, some cells may simultaneously belong to multiple DC-HSDPA groups, as shown
in the following figure:

This feature applies to scenarios where one of the following features or the combination of
them is enabled: DC-HSDPA or DC-HSDPA+MIMO.
This feature has the same requirements for frequencies, bandwidths, and frequency bands as
DC-HSDPA and DC-HSDPA+MIMO.
This feature supports up to four carriers, which can operate at a maximum of two frequency
bands. The four carriers may include a maximum of two adjacent MIMO carriers.
The MAC-ehs entity on the RAN side jointly schedules DC-HSDPA UEs. Based on the load
of carriers in a DC-HSDPA group, the MAC-ehs entity assigns as many resources of the
lightly loaded carrier as possible to double-carrier UEs. In this way, more resources of the
heavily loaded carrier are assigned to single-carrier UEs. The joint scheduling achieves fast
resource allocation among carriers and prevents a temporary heavy load on a carrier from
affecting UE experience, which increases system resource utilization and system capacity.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

NodeB

The BTS3812E, BTS3812AE, and BTS3812A must be configured with the EBBI,
EDLP+EULP, or EDLP+EULPd boards to support a maximum of three carriers. The
three carriers must operate at the same frequency band.

The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board to support a
maximum of three carriers.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

The 3900 series base stations (excluding the BTS3902E) support this feature. Only
the 3900 series base stations support a maximum of four carriers and MIMO. The
3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf
board to support.

The BTS3803E does not support this feature.

UE
The UEs must belong to HSDPA category 21 or higher.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA

2.7 HSUPA 1.44Mbps


2.7.1 WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package
Model
QW1SUPAINP00
QWMS00HUPA01

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
This feature package enables the system to process HSUPA services, improving the uplink
rate and system throughput. This feature package provides basic functions of HSUPA to meet
the basic requirements for operation of HSUPA services.

Benefits
HSUPA improves the performance of UMTS network by providing higher rate and higher
throughput for the uplink and higher capacity for the system.

Description
High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) is an important feature introduced in 3GPP
Release 6. A new uplink transport channel, E-DCH, is introduced. Like what is done for
HSDPA, HSUPA improves the system capacity and throughout for uplink by maximizing
power utilization and adjusting the uplink bit rate according to channel quality.
The key functions used in HSUPA for maximizing resource utilization include 2 ms/10 ms
TTI, Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ), and fast scheduling in the NodeB.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

The basic principle behind HARQ for HSUPA is the same as that for HSDPA. After each
transmitted TTI, the NodeB informs the transmitting UE of whether the uplink data was
received correctly or not. The UE retransmits the packet if incorrect reception occurs. HSUPA
HARQ either uses chase combing where each retransmission is the exact copy of the initial
data or incremental redundancy where the retransmission only contains the redundancy bits.
The fast scheduling algorithm in the NodeB enables the system to make the scheduling
decision with the minimum latency as close to the radio interface as possible. Even though the
NodeB makes the scheduling decision, it is the UE that decides the transmitted power and the
transmit format.
In RAN6.0, only 10 ms TTI is supported and the maximum uplink rate is 1.44 Mbit/s (MAC
layer) per user. Each cell can support up to 20 HSUPA users.

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, HSUPA Introduction Package is enhanced. For details, refer to the
enhancement of the features in the package.

RAN15.0
In RAN15.0, the feature WRFD-01061209 HSUPA HARQ and Fast UL Scheduling in
NodeB is enhanced. It is described in the enhancement of the feature WRFD-01061209
HSUPA HARQ and Fast UL Scheduling in NodeB.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NBBI and NULP board can not support this feature.

UE
UE should have HSUPA capability.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

2.7.2 WRFD-01061201 HSUPA UE Category Support


Model
QW1SUPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Summary
This feature enables Huawei NodeB to support UEs of category 1 to category 7 defined in
3GPP.

Benefits
This feature supports HSUPA services for seven categories of UE so as to provide high bit
rate services for different categories of UEs. The maximum bit rate that can be achieved by
the UE depends on the UE specification.

Description
In order to provide services of multiple bit rates, seven HSUPA UE categories are defined in
3GPP specifications. The maximum number of codes over the E-DCH supported varies with
the UE category. That is, different UE categories support different maximum bit rates.
For example, in the following table, UE of category 3 supports two SF4 codes and the
maximum data rate can be 1.44 Mbit/s.
E-DCH
Category

Max.
Capabilit
y
Combina
tion

E-DCH
TTI

Max. Data Rate (Mbit/s)

MAC Layer

MAC Layer

10 ms TTI

2 ms TTI

Air Interface

Category 1

1 x SF4

10 ms only

0.71

0.96

Category 2

2 x SF4

10 ms and 2
ms

1.44

1.40

1.92

Category 3

2 x SF4

10 ms only

1.44

1.92

Category 4

2 x SF2

10 ms and 2
ms

2.0

2.89

3.84

Category 5

2 x SF2

10 ms only

2.0

3.84

Category 6

2 x SF4 + 2
xS F2

10 ms and 2
ms

2.0

5.74

5.76

Category 7

2 x SF4 + 2
xS F2

10 ms and
2 ms

2.0

11.50

11.52

Category 8

2 x SF4 + 2
x SF2

2 ms

11.50

11.52

Category 9

2 x SF4 + 2
x SF2

2 ms

23

23.04

RAN10.0 supports SF2 and 2 ms TTI.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

UEs of category 8 support only quadrature phase-shift keying (QPSK) when DC-HSUPA is
enabled. UEs of category 9 support QPSK and 16 quadrature amplitude modulation (16QAM)
when DC-HSUPA is enabled.

Enhancement

RAN6.0
RAN6.0 supports only SF4 and TTI of only 10 ms. Therefore, UEs of categories 2, 4, 5,
and 6 can support TTI of only 10 ms in RAN6.0.

RAN10.0
RAN10.0 supports SF2 and 2 ms TTI of UEs of categories 1 to 6.

RAN12.0
RAN12.0 supports UEs of categories 1 to 7.

RAN14.0
RAN14.0 supports UEs of categories 1 to 9.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA introduction package

2.7.3 WRFD-01061209 HSUPA HARQ and Fast UL


Scheduling in NodeB
Model
QW1SUPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
The operator can set different QoS parameters such as user priority, scheduling weight, and
GBR. Based on the QoS parameters, this feature can ensure that different users enjoy
differentiated QoS experience and higher cell throughput.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Benefits
HARQ scheme improves the data transmission efficiency and reduces the delay, thereby
enhancing the users service perception.
The MAC-e scheduling algorithm improves the UL throughput of the UE and increases the
CE resource utilization in view of the limitations on the CE resources.
The combination of the MAC-e scheduling and flow control algorithms further increases the
bandwidth efficiency for each UE.

Description
High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) is an important feature introduced in 3GPP
Release 6. HSUPA improves the system capacity and throughput for the uplink by
maximizing power utilization and adjusting the uplink bit rate according to the channel
quality.
The key functions used in HSUPA for maximizing resource utilization include 2 ms/10 ms
TTI, Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ), and fast scheduling in the NodeB.
The basic principle of HSUPA HARQ is the same as that of HSDPA HARQ. In each TTI, the
NodeB informs the transmitting UE of whether the uplink data is received correctly or not.
The UE retransmits the packet if the uplink data is not correctly received. HSUPA HARQ
either uses chase combining where each retransmission is the exact copy of the initial data or
uses incremental redundancy where the retransmission contains the additional redundant
information for correct decoding.
The fast scheduling algorithm in the NodeB enables the system to make the scheduling
decision with the minimum latency as close to the radio interface as possible. Even though the
NodeB makes the scheduling decision, the UE shall decide the transmit power and the
transmit format.
RAN6.0 supports only 10 ms TTI and the maximum uplink rate of 1.44 Mbit/s per user (at the
MAC layer). Each cell supports up to 20 HSUPA users.
RAN10.0 supports 2 ms TTI and the maximum uplink rate of 5.74 Mbit/s per user (at the
MAC layer). Each cell supports up to 60 HSUPA users.
The users can also be categorized into three levels: gold, silver, and copper, which are mapped
from the ALLOCATION / RETENTION PRIORITY. The mapping is configurable. Moreover,
the DL/UL GBR is also a user-defined parameter for each priority level and is used for
HSUPA scheduler algorithm. This feature also improves the mechanism for ensuring the QoS
of HSUPA.

Enhancement

RAN10.0
RAN10.0 supports 2 ms TTI.
In RAN10.0, the MAC-e scheduling algorithm considers the limitation on CE resources
during scheduling.

RAN11.0
In RAN11.0, the MAC-e scheduling algorithm is optimized by combining the flow
control algorithm. Flow control determines each UE's primary rate and authorization
indication according to the buffer status of the UE and the congestion indication from the

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

RNC. The MAC-e scheduling algorithm performs scheduling based on the primary rate
and authorization indication.

RAN15.0
In RAN15.0, the RNC can lower the Scheduling Priority Indicator (SPI) weight of
HSUPA UEs performing best effort (BE) services in soft handover state (excluding softer
handovers). The MAC-e algorithm lowers the scheduling priority of these UEs based on
the updated SPI weight and adjusts the UE scheduling sequence, thereby reducing uplink
interference in the current cell and neighboring cells and increasing uplink cell capacity.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

2.7.4 WRFD-01061202 HSUPA Admission Control


Model
QW1SUPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature enables HSUPA and R99 services to simultaneously access the network by using
the remaining uplink cell load and other resources, improving the utilization of system
resources and ensuring QoS.

Benefits
This feature enables HSUPA services to properly utilize system resources and enables HSUPA
and R99 services to exist in the same cell. The system resources such as the Iub transport
resources, cell load resources, and user number resources can be reserved to provide high bit
rate services for users.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Description
HSUPA service admission control enables HSUPA services to access the network with other
R99 services by using the remaining uplink cell load as well as other resources. It can fully
utilize the system resources.
In the HSUPA admission control procedure, the HSUPA users per NodeB and per cell are
determined by the configuration on the RNC side.
Besides the limitation of total HSUPA user number for best effort and streaming services, the
sum of uplink cell radio load resources for both DCH and E-DCH should also be considered.
The following two algorithms are available for uplink cell radio load:

Algorithm 1: uplink cell radio load admission decision based on Equivalent Number of
Users (ENU)
Based on the current equivalent number of users (including existing R99 and HSUPA
users) and the access request, the RNC decides whether the equivalent number of users
exceeds the threshold or not and whether to admit a new call. GBR is used to calculate
the ENU of HSUPA services.

Algorithm 2: uplink cell radio load admission decision based on Provided Bit Rate
(PBR) and power
The RNC performs a check to ensure that the aggregated traffic at the provided bit rate
exceeds the sum of all GBRs for existing traffic multiplied by a configurable threshold.
If the condition of PBR is not fulfilled, RNC further performs a check of the power
resource on the basis of Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP) and Received
Scheduled E-DCH Power Share (RSEPS) measurement.

Both Iub resources and NodeB credit resources should be checked during the admission
control to enable the HSUPA services and other R99 services to be admitted under a certain
guaranteed QoS.
During the admission control, the RNC decides whether the service is mapped to E-DCH or
not by setting service rate thresholds. The thresholds include a UL streaming service HSUPA
threshold and a UL BE service HSUPA threshold. Only when the requested bit rate of the
incoming call is higher than the threshold can the call be mapped on HSUPA.
Queuing and pre-emption are considered for HSUPA if admission control fails due to
limitation of user number or equivalent user number.

Enhancement

RAN10.0

In RAN10.0, Received Scheduled E-DCH Power Share (RSEPS) measurement is supported,


and algorithm 2 is available.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

2.7.5 WRFD-01061203 HSUPA Power Control


Model
QW1SUPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
With the introduction of new physical channels, this feature improves the power efficiency of
the system, reduce UL and DL interference, and increase the system capacity.

Benefits
This feature enables the system to provide reliable quality for HSUPA-related channels. It
increases system capacity and reduces uplink interference and downlink power output.

Description
When HSUPA service is introduced, the E-DCH transport channel is used. Five new physical
channels, namely, E-DPDCH, E-DPCCH, E-HICH, E-RGCH and E-AGCH are used.
E-DPDCH is used to carry the E-DCH transport channel, and E-DPCCH is used to transmit
control information related to the E-DCH.
An E-DPCCH power offset related to the DPCCH is used to perform the power control on EDPCCH. The power of DPCCH is adjusted by inner loop power control, and the E-DPCCH
power is also controlled by the inner loop power control. The power offset can be set at the
RNC. The scheme of inner loop power control is introduced in WRFD-020504.
For the E-DPDCH, another power offset related to DPCCH is used and the same power
control method as that of the E-DPCCH is used. The power offset is also configurable at the
RNC.
For the E-HICH and E-RGCH, there are two methods to control the transmit power: constant
transmit power and DPCH-based dynamic power control. When a constant transmit power is
used, the transmit power of E-RGCH and E-HICH is given by a power offset related to the
transmit power on the P-CPICH. When DPCH-based dynamic power control is used, three
different power offsets related to the DPCCH are used.
For the E-AGCH, the methods of constant transmit power and DPCH-based dynamic power
control can also be used.
For the E-DCH, the initial power is controlled by open loop power control.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

On the uplink, outer loop power control for the E-DCH is also used to control link quality. EDCH SIR target is adjusted by the E-DCH OLPC scheme, which is the same as that of the
DCH. The DCH OLPC scheme is introduced in WRFD-020503.
In addition, the reference E-TFCI power offset and HARQ power offset can also be adjusted
by the E-DCH OLPC scheme through a reconfiguration procedure.

Enhancement

RAN 6.0
In RAN 6.0, the E-DCH OLPC algorithm is performed based on NHR and PROB. NHR
is defined as the number of HARQ retransmissions, and PROB is defined as the
probability of receiving packets whose retransmission times are more than the NHR
target.

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, the E-DCH OLPC algorithm based on residual BLER instead of PROB is
provided. It is applicable to zero retransmission and delay-sensitive services.
In RAN10.0, the E-DCH supports dynamic power control based on CQI and HS-SCCH.
In addition, the E-DCH can also use the constant transmit power and DPCH-based
dynamic power control in RAN6.0.

RAN16.0
In RAN16.0, optimize the inner loop power control for high-speed upload services
(above 700 kbit/s) to reduce the signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) by 1dB-3dB, and
correct the inner loop power control when RTWP is above a specific threshold to
improve high speed user experience and system stability.
Correct the inner loop power control for QoS-insensitive low-speed services when
RTWP goes up abnormally to improve cell throughput and system stability.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

2.7.6 WRFD-01061204 HSUPA Mobility Management


Model
QW1SUPAINP00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature is related to HSUPA mobility management. This feature can ensure that HSUPA
services are continuous.

Benefits
This feature reduces user data interruption and improves perceived data transfer quality when
UE moves with HSUPA services. It also provides a method to ensure the service continuity
between R99 cells and HSUPA cells.

Description
HSUPA mobility management function enables the handover for an HSUPA user to an R99
cell or another HSUPA cell when HSUPA user is moving. The feature also enables the
HSUPA user to change a cell with less chance of service interruption.
The E-DCH can perform soft/softer handover on the uplink while the HS-DSCH cannot.
Soft handover of the E-DCH is the HSUPA user mobility solution. The handover of the EDCH and DCH are very similar. Both are based on the measurement report of the UE and are
controlled by the network. If the downlink channel is DCH, soft handover is also used on the
downlink as stipulated in Release 99.
If the UE has both HSDPA and HSUPA, the HS-DSCH cell change procedure is used for the
downlink. As the uplink and downlink are independent, the measurement and the handover
decision are made separately.
Compared with DCH, the maximum E-DCH active set size is 4, but the maximum DCH
active set size is 6. Therefore, the Active Set (AS) of E-DCH is independent of the AS of
DCH.
UL channel type selection is determined by whether the best cell in DCHAS can support
HSUPA or not.
For intra-frequency cells, soft/softer handover occurs when the HSUPA connection is moved
from one HSUPA cell to another HSUPA cell. The target HSUPA cell could be added into
Active Set triggered by 1a, 1c, and 1d event report, or removed from Active Set trigged by 1b
event report.
The active set of E-DCH is independent of the AS of DCH. 1J event report is supported. A
non-active E-DCH but active DCH primary CPICH becomes better than an active E-DCH
primary CPICH. This non-active E-DCH cell is added into the AS of E-DCH.
For inter-frequency neighboring cells, inter-frequency hard handover between HSUPA cells is
triggered. The service is changed to E-DCH of target cell. The hard handover depends on the
UE measurement.

Handover from an HSUPA Cell to an R99 Cell


When the UE is moving from an HSUPA cell to an R99 cell (intra-frequency) and 1a
event is triggered, the HSUPA connection between UE and HSUPA cell is not changed
unless this R99 cell becomes the best cell. Then, this R99 cell is added into the active set
of DCH because the active set of E-DCH is independent of the active set of DCH.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

If the neighboring cell of HSUPA cell is an inter-frequency cell and does not support
HSUPA, hard handover, together with a channel switch from E-DCH to DCH, is
performed. The HSUPA handover decision is based on the measurement report of the
pilot channels of neighboring cells.

Handover from an R99 Cell to an HSUPA Cell


When an HSUPA-capable UE accesses an R99 cell, only the DCH channel is used to
carry the services. When the UE moves from an R99 cell to an HSUPA cell:
If the R99 cell and the HSDPA cell are intra-frequency cells, this HSUPA cell is added to
the AS of E-DCH since the active set of E-DCH is independent of the AS of DCH.
If the R99 cell and the HSDPA cell are inter-frequency cells, inter-frequency hard
handover is triggered when the quality of the signals of HSUPA cell becomes better. The
UE changes from the R99 cell to the HSUPA cell and the PS services are switched from
the DCH to the E-DCH.

Handover from an HSUPA Cell to a 2G Cell


The handover from an HSUPA cell to a 2G cell is triggered by normal inter-RAT
handover. See features of inter-RAT handover for detailed information.

Inter-RNC Handover for HSUPA


For cell change between RNCs, inter-RNC soft handover over Iur for HSUPA is
available.
Compressed mode measurement for HSUPA
Compressed mode measurement is available for E-DCH with TTI of 10 ms or 2ms in the
case of inter-frequency and inter-RAT handover.

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, the AS of E-DCH is independent of the AS of DCH and 1J event report is
supported.
The 2ms TTI of the E-DCH can be measured in compressed mode.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

2.7.7 WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC


Model
QW1SUPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
HSUPA DCCC can dynamically adjust the minimum SF code of HSUPA based on the user
throughput and flexibly switch the UE state based on the user traffic, improving the utilization
of CE resources and system efficiency.

Benefits
This feature improves the utilization of CE resources and make it possible for the UE to enjoy
the high-speed service. When the UE is in inactive state, this feature enables the UE to be
handed over to the CELL_FACH to save system resources.

Description
HSUPA DCCC is comprised of rate re-allocation and UE state transition functions:

Rate re-allocation
Rate re-allocation of HSUPA DCCC is based on traffic volume. According to traffic
volume measurement report received from the RNC, rate re-allocation increases or
decreases the uplink data rate for the best effort (BE) services (that is, interactive and
background services) to a proper value to improve the CE resource utilization.

UE state transition
With the introduction of HSUPA, a new RRC state of CELL_DCH (E-DCH) is provided,
which means that the UE is in the CELL_DCH state with services mapping on the EDCH channel.

Channel Switching Between CELL_DCH (E-DCH) and CELL_FACH


If the E-DCH is carrying BE service or streaming service and there is no data to be sent for a
long time, the transition from CELL_DCH (E-DCH) to CELL_FACH is triggered. Actually,
this feature is supported in the same way as the state transition from CELL_DCH to
CELL_FACH.
The switch from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH (E-DCH) is triggered by a request for higher
bit rates on uplink.
Channel Switching Between CELL_DCH (E-DCH) and CELL_DCH
The channel switching between e-DCH and DCH is mainly triggered by mobility
management. The transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_DCH (E-DCH) can be triggered by
periodical retries and the traffic volume.
The mobility trigger is described in WRFD-01061204 HSUPA mobility management feature.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Traffic volume measurement report indicates that a higher bit service needs to be transferred.
The UE in CELL_FACH is transferred to CELL_DCH (E-DCH) if it is in a HSUPA capable
cell and the UE has HSUPA capabilities. This feature enables the UE to be served with high
speed service.
If a service of the HSUPA-capable UE is set up on the DCH due to some reasons, for
example, admission to E-DCH fails, the periodical retry mechanism takes action, allowing the
UE state to be transferred to CELL_DCH (E-DCH). The retry time is configurable.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS SmartPhone Solution Service

2.7.8 WRFD-01061207 HSUPA Transport Resource


Management
Model
QW1SUPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature covers the mapping and allocation of differentiated transmission resources for
different HSUPA users and the admission control and congestion control of transmission
resources. These algorithms implement QoS classification and differentiation in end-to-end,
seamless mapping. This feature can greatly improve the utilization of Iub resources and
ensure QoS and differentiation.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Benefits
Differentiated service is implemented by different traffic being carried on different paths, and
optimizes the QoS and network performance. This feature improves transport resource usage
efficiency and saves OPEX on Iub transmission.

Description
With HSUPA feature introduced, the throughput over Iub interface may be increased and
varied greatly. This feature is used to optimize the usage of Iub transport resources for the
HSUPA services. The following features are concerned.

Differentiated services mapping

Transport resource load control

I. Differentiated services mapping


The PS streaming and best effort services can be setup on HSUPA. Different services have
different QoS requirements, and the Iub transport will be IP and/or ATM. Therefore, the traffic
categories such as ATMHURT, ATMHUNRT, IPHURT, and IPHUNRT are added accordingly.
Traffic Categories

Traffic Type

ATMHURT

HSUPA streaming services

ATMHUNRT

HSUPA interactive services and HSUPA


background services

IPHURT

HSUPA streaming services

IPHUNRT

HSUPA interactive services and HSDPA


background services

Moreover, differentiated transmission must be applied according to the QoS requirements of


services. The following table describesthe mapping relationship.
AAL2 Path Type

Service Type of ATM


Traffic

ATMHURT,

HSPA

CBR, RTVBR

ATMHUNRT

HSPA

NRTVBR, UBR

The mapping between traffic categories and path types is configurable.The following
tableprovides an example on an ATM-based network.
Traffic Category

Primary Path Type

Secondary Path
Type

HSUPA streaming

ATMHURT

None

HSUPA interactive

ATMHUNRT

None

HSUPA background

ATMHUNRT

None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

The secondary path type configuration can be used as mutual backup of transmission
resources especially in ATM and IP hybrid transmission solutions, that is, when IP
transmission fails, the service can be mapped to the secondary ATM path to keep the services
available, or vice verse. The following table describes such configurations.
Traffic Category

Primary Path Type

Secondary Path Type

HSUPA streaming

ATMHURT

IPHURT

HSUPA interactive

ATMHUNRT

IPHURT

HSUPA background

ATMHUNRT

IPHURT

By using this feature, different services are carried on corresponding paths, and the
differentiated service is implemented.
II. Transmission resource load control
Transmission resource load control refers to admission control and congestion control.
For the admission control, Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) is considered for HSUPA service
admission, and it belongs to the optional feature WRFD-01061202 HSUPA Admission
Control.
For the congestion control, the load reshuffling strategyis applied in scenarios such as interRAT handover. This feature belongs to the optional feature WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT
Handover Based on Load.

Enhancement

RAN6.1
In RAN6.1, each traffic class mapped onto transmission resource can be configured
separately.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

2.7.9 WRFD-01061206 Interactive and Background


Traffic Class on HSUPA
Model
QW1SUPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature enables interactive and background services to be mapped to the E-DCH to
obtain a higher service rate and enhance user experience.

Benefits
This feature enables the system to support a higher speed RAB of the PS interactive and
background services.

Description
This feature enables the best effort (interactive and background) services to be mapped onto
the E-DCH if a UE is HSUPA capable. The system sets a switch to enable or disable the
feature that BE traffic is mapped on to E-DCH. A service rate threshold is also set so that the
requested service can be mapped on E-DCH only when the requested service bit rate is higher
than the threshold. Otherwise, the requested service is mapped onto the DCH. The service rate
threshold is configurable by the operator.
When the best effort service is carried on the E-DCH, the maximum uplink bit rate is 5.74
Mbit/s (MAC layer).
When a UE has BE service on E-DCH, it can use another DCH CS RAB or another DCH PS
RAB simultaneously. If the UE capability is allowed, the UE can be served by two HSUPA
RABs.
GBR of HSUPA BE traffic is set and used to estimate whether the maximum available
resource for HSUPA can satisfy the requirements of streaming services and BE services in
admission control. The GBR of HSUPA BE traffic is configurable by operator.
The HSUPA schedule algorithm also considers the configured GBR information of HSUPA
BE traffic.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

2.7.10 WRFD-01061210 HSUPA 1.44Mbps per User


Model
QW1SUPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0

Summary
This feature enables the HSUPA rate per user to reach a maximum of 1.44 Mbit/s.

Benefits
This feature provides a higher peak bit rate and enhances user experience.

Description
High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) is an important feature of 3GPP Release 6 that
provides high speed service for uplink. With this feature, the UE with interactive or
background services on the E-DCH can reach the peak bit rate of 1.44 Mbit/s (MAC Layer).
Therefore, user experience is greatly enhanced.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should have the capability of HSDPA Category 3(or later)

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

CN support the uplink speed of 1.44Mbps (or more)

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

2.7.11 WRFD-01061211 20 HSUPA Users per Cell


Model
QW1SUPAINP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature enables a single HSUPA cell to simultaneously support 20 HSUPA users. If the
number of HSUPA users exceeds 20, the DCH is attempted for service provisioning.

Benefits
This feature provides HSUPA services at a higher peak bit rate for up to 20 users per cell.

Description
Up to 20 HSUPA users can be admitted to a HSUPA cell.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

2.7.12 WRFD-01061212 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in


Case of Iub Congestion
Model
QWMS000IFC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
This feature enables the monitoring of Iub transmission resources to dynamically adjust the
uplink Uu throughput, greatly improving the resource utilization.

Benefits
This feature improves the transport resource usage efficiency greatly and reduces the
throughput fluctuation in the case of the Iub congestion.

Description
The UL Uu throughput is controlled by the scheduler according to the UL load resource and
the Iub bandwidth resource simultaneously. The schedule algorithm estimates the influence on
the load resource and the Iub resource of the change of the serving grant (SG) and decides
whether to assign the absolute grant (AG) or relative grant (RG) to UEs.
The flow control algorithm maintains the Iub available bandwidth resource on the following
principles:
1. The Iub buffer occupancy status:

If the Iub buffer occupancy ratio increases, the available bandwidth may be reduced by a
step.

If the Iub buffer occupancy ratio decreases, the available bandwidth may be increased by
a step.

2. The transmission network congestion status (the NodeB detects it according to the
transmission network layer (TNL)) indicator is indicated by the RNC:

If the transmission network is congested, the available bandwidth may be reduced by a


step.

If the transmission network is not-congested, the available bandwidth may be increased


by a step.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

2.7.13 WRFD-010632 Streaming Traffic Class on


HSUPA
Model
QW1SSTCUPA00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
This feature enables the streaming service to be mapped onto the E-DCH, improving the
utilization of cell resources.

Benefits
This feature enables the system to support higher speed RAB of the PS streaming traffic.

Description
This feature enables the streaming service to be mapped onto the E-DCH if a UE is HSUPA
capable. The system sets a switch to enable or disable the feature by which the streaming
traffic can be mapped onto the E-DCH. And a service rate threshold is also need to be set so
that only when the requested service bit rate is higher than the threshold, the request service
can be mapped onto the E-DCH. Otherwise, the requested service will be mapped onto the
DCH. The service rate threshold can be set by the operators too.
When the streaming service is carried on the E-DCH, the maximum uplink bit rate can reach
up to 384 kbit/s.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

The UE with the streaming service on the E-DCH can use another CS RAB or another PS
RAB simultaneously. One HSUPA BE RAB and one HSUPA streaming RAB can be served
on one UE simultaneously if the capability of the UE is allowed.
The GBR of the streaming traffic is used to estimate whether the maximum available resource
for the HSUPA can satisfy the requirement of the streaming service in the admission control.
The HSUPA schedule algorithm also considers the GBR information of the streaming traffic
so that in all HSUPA streaming services that the bit rate is not less than the GBR can be
guaranteed.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

2.7.14 WRFD-010635 HSUPA over Iur


Model
QW1S0UIURP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
This feature enables HSUPA services to be carried on the Iur interface and provides
continuous HSUPA services for UEs moving between RNCs.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Benefits
The HSUPA over the Iur provides continuous HSUPA services for mobile users moving
between the RNCs. It enlarges the range of the HSUPA services to the RNCs which have the
Iur connections with a certain RNC.

Description
The HSUPA over the Iur is the scenario that the DRNC cell is in the HSUPA E-DCH active
state. The feature comprises the HSUPA service management over the Iur, the HSUPA
mobility management over the Iur, and so on. The HSUPA capability of the DRNC cell is
configurable.

HSUPA service management over Iur


The HSUPA service management over the Iur includes the HSUPA service setup,
modification, release, and the dynamic channel configuration control (DCCC).
When the UE is in CELL_DCH state and the DRNC cell is in the E-DCH active state or
the UE is in CELL_FACH state and the camps in the DRNC cell, the HSUPA service can
be set up, modified and released over the Iur.
The HSUPA DCCC over the Iur is similar to the WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC and
the difference is that some of the cells are in the DRNC.

HSUPA mobility management over Iur


The HSUPA mobility management over the Iur includes the soft handover, hard
handover, cell update (because of radio link failure), and serving cell change.
The process is similar to the corresponding mobility management described in the
WRFD-01061204 HSUPA Mobility Management and the difference is that the cells
change between the RNCs.

HSUPA static relocation


If the HSUPA service is over the Iur and the radio links are provided only by the target
RNC, the static relocation can be triggered by the Iur congestion.

HSUPA service pre-emption in DRNC


When the new HSUPA service is not admitted to access the network, the CRNC may
trigger the pre-emption of other HSUPA services with lower priorities. If the CRNC is
the DRNC, it will send the radio link pre-emption required indication to the SRNC and
the SRNC will release the HSUPA services indicated in the radio link pre-emption
required indication.
The other functions of this feature are the HSUPA E-DCH power offset adjustment over
the Iur, and so on. The process is similar to that on the Iub interface.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

UE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

NA

Other Network Units


The neighbouring RNC must support HSUPA over Iur too.

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

2.8 HSUPA 5.74Mbps


2.8.1 WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2
Model
QW1S0UPA2P00
QWMS00HUPA02

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
HSUPA Phase2 is an enhanced HSUPA feature that supports 2ms transmission time interval
(TTI).
Compared with 10ms TTI provided in the HSUPA introduction package, this feature can
provide a higher uplink rate and lower delay. This feature provides a series of enhanced
HSUPA functions to meet the commercial requirements of HSUPA services.

Benefits
HSUPA improves the performance of UMTS network by providing higher rate and higher
throughput for the uplink and higher capacity for the system.

Description
High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) is an important feature introduced in 3GPP
Release 6.
In RAN6.0, only 10 ms TTI is supported and the maximum uplink rate is1.44 Mbit/s (MAC
layer) /1.92 Mbit/s (physical layer) per user. Each cell supports up to 20 HSUPA users.
In RAN10.0, the 2 ms TTI is supported, the maximum uplink rate is 5.74 Mbit/s (MAC
layer)/5.76 Mbit/s (physical layer).

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board,EBOI
board, EDLP or EDLPd board.
The BBU3806 need to configure EBBC/EBBCd board
The BBU3900 need to configure WBBPb,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package. The software dependency is described in
each sub functions.

2.8.2 WRFD-01061401 HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control


(Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)
Model
QW1S0UPA2P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature enables the UE to report the CQI and HS-SCCH as a reference, effectively
reducing the power consumption of the E-AGCH.

Benefits
E-AGCH power control based on CQI or HS-SCCH makes it more efficient to adjust the
power of E-AGCH under the condition that HSDPA co-exists with HSUPA.
By using E-AGCH power control based on CQI or HS-SCCH, the following advantages are
introduced:

Less power consumption of E-AGCH

Flexible power control for E-AGCH

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Description
In 3GPP specifications, the serving cell of HSUPA should be the same with that of HSDPA.
Meanwhile, E-AGCH belongs to the serving cell of HSUPA, so the power control of EAGCH can take advantage of the information of HSDPA, such as CQI and HS-SCCH, which
can reflect the quality of transmission in the serving cell.
The power control of E-AGCH is enhanced in HSUPA phase II when HSUPA coexists with
HSDPA. At this time, CQI or HS-SCCH information is used to adjust the power offset of EAGCH. Consequently, it can spare more power for the downlink transmission.

CQI reflects the channel quality of the serving cell. When the CQI information is
available, it can be used to adjust the power offset of E-AGCH.

The demodulation error probability of HS-SCCH can be adjusted by modification of the


transmission power of HS-SCCH. Since the demodulation requirements for E- AGCH
are similar to those for HS-SCCH, power offset of E-AGCH can be modified based on
that of HS-SCCH.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction
Package

2.8.3 WRFD-01061402 Enhanced Fast UL Scheduling


Model
QW1S0UPA2P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Summary
This feature enables comprehensive considerations of system resources and QoS parameters
preset for different users to ensure accurate differentiated user experience and improve cell
throughput.

Benefits
Enhanced UL scheduling makes it more efficient to accommodate different scenarios, such as
hub NodeB, IP convergence, and RAN sharing.
This feature enables more efficient usage of uplink resource by maximizing the uplink
throughput of the cell under the condition that the QoS requirements of all UEs are met.
This feature provides better fairness among users. If there are users with the same priority, the
uplink resources allocated to them are similar.
This feature provides flexible priorities among users. If a UE has a higher priority, it can
obtain more uplink resources.

Description
In HSUPA phase II, the 2 ms TTI is supported. The UL scheduling is enhanced based on the
shorter TTI.
The Proportional Fair (PF) scheduling algorithm is enhanced in HSUPA phase II. PF is based
on uplink load factor and takes advantage of downlink control channels (E-AGCH/E-RGCH)
to influence the E-TFCI that the UE may use. Consequently, it can tightly control the uplink
interference.
When the scheduling period arrives, the PF scheduling algorithm performs the following
operations:

Queue the HSUPA users based on the scheduling priority indicator, GBR, and data rate.

Consider the CE resources and Iub transport resources.

Assign absolute grant according to the Scheduling Information (SI) sent by the UE,
which can control the maximum rate the UE may use.

Assign relative grant according to the happy bit on the E-DPCCH.

Shorter TTI means more efficient schedule process.


High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) is an important feature of 3GPP Release 6 that
provides high speed service for the uplink. In order to provide multiple bit rate services, six
UE categories are defined in 3GPP. Different UE categories support different maximum codes
for E-DCH, which means that different maximum bit rates can be achieved.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource
Management

2.8.4 WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI


Model
QW1S0UPA2P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
The 2ms TTI of HSUPA enables a single user to obtain a higher UL throughput and shorter
delay.

Benefits
By using a shorter TTI on the Uu interface, HSUPA has the following advantages:

Faster data scheduling

Higher UL peak data rate

Lower latency

Description
There are two Transmission Time Intervals (TTIs) defined in the 3GPP protocol for HSUPA.
10 ms TTI is mandatory for all HSUPA capable UEs while 2 ms TTI is optional. Switching
between the two TTIs is performed by UTRAN through L3 signaling.
In RAN10.0, 2 ms TTI is supported. Therefore, all UEs of the six categories can be supported.
E-DCH
Category

Max.
Capability
Combination

E-DCH TTI

Max. Data Rate (Mbit/s)


MAC Layer

MAC Layer

10 ms TTI

2 ms TTI

Air Interface

Category 1

1 x SF4

10 ms only

0.71

0.96

Category 2

2 x SF4

10 ms and 2
ms

1.45

1.40

1.92

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Category 3

2 x SF4

10 ms only

1.45

1.92

Category 4

2 x SF2

10 ms and 2
ms

2.0

2.89

3.84

Category 5

2 x SF2

10 ms only

2.0

3.84

Category 6

2 x SF4 + 2
x SF2

10 ms and 2
ms

2.0

5.74

5.76

Category 7

2 x SF4 + 2
x SF2

10 ms and 2
ms

2.0

11.498

11.52

Compressed mode measurement is available for E-DCH 2 ms in the case of inter-frequency


and inter-RAT handover.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board, EBOI
board, EDLP or EDLPd board.
The BBU3806 need to configure EBBC/EBBCd board.
The BBU3900 need to configure WBBPb/WBBPd board.

UE
UE should have the capability of HSDPA Category 2,4,6,7,8,9

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

2.8.5 WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2ms/10ms TTI


Handover
Model
QW1S0UPA2P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Summary
As 2 ms TTI capable cells and 10 ms TTI capable cells coexist in the network and different
TTIs are required for different throughputs, the handover between 2 ms TTI and 10 ms TTI is
necessary. This feature can ensure that HSUPA users smoothly move between different cells
and resources are allocated for throughput requirements.

Benefits
This feature supports mobility between 2 ms TTI capable cell and non-2 ms-scheduling
capable cell.
This feature maximizes the possibility for 2 ms TTI capable UE to get the best performance
by using 2 ms scheduling feature.

Description
Both 10 ms and 2 ms TTI are defined in the 3GPP protocol for HSUPA. In the HSUPA
network, when UE moves between cells that support HSUPA 2 ms TTI and those does not, the
switching schedule between 10 ms and 2 ms TTIs is needed. Such switching generally occurs
in the handover scenario as described below.

When the soft handover happens to an UE using HSUPA 2 ms TTI and the target cell
does not support 2 ms TTI, the RNC first reconfigures the UE to 10 ms TTI and then
performs the handover procedure.

When the hard handover happens to an UE using HSUPA 2 ms TTI and the target cell
does not support 2 ms TTI, the RNC performs the handover and reconfigures the UE to
10 ms TTI at the same time.

When all the cells in active set using HSUPA 10 ms TTI support 2 ms TTI, a periodical
retry to reconfigure to 2 ms TTI is implemented to make it possible to get better
performance. On the other hand, a configurable bit rate threshold is triggered by such
retry procedure, that is, when the RAB maximum bit rate assigned is lower than the
threshold, it is unnecessary to use 2 ms TTI.

The RNC gets the 2 ms TTI capability from the audit message sent by the NodeB. For the
neighboring cells that are not controlled by the RNC, such capability can be configured by the
operator.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board,EBOI
board, EDLP or EDLPd board.
The BBU3806 need to configure EBBC/EBBCd board.
The BBU3900 need to configure WBBPb,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2

2.8.6 WRFD-01061405 HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User


Model
QW1S0UPA2P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature enables the HSUPA rate per user at MAC layer to reach a maximum of 5.74
Mbit/s. The rate is a peak rate defined in 3GPP specifications.

Benefits
This feature greatly enhances user experience.

Description
Based on the 2 ms TTI and enhanced fast UL schedule, with 2 SF4 and 2 SF2 codes
combination, the UE can reach the peak rate of 5.74 Mbit/s at MAC layer.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EULP,
EBBI, EBOI board.
The BBU3806 should be configured with the EBBC board.
The BBU3900 should be configured with the WBBPb,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
UE should have the capability of HSDPA Category 6,7,8,9

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

CN support the uplink speed of 5.74Mbps (or more)

Other Features
WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA

2.8.7 WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA


Model
QW1S0USRBP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
This feature enables UL SRBs to be carried over HSUPA. This feature can obtain a lower call
delay and save transmission resources.

Benefits
This feature provides a higher signaling rate and reduces the call process delay. Since the SRB
is carried on the HSUPA, the transmission resource can be saved, compared with that is
carried on the DCH.

Description
The signaling over the SRB is delay sensitive and irregular. Compared with the DCH, it is
more appropriate to set up the SRB over the HSUPA. The SRB over the HSUPA can be
applied during the RRC connection setup or other procedures such as the mobility
management.
If the SRB is set up over the DCH, it can be reconfigured to be mapped onto the HSUPA in
some cases such as the target cell of the handover supports the HSUPA while the source cell
does not. Inversely, the SRB mapping on the HSUPA can also be reconfigured to be mapped
onto the DCH if the target cell of the handover does not support the HSUPA.
The SRB over the HSUPA is configurable. The operator can enable/disable the SRB over
HSUPA function.

Enhancement

RAN15.0
RAN15.0 supports the coverage-based TTI switchover function. As the coverage
performance of HSUPA is inferior to that of R99, SRB over HSUPA decreases the
service setup success rate and increases the call drop rate compared with SRB over
DCH. The coverage-based TTI switchover function improves the service setup success
rate and decreases the call drop rate.

Dependency

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

RNC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

NA

NodeB
The 38XX series Node B supports this feature, and the EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd,
EBBC or EBBCd is required. The 3900 series Node B supports this feature, and the
WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf is required.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

2.9 HSUPA+ 11.5Mbps


2.9.1 WRFD-010698 HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per
User
Model
QW1SPA+U1100

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature provides an uplink peak rate of 11.5 Mbit/s for a single user through uplink
16QAM and E-DPCCH boosting or DC-HSUPA.

Benefits
This feature improves spectrum efficiency and increases the peak uplink rate, allowing end
users to enjoy high-speed uplink data services.

Description
This feature utilizes 16QAM (introduced in 3GPP Release 7) and E-DPCCH boosting to
increase the uplink peak rate from 5.74 Mbit/s to 11.5 Mbit/s.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
For uplink 16QAM+E-DPCCH boosting, The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and
BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board. The DBS3800 must be
configured with the EBBCd board. The 3900 series base station must be configured
with the WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
The UE needs to support E-DPCCH boosting. The UE must be of HSUPA category
7,8,9.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN support user rate of 11.5Mbps or above.

Other Features
For uplink 16QAM+E-DPCCH boosting, WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM WRFD-010614
HSUPA Phase 2 WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting For DC-HSUPA, WRFD-140204
DC-HSUPA WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.9.2 WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM


Model
QWMS000U1600

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
3GPP Release 7 introduces HSUPA UE category 7, which supports the 16QAM mode and a
UL peak rate of up to 11.5 Mbit/s in theory.

Benefits
The UL system capacity of the HSUPA network is increased.
The peak rate of HSUPA users (UE category 7) is increased.

Description
3GPP R7 introduces UE category 7, which supports the 16QAM mode and a UL peak rate of
up to 11.5 Mbit/s in theory. This is a 100% improvement over the previous 3GPP release of
HSUPA for which the maximum peak rate is 5.74 Mbit/s"
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

The HSUPA 16QAM improves the UL data transmission performance and increases the
system capacity of HSUPA cells.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E /BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board. The
DBS3800 supports must be configured with the EBBCd board. The 3900 series base
stations must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
The UE must be of category 7, category 9

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.9.3 WRFD-140204 DC-HSUPA


Model
QWMS0DCUPA01

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
Introduced in 3GPP Release 9, the feature Dual-Cell High Speed Uplink Packet Access (DCHSUPA) allows a UE in the uplink to use two adjacent 5 MHz carriers at the same time. This
increases the peak rate per user for uplink data transmission and the average cell throughput.

Benefits
The benefits of this feature are as follows:

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Increased uplink peak rate per user and a higher possibility to achieve high rates with the
same uplink received total wideband power (RTWP).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

High-speed uplink data service experience for end users.

Description
DC-HSUPA achieves a smooth evolution of HSPA by using uplink carrier aggregation. This
feature enables a UE to perform E-DCH transmission simultaneously on two cells
simultaneously on two intra-band adjacent carriers that provide the same coverage and
therefore supports a higher transmission rate.
With DC-HSUPA, one enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) is established on each of the two
carriers. On both E-DCHs, only 2 ms transmission time interval (TTI) can be used. To use
DC-HSUPA, the UE must also be enabled with DC-HSDPA, Uplink Layer 2 Improvement,
SRB over HSUPA, and SRB over HSDPA. The F-DPCH must be used in the downlink and
the DPDCH cannot be used in the uplink.
The primary DC-HSDPA carrier, which carries the HS-DPCCH in the uplink, is also the
primary DC-HSUPA carrier. Both carriers use the DPCCH in the uplink and F-DPCH in the
downlink for closed-loop power control.
DC-HSUPA can work with both or either of UL 16QAM and E-DPCCH Boosting. The two
carriers must have the same feature configuration. For example, if the primary carrier is
configured with DC-HSUPA and UL 16QAM, the secondary carrier must also be configured
with DC-HSUPA and UL 16 QAM.
The two DC-HSUPA carriers have separate uplink and downlink signaling control, for
example, scheduling information (SI) and happy bit in the uplink and absolute grant (AG) and
relative grant (RG) in the downlink.
High-speed PS streaming and BE services can be carried over DC-HSUPA.
SRB signaling, CS services, IMS signaling, PS conversational services, as well as
combinations of SRB signaling and one of these three services are not carried over DCHSUPA. This is because these services produce only a small amount of data and therefore
using DC-HSUPA brings unnoticeable gains.
Non-scheduling services can only be carried over the primary DC-HSUPA carrier.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
All 3900 series base stations support this feature. The WBBPd or WBBPf board must
be configured on these base stations. All DBS3800 series base stations support this
feature. The EBBCd board must be configured on these base stations. The BTS3812E,
B

UE
The UE must comply with 3GPP Release 9 or later. The UE must be of HSUPA UE
category 8 or 9. Category-8 UEs support only DC-HSUPA+QPSK. Their peak rate is
11.5 Mbit/s. Category-9 UEs support DC-HSUPA+16QAM. Their peak rate is 23
Mbit/s.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 Improvement WRFD010652 SRB over HSDPA WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA WRFD-010696 DCHSDPA WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.9.4 WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 Improvement


Model
QWMS000UL200

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
In RAN11.0 or earlier versions, the UL radio link controller (RLC) operates only in fixed
PDU mode. The size of protocol data units (PDUs) is fixed. After UL layer 2 improvement is
introduced, the UL RLC (in UM and AM modes) can operate in flexible PDU or fixed PDU
mode, depending on the higher-layer configuration. When the RLC operates in flexible PDU
mode, it can receive PDUs of flexible sizes so as to decrease the size of UL PDUs and
increase the UL throughput in the case that the UL transmit power of the UE is limited.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Benefits
This feature improves the user peak throughput as well as the uplink throughput in weak
coverage. When the UE moves from the center of the cell to the border of the cell and no layer
2 improvement is available, the transmit power of the UE is limited if the distance from the
center of the cell reaches a specified value. In such a case, the throughput decreases sharply,
and the transportation may be interrupted. After UL layer 2 improvement is introduced, the
throughput can decrease smoothly because the size of PDUs transmitted by the UE decreases.
Therefore, the transportation is more continuous.

Description
In 3GPP R7, in the downlink, MAC layer segmentation is introduced through the change from
the fixed PDU size to the flexible PDU size for the RLC. Therefore, the DL supports the high
rate, DL layer 2 evolution, and smooth evolution of old protocol formats to new formats.
The UL has similar problems. The PDUs of a fixed size cannot support high rate services
effectively because PDUs of a small size are not applicable to high rate services. Though
PDUs of a large size are applicable to high rate services, the power at the border of the cell is
limited. Moreover, the fixed PDU size may lead to additional padding bits, affecting the
transmission efficiency.

UL layer 2 improvement has the following characteristics:

RLC supports flexible RLC PDU sizes.

The MAC layer introduces the MAC-i/is entity. The biggest difference between the
MAC-i/is entity and the MAC-e/es entity is that the MAC-i/is entity supports data
segmentation and concatenation at the MAC layer and can select an appropriate PDU
size based on the air interface quality to improve the data transmission efficiency.

The RNC can determine whether layer 2 improvement is required according to the UE
capability, cell capability, and active set capability.
The network side supports the handover between the cells with UL layer 2 improvement and
the cells without UL layer 2 improvement.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EULP,
EBBI, EBOI or EULPd board.
The BBU3806 should be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board.
The BBU3900 should be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
The UE need to be compliant with 3GPP Release 8(or later) to support the feature.

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package
WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service

2.9.5 WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting


Model
QWMS0EDBST00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature uses the E-DCH dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) instead of the
DPCCH as the reference channel for channel estimation during HSUPA demodulation. This
feature helps reduce the SIR requirement of the DPCCH and increase the rates of HSUPA
services.

Benefits
This feature together with uplink 16QAM increases uplink rates to the theoretical peak rate
11.5 Mbit/s instead of less than 8 Mbit/s due to SIR target limitation of the DPCCH.

Description

E-DPCCH boosting is introduced in 3GPP Release 7.

This technique is a prerequisite for uplink 16QAM to increase uplink rates because a
higher rate requires more accurate channel estimation.

Traditionally, the DPCCH is selected as the reference channel for channel estimation.
The DPCCH, however, cannot meet the power requirement in the case of high-speed
transmission bursts in the uplink. This is because the DPCCH power is affected by outerloop power control, and therefore delay exists in the power adjustment. Also, the SIR
target of the DPCCH is limited. These limitations of the DPCCH adversely affect the
accuracy of channel estimation.

To solve this limitation, the E-DPCCH boosting technique increases the transmit power
of E-DPCCH and uses the E-DPCCH for channel estimation. The boosting technique can
lower the requirement for DPCCH SIR. The E-DPCCH can increase the accuracy of
channel estimation because its transmit power is not limited. In this way, this feature
improves the reception quality of uplink high-speed services.

Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE need to be configured with the EULPd board,and the
downlink services cannot be setup on HBBI/HDLP/NDLP board.
The DBS3800 needs to be configured with the EBBCd board.
The 3900 series base stations need to be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
The UE must be Release-7 (or later)to support the boosting technique.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN supports data bit rate of 11.5Mbit/s or above.

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Downlink Capacity Improvement Service

2.10 HSUPA+ 23Mbps


2.10.1 WRFD-140203 HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per
User
Model
QW1SPA+U2300

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
This feature allows a maximum uplink rate of 23 Mbit/s per user by using DC-HSUPA and
16QAM techniques.

Benefits
The benefits of this feature are as follows:

Improves frequency utilization and increases the uplink peak rate per user.

Provides end users with a high-speed uplink data service experience.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2 Data Services

Description
Based on the existing HSUPA peak rate of 11.5 Mbit/s, this feature increases the peak rate to
23 Mbit/s by using DC-HSUPA and 16QAM techniques.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
To enable this feature on a BSC6900 in IP transmission mode, the GOUa, FG2A, POUc,
FG2c or GOUc board must be configured.

NodeB
All 3900 series base stations support this feature. The WBBPd or WBBPf board must
be configured on these base stations.
All DBS3800 series base stations support this feature. The EBBCd board must be
configured on these base stations.
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE support this feature. The EULPd board
must be configured on these base stations. Downlink services must be established on the
EBBI, EBOI or EDLP board.
When 4-way receive diversity is used, only 3900 series base stations (except the
BTS3902E) support this feature.

UE
The UE must support E-DPCCH Boosting and DC-HUSPA.
The UE must be of HSUPA UE category 9.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The CN is of 3GPP Release 7 or later to support a maximum uplink rate of 23 Mbit/s or
higher, which is promised at service subscription time.

Other Features
WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting WRFD-140204 DCHSUPA WRFD-010698 HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS HSPA+ Introduction Service.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Radio & Performance

3.1 Coverage Enhancement


3.1.1 WRFD-010203 Transmit Diversity
Model
QWMS0000TD00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.

Summary
TX diversity enables the NodeB to provide twice the number of RF DL channels compared
with no TX diversity. This feature can support STTD, TSTD, and CLD1 to effectively
improve the reception performance of the UE. In TX diversity mode, the UE must support
diversity reception.

Benefits
TX diversity can improve terminal performance in special circumstances, especially when
there is less valid multi-path effect and the UE speed is low. In this case, capacity and
coverage can be obviously improved and investment can be reduced while the same QoS is
guaranteed and the CAPEX and OPEX can be cut down by operators.

Description
There are several transmit diversity modes adopted in WCDMA 3GPP, namely the Time
Switched Transmit Diversity (TSTD) mode, Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD) mode,
and Closed Loop Transmit Diversity Mode1 (CLD1). The TSTD and the STTD are open loop
transmit diversity, which do not need feedback information compared with the closed loop
diversity. The following table summarizes the possible application of open and closed loop
transmit diversity modes on different types of downlink physical channels.
Physical channel
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Open loop mode


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Closed loop mode


175

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

type

TSTD

STTD

Mode 1

P-CCPCH

SCH

S-CCPCH

DPCH

PICH

MICH

HS-PDSCH

HS-SCCH

E-AGCH

E-RGCH

E-HICH

AICH

If a cell works in TX diversity mode, the CPICH, PCCPCH, and SCHof the cell must also
work in TX diversity mode.
There are two types of physical channels that can usethe Closed Loop Transmit Diversity
Mode1 (CLD1), that is, DPCH and HS-PDSCH. Huawei RAN6.0 supports this feature.

Enhancement

RAN5.0
In RAN5.0, afterthe HSDPA feature is deployed, STTD for HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH
is supported.

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, after the HSUPA feature is deployed, STTD for E-AGCH, E-RGCH and EHICH is supported.
Closed Loop Transmit Diversity Mode1 is a new feature of RAN6.0.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
TX diversity requires the Node B to provide two times RF channel resources compared
with no TX diversity mode.
In TX diversity mode, the UE must support diversity reception, STTD, TSTD, and
CLD1.

UE
The UE must support diversity reception, STTD, TSTD, and CLD1.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.1.2 WRFD-010209 4-Antenna Receive Diversity


Model
QWMS004ARD00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0.

Summary
The 4-antenna RX diversity technology enables the NodeB to provide twice the number of RF
UL channels compared with the 2-antenna RX diversity technology. In this way, the system
can obtain a higher UL coverage gain.

Benefits
It can improve receiver sensitivity and uplink coverage, so that the CAPEX is reduced.

Description
Receive diversity refers to a technique of monitoring multiple frequencies from the same
signal source, or multiple radios and antennas monitoring the same frequency, in order to
combat signal fade and interference.
Receive diversity is one way to enhance the reception performance of uplink channels. It does
not involve RNC or UE.
Huawei NodeBs support both RX diversity and none RX diversity. In RX diversity mode, the
NodeB can be configured with 4 antennas (4-way), and 4 antennas for economical purpose (4way economical) through the Antenna Magnitude parameter. The only difference between 4way and 4-way economical modes is that in the latter mode signals on the random access
channel are received from two antennas, but the signals on the dedicate channelare received
from four antennas.
In RX diversity mode, the NodeB does not require additional devices and works with the
same algorithms. The 4-way RX diversity requires twice the number of RX channels
compared with 2-way RX diversity. The number of RX channels depends on the settings of
the antenna connectors on the cabinet top.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The RX diversity requires the Node B to provide enough RF channels and
demodulation resources that can match the number of diversity antennas.
The BTS3902E and BTS3803E cannot support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.1.3 WRFD-021308 Extended Cell Coverage up to


200km
Model
QWMS000ECC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0.

Summary
With this feature, the operator can use less NodeBs to extend the cell coverage.

Benefits
Improve the cell coverage to enable the ultra coverage with the minimal site number.

Description
This feature is helpful for scenarios of low capacity and ultra coverage (such as seas, deserts,
and rural areas). The cell coverage will extend to 30 200 km.
Before RAN10.0, the increase in cell range up to 180 km does not require additional hardware
from a functional perspective, as long as the HBBI (macro NodeB BTS3812E and
BTS3812AE) or HBBU (Distributed NodeB DBS3800) board is used. For cell ranges above
30 km hardware dimensioning is required for RACH, that is, one HBBI or one HBBU board
per cell-carrier is needed.
In RAN10.0, if the NodeB supports remote cells whose radius is greater than 30 km, a remote
cell group can be set so that the baseband board supports the same number of remote cells as
that of common cells and no additional baseband resources are required by the remote cells.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, Extended Cell Coverage is up to 200 km.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
All types of baseband boards support this feature. However, only the WBBPb, WBBPd
or WBBPf (3900 series NodeB), EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd (BTS3812E/AE), and
EBBC/EBBCd (DBS3800) support remote cell groups.
BTS3902E and BTS3803E cannot support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.1.4 WRFD-021309 Improved Downlink Coverage


Model
QW1S00IDCV00
QW1S00IDCP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.1.

Summary
This feature supports the deltaqrxlevmin parameter introduced in 3GPP R5. It can extend the
DL coverage of a cell.

Benefits

Improves the downlink coverage and UE access capability

Improves the cell capacity by adjustment of PCPICH power in indoor scenario

Improves the access capability in long distance coverage scenario

Reduces the sites number required.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Description
With supporting the parameter deltaqrxlevmin introduced in 3GPP Release5, UE is allowed
to camp on the cell and access the network with CPICH RSCP that is -119 dBm, therefore,
improve the downlink coverage compared to the original -115dBm.
Such parameter deltaqrxlevmin can be configured by operator.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-021308 Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km

3.1.5 WRFD-020138 HSUPA Coverage Enhancement


at UE Power Limitation
Model
QW1SUCEUPL00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This technique is introduced in 3GPP Release 8 to improve the coverage performance for
HSUPA services on the HSUPA cell edge.

Benefits
This feature improves coverage at the HSUPA cell edge for BE services and voice services.
The emulation results show that the coverage can be increased by about 10%.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Description

This feature improves the HSUPA coverage performance through HSUPA power control
enhancement at UE power limitation introduced in 3GPP Release 8.

When a UE detects that its transmit power is limited, the UE enters power scaling mode.
In this mode, the transmit power on uplink physical channels is reduced proportionately
to improve coverage quality.

In the traditional power-scaling technique, the power offset of E-DPDCH relative to


DPCCH is not the most appropriate value, and therefore scaling mode offers only limited
gains. In the enhanced power scaling technique, the network side provides optimized
transport block size and the power offset of E-DPDCH relative to DPCCH. The UE uses
these optimized settings when its power is limited at the cell edge. In contrast to the
traditional power-scaling technique, the enhanced technique allows for more appropriate
transport block size and E-DPDCH power-offset settings, improving coverage
performance at the HSUPA cell edge.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE needs to support 3GPP Release 8 or later. It also needs to support improved EUL
power control at UE power limitation.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.1.6 WRFD-010206 High Speed Access


Model
QWMS000HSA00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.1.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
With the advent of higher-speed vehicles, how to provide mobile communication services on
a high-speed moving vehicle becomes a challenge for the operator. This feature is one of the
major high-speed coverage solutions.

Benefits
High speed access is one of the key features in the differential solution for high speed
coverage. The NodeBs using high speed access supports coverage under which the moving
speed of UEs can exceed 400 km/h.

Description
Currently, the high-speed trains in some countries and regions can reach speeds of 200 km/h
to 300 km/h. The maglev train in Shanghai can reach a maximum speed of 430 km/h. Highspeed access is one of the key features in the high-speed coverage differentiation solution.
With this feature, the NodeB can provide the coverage for the UE moving at a speed of up to
450 km/h.
When the UE moves at a high speed, Doppler shift occurs. As Doppler shift affects the signal
reception on the baseband unit of the NodeB, automatic frequency control (AFC) should be
implemented on the RAKE receiver. The NodeB supports AFC for UL DPCH and PRACH.
The parameter "High Speed Movement Mode" can be used to activate AFC on the PRACH.
The frequency offset can be mapped to the maximum moving speed through the parameter
"Speed Rate (km/h)" on the LMT.
When this feature is enabled, the Extended Cell status will not be supported any more. The
capability of the HULP, HBBI, and HBBU carrying access channels falls (each board can
carry access channels for only one cell). In addition, this feature is not supported when 4antenna RX diversity is configured.
The WBBP, EBBI, EBOI and EBBC are added to support this feature without compromising
the performance.

Enhancement

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, the WBBP, EBBI, EBOI and EBBC are added to support this feature
without compromising the performance.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3803E does not support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with High-Speed Train Feature Introduction Service

3.1.7 WRFD-021350 Independent Demodulation of


Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell
Model
QWMS0IDMRU00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
The feature of independent demodulation of signals from multiple RRUs in one cell enables
the signals from multiple RRUs to be demodulated independently and combined within a
BBU. It effectively reduces the number of handovers between cells for users.

Benefits
This feature introduces independent demodulation of signals from multiple RRUs in one cell.
Different RRU coverage areas in the same cell can reduce the number of handovers between
cells and increase cell capacity and throughput. Multiple RRU coverage areas can also be
used to flexibly form wire-shaped coverage areas. Using a relatively small number of cells,
the coverage needs of transportation routes can be met.

Description
This feature provides independent demodulation of signals from multiple RRUs in one cell. In
uplink, the NodeB performs independent demodulation and combination of the multiple RRU
receiver signals within a BBU. In downlink, the NodeB copies the signal of a cell and outputs
it to multiple RRUs. A cell can be divided into multiple coverage area, each coverage area has
independent RRU, and multiple RRUs belong to the same cell and have the same scrambling
code.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Baseband combination technology is used. Therefore, multiple RRU combined signals will
not introduce signal background noise or influence uplink receiver sensitivity.
In RRU cascade scenario, one 1.25G CPRI can support independent demodulation of
maximum 4 RRU in a cell; a 2.5G CPRI can support independent demodulation of maximum
6 RRU in a cell. Similarly, if there are 2 frequencies in one RRU, then one 1.25G CPRI can
support independent demodulation of maximum 2 RRU in a cell and a 2.5G CPRI can support
independent demodulation of maximum 4 RRU in a cell.
This feature is suitable for coverage in special locations with high speed motion such as
highways, railroad tracks, or formula 1 tracks.
When using this feature, 4-Antenna Receive Diversity, TX diversity, MIMO, FDE, UL
CELL_FACH enhancement, extended cell, load measurement (based on the report of actual
service load), Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration, or Dynamic Configuration of
HSDPA CQI Feedback Period cannot be supported.

Enhancement

RAN14.0
In RAN14.0, an RRU can be configured with one or two receive (RX) antennas when
multiple RRUs are configured for one cell. That is, RRUs configured with a single RX
antenna can work with RRUs configured with two RX antennas in one cell. This
enhanced feature also applies to indoor and tunnel coverage scenarios where RRUs are
configured with single RX antennas. In comparison with the existing scheme of multiple
RRUs in one cell with digital combination and division, this enhanced feature in
RAN14.0 prevents RoT and mutual interference caused by a mixture of RX signals
received by multiple antennas. This enhanced feature improves the cell uplink coverage
and throughput.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
Only the DBS3900 configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board supports
this feature.
The BTS3902E and BTS3803E do not support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service and
High-Speed Train Feature Introduction Service
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

3.1.8 WRFD-150237 Horizon Beam-Width Adjustment


Model
QWTSHOZBWA00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
This feature enables horizontal beamwidth adjustment for an active antenna system that
supports horizontal beamforming.

Benefits
Horizontal beamwidth adjustment optimizes network coverage and improves network
performance. In addition, this feature allows operators to remotely adjust the horizontal
beamwidth, improving maintenance efficiency and reducing the operating expense (OPEX).

Description
When multiple arrays of antenna elements are placed horizontally and driven by several
transceivers (TRXs), the NodeB supports horizontal beamforming. For a site with this
configuration, operators can use this feature to adjust the horizontal beamwidth by changing
the weight values for different antenna arrays on the horizontal plane.
A narrow beam provides high antenna gains and is suitable for in-depth network coverage,
and a wide beam improves network coverage and service offloading.
The following figure illustrates horizontal beamwidth adjustment. The black ellipse indicates
the beam direction of a wide beam, and the red ellipse indicates the beam direction of a
narrow beam.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

A constraint exists between the azimuth and width of a horizontal beam.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
Only the BTS3803E supports this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.1.9 WRFD-150238 Azimuth Adjustment


Model
QWTSAZMAJT00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
This feature enables horizontal azimuth adjustment for an active antenna system that supports
horizontal beamforming.

Benefits
Horizontal beam azimuth adjustment optimizes network coverage, improves network
performance, and enhances NodeB deployment flexibility. In addition, this feature allows
operators to remotely adjust the horizontal beam azimuth, improving maintenance efficiency
and reducing the OPEX.

Description
When multiple arrays of antenna elements are placed horizontally and driven by several
TRXs, the NodeB supports horizontal beamforming. For a site with this configuration,
operators can use this feature to remotely adjust the horizontal beam azimuth by changing the
weight values for different antenna arrays on the horizontal plane.
This feature supports remote adjustment on the horizontal beam azimuth.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

A micro NodeB may not be installed in the best position for reasons such as:

Easy access to power supply or transmission resources

Unnoticeable deployment in scenarios like a residential area

If a micro NodeB is installed in an inappropriate position, operators can adjust the horizontal
beam azimuth to make the antenna beam cover the target area effectively. Deployment
flexibility for micro NodeBs is further improved.
The following figure illustrates horizontal azimuth adjustment. The dashed black line
indicates the normal line of the beam before azimuth adjustment, and the red lines indicate the
variation range of the normal line after azimuth adjustment.

A constraint exists between the azimuth and width of a horizontal beam.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
Only the BTS3803E supports this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Features
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

WRFD-150237 Horizon Beam-Width Adjustment

3.2 Uplink Capacity Improvement


3.2.1 WRFD-140216 Load-based Uplink Target BLER
Configuration
Model
QW1S00BLER00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
This feature dynamically configures the target BLER on uplink R99 channels based on the
uplink load.

Benefits
This feature increases the total uplink capacity by slightly decreasing the throughput on a
single link when the uplink load is heavy.

Description
In the WCDMA system, a high signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) increases the possibility of data
blocks being correctly received. However, a high SNR requires high transmit power, which
results in increased interference to the system. Currently, most UEs only support R99
channels on the uplink. This feature considers the uplink load as the criterion for dynamically
configuring the target BLERs on R99 channels. When the uplink load is light, this feature
configures a small target BLER for each R99 channel to improve data transmission quality.
When the uplink load is heavy, this feature configures a large target BLER for each R99 link
to reduce link load and increase system capacity. This, however, slightly compromises the
system capacity.
In the WCDMA system, the BLER on a channel is controlled by the receiver by means of
outer loop power control. The RNC can quickly adjust the target BLERs of R99 channels on
the uplink. Therefore, this feature is used only if uplink services are set up on dedicated
physical channels.
Emulation results show that the actual uplink load decreases by at most about 15% when there
are 30 online HSDPA UEs (or R99 UEs) and the target BLER is adjusted.
This feature is not supported when WRFD-021350 Independent Demodulation of Signals
from Multiple RRUs in One Cell is enabled.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
This features requires the NodeB to report the value of the uplink actual service load.
The reported value has the following requirements for the NodeB configuration:
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE do not support this feature.
The DBS3800 does not support this feature.
If the 3900 series base station is configured with the WBBPa board or the RRU3801C
20 W, this feature is not supported. In other configurations, this feature is supported.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.2.2 WRFD-140217 Inter-Frequency Load Balancing


Based on Configurable Load Threshold
Model
QW1SIFLBCLT0

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
This feature balances inter-frequency load by triggering measurement-based inter-frequency
handovers. With this feature, the RNC compares measurement results of uplink and downlink
power resources, code resources, and channel element (CE) resources in a cell with load
thresholds for the corresponding service. Based on the comparison result, the RNC selects the
UEs and target cell for an inter-frequency handover.
This feature supports load balancing between cells on the following:

Intra-band frequencies

Inter-band frequencies

Inter-RNC frequencies

Inter-vendor frequencies

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Frequencies between the macro network and the micro network

Benefits
This feature achieves load balancing in a diverse range of inter-frequency scenarios by
flexibly setting load thresholds. For example, this feature sets different load thresholds to
accommodate load balancing requirements in the following typical scenarios:

Overlay network: Different load thresholds are set for circuit switched (CS) services and
packet switched (PS) services to achieve load balancing between inter-frequency cells
under different RNCs.

Macro and micro combined network: Different load thresholds are set for the macro
network and micro network so that traffic preferentially flows in the micro network.

Description
Different from load reshuffling (LDR) for UEs in connected mode, this feature balances loads
between inter-frequency cells under different RNCs by using configurable load thresholds.
If the power resources, code resources, or CE resources reach the preset threshold, the RNC
selects a specified number of UEs for measurement and hands over the UEs that meet
handover conditions to an inter-frequency cell.
This feature supports multiband load balancing between inter-frequency cells under the same
RNC or different RNCs, and between macro and micro networks.
This feature provides separate cell-level switches and load thresholds for power resources,
code resources, or CE resources in the uplink and downlink. The switches determine whether
the measurement of related resources is considered during load balancing. In addition, this
feature provides configurable thresholds for triggering and stopping load balancing of CS and
PS services.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
In the inter-band scenario, WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band Networking
Management is required.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Multicarrier Service

3.2.3 WRFD-010686 CPC - DTX / DRX


Model
QW1SDTXDRX00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R7.

Summary
This feature is related to uplink DTX and downlink DRX. This feature can reduce the
interference between UEs and improve the HSPA+ user capacity per cell.

Benefits
This feature improves the always online experience of end users, increase the system capacity,
and save the battery consumption of the UE.

Description
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)/Discontinuous Reception (DRX) are the key features of
the CPC, which consists of DTX in the uplink and DRX in the downlink.
Uplink DTX means that the UE automatically makes discontinuous transmission on the
DPCCH according to a certain pattern when there is no transmission on the EDCH and the
HS-DPCCH in the uplink. The UL DPCCH DTX pattern is configured by SRNC to on one
hand minimize the transmission on DPCCH and on the other hand maintain the physical
uplink synchronization between NodeB and UE by periodically sending. Uplink DTX reduces
the noise raised by the DPCCH in the uplink and also reduces the redundant signal on the
DPCCH.
Downlink DRX is implemented on the basis of Uplink DTX. Downlink DRX means that the
UE receives data on the HS-SCCH according to the transport pattern that RNC configures,
and the UE need not detect the HS-SCCH in the period when no data would be sent according
to the pattern.
In the scenario that multi-users continue to download with full of data in downlink, this
feature can reduce uplink load by 30% to 40% as well as help to save UE's battery in different
level.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

RNC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

NodeB
For the BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE, the EBBI, EBOIEULP/EULPd
(supporting uplink DTX), and EDLP (supporting downlink DRX) should be configured.
For the BBU3806, the EBBC/EBBCd should be configured.
For the BBU3900, the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf should be configured.

UE
The UE must be Release-7 (or later)to support this feature.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA

3.2.4 WRFD-010687 CPC - HS-SCCH less operation


Model
QW1SHSSCCH00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R7.

Summary
This feature is related to HS-SCCH less operation. This feature can increase the capacity of
downlink data services.

Benefits
This feature can increase the capacity of downlink data services.

Description
The HS-SCCH Less HS-DSCH Transmission (HS-SCCH Less Operation for short)
mechanism means that the HS-DSCH need not be accompanied by the HS-SCCH when
sending the predefined small transport blocks, and the HARQ retransmission for the first HSDSCH transmission requires the company of the HS-SCCH. This is one of the key features of
the CPC.
HS-SCCH Less HS-DSCH Transmission only applies to the UE in CELL_DCH state when
the F-DPCH is configured but the DCH is not configured in the UL and DL directions
(actually the uplink is more concerned). This mechanism can be initiated without DTX/DRX,
that is, HS-SCCH Less HS-DSCH Transmission and DTX/DRX are independent of each
other.
In addition, HS-SCCH Less Operation has the following features:
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Supports the QPSK modulation only.

Supports only four predefined transport formats (MAC-hs PDU).

Provides four semi-static transport formats for UEs.

HS-PDSCH CRC is 24 bit and UE-specific (HS-PDSCH CRC is the same as HS-SCCH
CRC; therefore, HS-PDSCH CRC contains a 16-bit H-RNTI).

Allocates up to two predefined HS-PDSCH codes to each UE:

1.

The predefined HS-PDSCH codes are allocated to the UE in semi-static state.

2.

The UE can receive HS-SCCH Less HS-DSCH Transmission at any time on one or two
codes, and can perform blind detection in four formats.

3.

The UE must keep cyclic buffer for 13 continuous TTIs for blind detection of the HSPDSCH codes.

The UE does not send the NACK for the first transmission but it sends the ACK/NACK
for retransmission.

Limitations of HARQ:
1.

Two retransmissions

2.

Predefined redundancy version (not configurable)

HARQ retransmission of HS-SCCH Less HS-DSCH Transmission should accompany


the HS-SCCH by using the same channel codes and encoding modes between Release 5
and Release 6. Some bits, however, may change their meanings and inform the UE of the
following information:

1.

The HS-SCCH is used for HS-SCCH Less Operation.

2.

The retransmission is the first or the second one.

3.

The channel codes and TB size used by HARQ.

4.

HARQ combined information, which uses the offset of current TTI to indicate the
position where the information has been sent.

The UE keeps attempting to receive data from the HS-SCCH in a traditional sense.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must be Release-7 (or later)to support this feature.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

3.2.5 WRFD-010702 Enhanced DRX


Model
QW1SENHDRX00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
The enhanced discontinuous reception (DRX) feature enables UEs in the enhanced
CELL_FACH state to receive the high-speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH)
discontinuously. This feature helps UEs that process a small amount of services to save
power, by changing the state of such UEs to the enhanced CELL_FACH state.

Benefits
In the enhanced CELL_FACH state, a UE that discontinuously receives the HS-DSCH
consumes less power than a UE that continuously detects the HS-SCCH and continuously
receives the HS-DSCH.

Description
Continuous connectivity (CPC) for packet data users is introduced in 3GPP Release 7. CPC
incorporates the DRX technique that helps HSPA UEs in the CELL_DCH state save power.
Enhanced DRX is introduced in 3GPP Release 8 to further save UE power when the UE is in
enhanced CELL_FACH state. After this feature is enabled, the RAN and UEs in the enhanced
CELL_FACH state transmit and receive data at a specified time. The UE detects the HSSCCH at regular intervals instead of detecting the HS-SCCH continuously. When there is no
data to transmit, the UE shuts down the receiver. As a result, the power consumption of the
UE decreases.
If enhanced DRX is enabled and the RAN has data to transmit to the UE, the data is
transmitted only at user-specified times, which leads to a slight increase in transmission delay.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE need to be configured with the EULPd,
EBBI, EBOI, or EULP board.
The BBU3806 needs to be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board.
The BBU3900 needs to be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

UE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

The UE must be Release-8 (or later) UE and support Enhanced DRX.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010688 Enhanced CELL_FACH

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Multicarrier Service

3.2.6 WRFD-010701 Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH


Model
QW1SENUFCF00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature enables the random access channel (RACH) to be mapped onto the E-DCH
Dedicated Physical Data Control Channel (E-DPDCH). With this feature, UEs in the
CELL_FACH state can transmit uplink data at higher rates.

Benefits
This feature improves the "always-on" experience by providing high-speed uplink data
transmission for UEs in the CELL_FACH state and shortening the UE state transition and
service setup delay.
Compared with the traditional CELL_FACH state, the service setup delay for a UE to transit
from idle mode to the CELL_DCH state and the UE state transition delay from CELL_FACH
to CELL_DCH can be shortened by more than 50%.

Description
Enhanced uplink for the CELL_FACH state is introduced in 3GPP Release 8.
This feature enables UEs in idle mode or the CELL_FACH state to use the E-DPDCH for data
transmission at higher rates. Higher rates are achieved because the RACH is mapped onto the
E-DPCH instead of the physical random access channel (PRACH). In contrast to the PRACH,
which provides 20 ms TTI and 8 kbit/s, the E-DPCH provides 2 ms or 10 ms TTI. This feature
can increase the maximum transmission rate, theoretically, to 5.76 Mbit/s.
In addition, this feature uses the E-AI (Extended AI) to support more signature sequences. As
a result, the probability that UEs compete for uplink transmission resources is lower, and user
experience is improved.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement

RAN15.0
The feature enhancement in RAN15.0 allows UEs in the CELL_FACH state to send
feedback on the High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH) to NodeBs during
simultaneous uplink and downlink data transmission. The UEs send ACK/CK responses
and channel quality indicator (CQI) information to the NodeBs over the High Speed
Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH). This improves the downlink average
throughput for the WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH feature. (The
FACH is mapped onto the HS-DSCH.)
Before this feature is enhanced, data is retransmitted to the NodeBs on the HS-DSCH
regardless of whether the data is received. UEs only report the "Measured results on
RACH" in the uplink. This is insufficient for evaluating downlink HS-DSCH
transmission quality. After this feature is enhanced, UEs promptly report downlink
channel transmission changes to NodeBs. This greatly improves data transmission
efficiency in favorable channel environments.
According to 3GPP protocols, the feature enhancement enables UEs in the CELL_FACH
state to transmit data at a peak rate of 1.8 Mbit/s in the downlink.
The feature enhancement improves the downlink average throughput by 60% to 360%
for a cell with UEs in the CELL_FACH state if the following conditions are met:

The power is sufficient.

The data source is sufficient.

The channel environment is favorable, that is, the reported CQI is greater than 13.

The percentage of the period during which data is transmitted in the uplink and
downlink simultaneously is 50% to 80% for UEs in the CELL_FACH state.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd,
EBBI, EBOI or EULP board. The downlink services must be set up on the EBBI, EBOI,
or EULP board. The E-AI is not supported.
The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The downlink
services must be set up on the EBBC or EBBCd board. To support the E-AI, the
DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board.
The 3900 series base station must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf
board. The downlink services must be set up on the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board.
To support the E-AI, the 3900 series base station must be configured with the WBBPd or
WBBPf board.

UE
The UE must be Release-8 (or later) UE and support uplink for CELL_FACH
enhancement state.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Features
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 Improvement


WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS SmartPhone Solution Service

3.2.7 WRFD-140211 Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment


Model
QW1SDTROTA00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
In a cell where the uplink coverage is not limited, this feature adaptively adjusts the target
Rise over Thermal (RoT) to increase uplink cell throughput.

Benefits
With this feature, the RNC can dynamically adjust the target RoT based on cell coverage to
achieve a balance between coverage and capacity. In scenarios where the uplink coverage is
not limited, such as densely populated urban areas, the uplink throughput can be increased by
up to 20% with this feature.

Description
In the uplink cell load control algorithm, RoT is an important parameter that reflects the cell
uplink load level. A large target RoT leads to a heavy uplink cell load but a small cell
coverage area. In a live network, the cell coverage performance varies greatly by radio
environment, such as densely populated urban areas and suburbs. Setting the target RoT to a
fixed value cannot account for varied radio environments.
In a cell with good coverage, for example, in central business districts (CBDs), if the target
RoT is set to a fixed value, the uplink cell load may reach the preset maximum when the UE
transmit power is still sufficient. This leads to limited uplink cell throughput.
This feature enables the RNC to automatically adjust the target RoT to increase the uplink cell
throughput without affecting network performance. The RNC adjusts the target RoT by
changing the value of the information element (IE) Maximum Target Received Total Wide
Band contained in the PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST
message sent to the NodeB.

When the actual RoT for a cell approaches or exceeds the target cell load and the
transmit power resources for UEs in the cell are sufficient, the RNC gradually raises the
target cell load to increase cell throughput.

When the transmit power of a R99 UE in a cell is insufficient or when the transmit
power of an HSUPA UE is insufficient and its throughput is lower than the preset
threshold, the RNC rapidly decreases the target cell load to prevent KPI degradation.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

This feature may incur the following risks:

When the cell coverage is insufficient, this feature increases the cell coverage by
reducing the target RoT. The RNC adjusts the target RoT step by step. Adjusting RoT
may lead to call drops of users in weak coverage areas. Therefore, this feature may
increase the call drop rate.

In scenarios where the RNC increases the target RoT, the uplink cell coverage shrinks.
This causes UEs in idle mode unable in weak coverage areas to access the network,
affecting user experience.

It is recommended that this feature be used together with Huawei professional services to
avoid these risks.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI,
EBOI, EULP+EDLP, or EULPd+EDLP boards. Downlink services must be established
on the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board.
The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board, and downlink
services must be established on the EBBC or EBBCd board.
The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or
WBBPf board. Downlink services must be established on the WBBPb, WBBPd, or
WBBPf board.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.2.8 WRFD-010690 TTI Switch for BE Services Based


on Coverage
Model
QW1STTIBEP00
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available since RAN12.0.

Summary
With this feature, the transmit power and the actual throughput of the HSUPA-based BE
services are monitored. When the transmit power is insufficient, the Transmission Time
Interval (TTI) is switched from 2 ms to 10 ms to reduce the requirements on transmit power.
This ensures continuous network coverage.

Benefits
Generally, the TTI of the HSUPA-based BE services that require high transmission rate is set
to 2 ms to ensure a high transmission rate in areas with good coverage; however, call drops
are likely to occur at the edge of the cell. With this feature, the call drop rate of these services
is greatly reduced in the areas with weak coverage.

Description
When the TTI is set to 2ms, the peak rate supported by a UE is higher than that when the TTI
is set to 10 ms. Therefore, the TTI of the HSUPA-based BE services that require high
transmission rate is generally set to 2 ms.
When the UE is in an area with weak coverage, the transmit power of the HSUPA-based BE
service with a 2 ms TTI is likely to be insufficient. This will increase the call drop rate. The
reason for this is analyzed as follows: Data is sent in the RLC PDU form. If the size of one
RLC PDU is 336 bits, for example, then the minimum transmission rates in the case of 10 ms
and 2 ms TTIs are 32 kbit/s and 168 kbit/s respectively. Obviously, the minimum transmission
rate in the case of a 2 ms TTI is greater than that in the case of a 10 ms TTI. Accordingly, the
minimum transmit power required in the case of a 2 ms TTI is greater than that in the case of
a 10 ms TTI. As a result, when the TTI is set to 2 ms, call drop is likely to occur due to
insufficient transmit power in the area with weak coverage. In this case, the TTI should be
switched to 10 ms to reduce the required transmission power, ensuring the network coverage.
After this feature is enabled, the RNC monitors the uplink transmit power and the
transmission rate of the HSUPA-based BE services with 2 ms TTI. When the uplink transmitpower is insufficient, the RNC switches the TTI to 10 ms to reduce the required transmit
power, avoiding call drops.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Network Units


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

UE should support HSUPA 2ms TTI

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.2.9 WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE


Model
QWMS000FDE00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
HSUPA frequency domain equalization (HSUPA FDE) is performed to equalize the spectrum
in the frequency domain on the HSUPA E-DPDCH through the UL receiver of the NodeB to
suppress the inter-path interference on the E-DPDCH. Therefore, the SNR on the E-DPDCH
and the UL capacity of the HSUPA network are increased. The rate of HSUPA services
initiated by UEs of categories 6 and 7 is also increased in the multi-path environment.

Benefits
This feature can suppress UL inter-path interference on HSUPA users and help HSUPA users
get higher peak rate. In the case of multi-path, the higher the rate is, the larger the inter-path
interference and the harder the rate increasing. HSUPA FDE can suppress the inter-path
interference and help the real HSUPA peak rate closer to the theoretic value. HSUPA FDE can
increase the real peak rate up to 20%.

Description
HSUPA is an important feature as defined in 3GPP Release 6 to provide UL high-rate
services. Six categories of UEs that support services at several rates are defined in the 3GPP
specifications. UE category 7, which supports the 16QAM mode and a UL peak rate of up to
11.5 Mbit/s in theory, is introduced in 3GPP Release 7.
Multi-path effect is a major feature of the UMTS. The traditional RAKE receiver combines all
searched paths through multi-path effect to obtain multi-path combination gain. It also
increases the system throughput by improving the SNR of UL services.
The inter-path interference, however, is lower than the gain caused by multi-path combination
because the inter-path interference is insignificant when the UE moves at a low speed.
Therefore, the traditional RAKE receiver can be used to obtain the gain. In contrast, when the
UE moves at a high speed, the inter-path interference is significant, and inter-path interference
increases with the UL service rate. In a specified channel environment, the peak rate of a user
is limited by the inter-path interference and cannot be increased.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

HSUPA FDE is performed to equalize the spectrum in the frequency domain on the HSUPA
E-DPDCH through the UL receiver of the NodeB. After the FDE, the inter-path interference
on the E-DPDCH is suppressed, and the SNR on the E-DPDCH is increased.
When supporting FDE feature, the NodeB cannot support 4 Rx diversity feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E /BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board.
The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board.
The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.2.10 WRFD-010712 Adaptive Configuration of


Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA
Model
QW1SACTCPU00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature is applicable to the HSUPA Best Effort (BE) service. When an HSUPA UE is in
the small retransmission state, this feature dynamically configures an optimal power offset for
the data channel based on the changes in uplink load and throughput. This feature helps
maintain the power of such UE on the uplink DPCCH at an optimal level, thereby increasing
the capacity of an HSUPA cell with multiple HSUPA UEs.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature significantly improves the capacity of HSUPA cells in a live network, where the
feature WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission is unavailable or UEs cannot enter the
large retransmission state due to CE limitation.
This feature significantly increases the HSUPA capacity of cells where a large number of
HSUPA UEs are processing low-speed uplink services. When there are a large number of UEs
processing data services in hot spots in busy hours, this feature improves the HSUPA capacity
of the cell by 5% to 20%, without increasing the cell load. This capacity improvement is
indicated by the increase in average cell throughput, in the number of UEs that can
simultaneously perform data transmission in the uplink, or in the decrease in Received Total
Wideband Power (RTWP).

Description
The offset of E-DPDCH power relative to DPCCH power is one of the major factors that
determine DPCCH power in the uplink. For an HSUPA UE in the small retransmission state,
if the data rate is low, a high offset can be configured for the E-DPDCH. This decreases the
power on the DPCCH and reduces the load on the uplink control channel. After the load is
reduced, UEs can transmit more data in the uplink, thereby increasing the capacity of HSUPA
cells. If the data rate is high, a low offset can be configured for the E-DPDCH. This increases
the power on the DPCCH, thereby meeting the power requirements of multipath searching
and channel estimation and ensuring the performance of HSUPA services.
When the feature WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission is enabled, the offset of the
E-DPDCH power relative to the DPCCH power is not adjusted. In such a case, the gain of the
HSUPA Adaptive Transmission feature is not affected. Because the feature WRFD-010641
HSUPA Adaptive Transmission enables HSUPA UEs to adjust to the large retransmission
state, the capacity of the cell will be greatly increased, but with more CE consumption.
This feature is independent from the feature WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission,
but these two features can be enabled together. Using these features together further increases
the uplink capacity of the cell.

Enhancement

RAN15.0
Before RAN15.0, this feature is only applicable to the HSUPA 10 ms BE service. In
RAN15.0, this feature is applicable to both HSUPA 10 ms BE service and HSUPA 2 ms
BE service.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.2.11 WRFD-020136 Anti-Interference Scheduling


for HSUPA
Model
QWMS0HUAIS00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
Sites in a commercial network experience strong and random external uplink interference.
This interference significantly reduces the HSUPA throughput in cells of the site and
negatively affects user experience.
This feature counteracts this interference, thereby ensuring high HSUPA throughput and
improving user experience.

Benefits
This feature ensures high HSUPA throughput in the cells of sites that experience strong uplink
interference from external sources. Under optimal conditions, applying this feature can raise
the HSUPA throughput in a cell with strong external interference to the level of a cell with no
interference.

Description
When a site in a commercial network experiences strong uplink interference from external
sources, the Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP) of cells of the site will increase
significantly. Before the introduction of this feature, the HSUPA scheduling algorithm
performs scheduling based on only the RTWP of the cell. As the interference reduces the load
margin available for use, the HSUPA throughput in cells of the site drops significantly.
With this feature, scheduling is performed on HSUPA UEs based on not only the RTWP of the
cell but also the traffic volume of the R99 and HSUPA UEs in the cell with strong uplink
interference. As long as the traffic volume is lower than the predefined threshold, sufficient
resources can be ensured for the R99 and HSUPA UEs even if the RTWP of the cell increases
to a very high value. This ensures high HSUPA throughput for the cell. The actual throughput
improvement due to this feature depends on the strength of the interference and parameter
configuration.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE should be configured with the HBBI,EBBI,HULP,
EBOI, EULP or EULPd boardthe downlink services can only be set up on EBBI,
EBOI, EDLP.
For BBU3806, the downlink services can only be set up on EBBC or EBBCd board;
The BBU3900 should be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.2.12 WRFD-020137 Dual-Threshold Scheduling with


HSUPA Interference Cancellation
Model
QWMSDTSHIC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature is applicable to cells enabled with the WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference
Cancellation feature. With this feature, scheduling is based on the RTWP thresholds before
and after HSUPA UL interference cancellation. This feature also raises the RTWP target value
before interference cancellation. This can increase the HSUPA throughput of the cell.

Benefits
This feature further increases the HSUPA throughput of cells enabled with the HSUPA UL
Interference Cancellation feature by around 5%-15%.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Description
In a cell enabled with the HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation feature, the RTWP after the
interference cancellation is always lower than that before the interference cancellation.
This feature dynamically raises the RTWP target value of the cell before interference
cancellation while keeping the RTWP after interference cancellation lower than or equal to
the RTWP target value of the cell with the feature not enabled. In this manner, the HSUPA
throughput of the cell can be increased without compromising coverage or network KPIs such
as call completion rate and call drop rate.
To minimize the impact on neighboring cells, this feature adopts a predefined upper threshold
for the increased RTWP target value before interference cancellation is performed.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E /AE must be configured with EULPd baord, and all users of the cell
should be estabilished in one EULPd board.
The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board.
The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board in
the UL resource pool which support IC feature, and slot 2 or 3 needs to be configured
with at least one WBBPd or WBBPf board.
The RRU3801C 20W and the MTFU for the BTS3812E and BTS3812AE do not
support this feature. The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE configured with the 8U WRFU
support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference
Cancellation

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

3.2.13 WRFD-010210 Control Channel Parallel


Interference Cancellation (CCPIC)
Model
QWMS0CCPIC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
The self interference in the WCDMA system greatly affects its capacity and coverage. This
feature can effectively reduce UL interference and improve network performance.

Benefits
It can improve capacity so that the CAPEX is reduced.

Description
The control channels are always on and they are a substantial source of interference especially
with lower data rate and lower activity services.
CCPIC is a simplified and practical application of MUD technology for base station receivers.
It cancels the uplink control channel signal, decreases uplink interference to improve the
performance.
The DPCCH demodulation is performed first. According to all valid paths' time delay and
fading information of received users, the received DPCCH signal can be reconstructed. All
users' data channels such as DPDCH, E-DPCCH, and E-DPDCH can be demodulated after
the received DPCCH signal is subtracted from baseband signal.
In the case of the urban macro cell, TU3 channel, and AMR12.2k user with a 50% load, the
CCPIC will bring 11% capacity improvement; with a 75% load, the capacity improvement is
18%.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The CCPIC depends on the EBBC board or EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EBBCd,EULPd.
The BBU3900 need to configure WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Network Units


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.2.14 WRFD-140202 Control Channel Parallel


Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)
Model
QWMSCCPIC201

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
This feature improves the efficiency of Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation
(CCPIC) by using the advanced regeneration cancellation algorithm. In addition, the benefits
of CCPIC are shared across baseband boards.

Benefits
This feature significantly increases the uplink system capacity. When the DPCCH uses a large
proportion of received total wideband power (RTWP) in a cell, this feature increases system
capacity by up to 20%. This gain is possible when the uplink throughput is not high but there
are a large number of UEs in the cell.

Description
This feature introduces the advanced regeneration cancellation algorithm, which makes
DPCCH regeneration more accurate and improves CCPIC efficiency as a result.
In addition, this feature allows the benefits of CCPIC to be shared across baseband boards.
When multiple baseband boards form a resource pool, CCPIC gain for UEs carried on one
board benefits UEs carried on other boards. Similarly, UEs carried on one board benefit from
the CCPIC gain of UEs carried on another board.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NodeB
Only the 3900 series base stations (except the BTS3902E) and BTS3803E support this
feature and the 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf
board.
To support inter-board IC, the WBBPd or WBBPf board must be configured for the
uplink resource group that supports inter-board IC. In addition, at least one WBBPd or
WBBPf board must be configured in slot 2 or 3.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010210 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (CCPIC)

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.2.15 WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference


Cancellation
Model
QWMS000UIC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
HSUPA UL interference cancellation (IC) is performed to offset the interference caused by the
UL high rate E-DPDCH data of other users, improving the demodulation signal-to-noise ratio
(SNR) and increasing the UL capacity of the UMTS system.

Benefits
The IC technology significantly decreases the UL interference and improves the UL capacity
of the cell. In some scenarios, the gain of the IC technology is significant. For example, if in a
cell there are a small number of HSUPA users with high throughput and a large number of
HSUPA users with low throughput at the same time, IC technology allows canceling the high
interference generated by high rate HSUPA users. If IC technology is not available, the cell
might suffer from reduced capacity of low rate users, such as VoIP users, or/and decreased
rate of high rate services.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Description
HSUPA is an important feature as defined in 3GPP Release 6 to provide UL high-rate
services. Six categories of UEs that support services at several rates are defined in the 3GPP
specifications. The maximum number of E-DCH codes varies depending on the UE's
category. That is, UEs support different peak rates, even up to 5.74 Mbit/s. UE category 7,
which supports the 16QAM mode and a UL peak rate of up to 11.5 Mbit/s in theory, is
introduced in 3GPP Release 7.
Based on the wideband code division multiple access technology, the UMTS is a selfinterfering system. With the increase of the HSUPA rate, the UL interference becomes more
and more heavy. The UL interference is a major factor affecting the UL capacity of the
UMTS.
The IC technology supports different types of HSUPA users, including UEs of categories 1 to
7. The principle of the IC technology is as follows: The UMTS is a self-interfering system.
The interference to a user comes mainly from signals of other users and from the background
noise in the cell. Without the IC technology, signal demodulation is performed in high
interference. Therefore, the capacity of the cell is highly reduced. With the IC technology, the
signals over E-DPDCH from IC-enabled users are analyzed and reconstructed. Then, the
interference from the reconstructed signals is subtracted from the total interference. As a
result, the total interference of the cell is reduced and the system capacity increases.
The IC feature of Huawei NodeB has the following benefits:
IC can be performed to the HSUPA services at 2 ms TTI and 10 ms TTI simultaneously.
The IC feature does not consume extra CE resources.
The IC gain can be shared by all the UEs in a cell, including the IC-enabled UEs and ICdisabled UEs.
During HSUPA scheduling, the actual load of the cell and the load of the cell after
interference cancellation can be managed at the same time. While the stable operation of the
system is ensured, the system capacity can be maximized.
In addition, Huawei NodeB sets up an IC resource pool, which enables IC result to be shared
between boards. The IC resource pool has the following functions:
IC result is shared between IC-capable boards. That is, when multiple IC-capable boards exist
in a NodeB, these boards can share the signals after interference cancellation. Therefore, each
UE finally is demodulated from the signals whose interferences of E-DPDCHs from other
users are cancelled, maximizing the system capacity.
IC result can be shared by IC-incapable boards. That is, when the IC-capable boards and ICincapable boards coexist in a NodeB, the IC-capable boards transmit signals after interference
cancellation to the IC-incapable boards. Therefore, UEs carried by IC-incapable boards are
also demodulated from signals whose interference is reduced rather than original signals. In
this way, the demodulation performance of IC-incapable boards is improved and the IC gain
maximized.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

RNC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E or BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board, the
downlink service cannot be estabilished on HBBI/HDLP/NDLP,and the IC effect cannot
be shared between BB boards.
The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board and the IC effect can be
shared between the BB boards.
The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board,
and only if slot 2 or 3 is configured with at least one WBBPd or WBBPf board, IC effect
can be shared between the BB boards.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.2.16 WRFD-010640 Uplink Macro Diversity


Intelligent Receiving
Model
QW1S0UMDIR00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Summary
Based on the resource occupation, this feature enables the dynamic selection of different
macro diversity combination modes for high-speed non-real-time services (UL) and lowspeed real-time services (SRB and VoIP). This feature can save Iub/Iur transmission resources
and CE resources, affect the pre-emption policy, and improve the investment return.

Benefits
This feature can greatly save CE resources and transmission resources, improve the resource
utilization, enhance the network performance, and reduce the TCO.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Description
The WCDMA system supports soft handover to control the power of the UE in the overlapped
handover area and provides the MDC gain. The uplink receiving and processing resources and
transmission resources, however, are consumed. With the introduction of HSPA+ in 3GPP R7,
resources are further consumed. This feature can be used to preempt the resources on nonserving links for serving links to greatly improve the resource utilization and reduce CAPEX
and OPEX.
If some users in the NodeB require a higher rate, and Iub transmission resources or CE
demodulation resources are insufficient, the NodeB can dynamically preempt the Iub
transmission resources or CE demodulation resources occupied by non-serving links and then
allocate them to the serving links requiring a higher rate. This feature can increase the total
effective throughput and improve the utilization of Iub transmission resources or CE
demodulation resources.
To ensure normal uplink signaling transmission and power control, the NodeB dynamically
preempts the CE demodulation resources and Iub transmission resources on only the data
channels instead of those required by the uplink control channels on non-serving links.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-01061212 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion WRFD-010638
Dynamic CE Resource Management

3.2.17 WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission


Model
QW1SUPAARM00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
With comprehensive considerations of cell uplink power load, CE resources, and limited
uplink coverage, this feature enables the adaptive adjustment of the number of target uplink
retransmissions to improve the throughput per user and cell uplink capacity.

Benefits

In a limited uplink coverage scenario, a user's uplink cell edge throughput can be
increased, in order to enhance user experience. According to simulation results, single
user throughput has been show to increase by 15%-60%.

In a scenario where the cell uplink power load is limited, increasing the retransmission
number can improve cell throughput and cell uplink capacity. Simulation results have
shown an increase of 53% in cell throughput under multi-user scenarios.

Description
HARQ retransmission number is used as the target value of HSUPA uplink outer loop power
control. When UE signal quality is good and uplink transmission power is not limited, a small
retransmission can improve single user throughput. However, when capacity is limited and
cell uplink power becomes a bottleneck, increasing retransmission number can improve cell
throughput. Increasing retransmission number can also boost user cell edge throughput, where
UE uplink power is limited. Therefore there's a need to realize the adaptive adjustment of
retransmission number.
This feature is only effective in BE traffic. If a user, only has BE traffic (with the exception of
SRB) on E-DCH, then dynamic adjustment of the target retransmission number is allowed.
Adjusting the users target retransmission number to a relatively smaller value is permitted
when the uplink power of all the cells belonging to the serving RLS is smaller than a certain
threshold and the UE uplink power is not limited and/or uplink CE's are limited. When the
uplink power of any cell belonging to the serving RLS experiences congestion or UE's uplink
power is limited, then setting the users target retransmission number to a relatively larger
value is permitted, as long as the uplink CE resources are sufficient.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
BTS3812E /BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI/EBOI/EULP/EULPd
board
BBU3806 must be configured with EBBC/EBBCd
BBU3900 must be configured with WBBPb,WBBPd or WBBPf.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.2.18 WRFD-140222 Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA


Small Target Retransmissions
Model
QW1SAAHSTR00

Availability
This feature is introduced to RAN14.0 as a trial feature.
This feature is introduced to RAN15.0 as a commercial optional feature.

Summary
This feature dynamically adjusts the target number of retransmissions based on the uplink
throughput of UEs and the uplink load on the serving cell. The purpose is to improve the
uplink throughput of the serving cell.

Benefits
This feature improves the system capacity in cases where multiple HSUPA UEs with a 10 ms
transmission time interval (TTI) are uploading data in a cell with a limited uplink load.

Description
When the uplink load is limited, a small target number of retransmissions will impose high
requirements on the signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) on the Dedicated Physical Control
Channel (DPCCH), and the DPCCH must use higher power. This leads to a decrease in the
power of available data channels, a lower UE throughput, and a lower HSUPA cell
throughput. The Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions feature
supports an alternative small target number of retransmissions for each typical type of service.
The actual target number of retransmissions can dynamically shift between the original fixed
number and the alternative number depending on the throughput of UEs and the uplink load
on the cell. This improves the system capacity when the uplink load is limited.
A cell can be simultaneously configured with the feature Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA
Small Target Retransmissions and the feature DC-HSUPA. However, if DC-HSUPA is
enabled for a UE, Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions will not
work for this UE.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

3.2.19 WRFD-010634 60 HSUPA Users per Cell


Model
QW1SD60UUP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature enables a single HSUPA cell to simultaneously support 60 HSUPA users. If the
number of HSUPA users exceeds 60, the DCH is attempted for service provisioning.

Benefits
Compared with the HSUPA introduction package, more HSUPA users are available in one
cell.

Description
Up to 60 HSUPA users can be admitted to a HSUPA capable cell.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package WRFD-010614 HSUPA phase 2

3.2.20 WRFD-010639 96 HSUPA Users per Cell


Model
QW1S96UPAU00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Summary
This feature enables a single HSUPA cell to simultaneously support 96 HSUPA VoIP or other
low-rate users. This feature can increase the capacity of voice services or other low-rate
services per cell.

Benefits
This feature allows more HSUPA users in one cell and improves the system capacity.

Description
In RAN11.0, a single cell can support up to 96 HSUPA users in VoIP or other low-rate
applications.
If the load resources are limited, you are advised to use this feature together with the WRFD010712 Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA and WRFD010686 CPC - DTX / DRX feature. If the available CE resources are insufficient, you are
advised to use this feature together with the WRFD-140212 CE Overbooking feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd is needed for BTS3812E and BTS3812AE.
EBBC, EBBCd is needed for BBU3806;

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf is needed for BBU3900.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010634 60 HSUPA Users per Cell

3.2.21 WRFD-010670 128 HSUPA Users per Cell


Model
QW1SUPA12800

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
This feature enables a single HSUPA cell to support a maximum of 128 HSUPA users
simultaneously.

Benefits
This feature increases the maximum number of HSUPA users that can be supported in a cell.
This is particularly useful when most calls use low rate services (such as VoIP over HSPA), as
the number of such calls can be quite larger than with high data rate services.

Description
With this feature, a maximum of 128 HSUPA users can be supported in one cell. This can be
especially useful to increase the system capacity for VoIP services or other low-rate services
which can be established simultaneously over HSUPA. This feature improves the CS traffic
capacity of a single cell and provides VoIP services or other low-rate services to more users.
If the load resources are limited, you are advised to use this feature together with the WRFD010712 Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA and WRFD010686 CPC - DTX / DRX feature. If the available CE resources are insufficient, you are
advised to use this feature together with the WRFD-140212 CE Overbooking feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NodeB
The feature is only available for 3900 series NodeB, 3900 series NodeB (except
BTS3902E) requires WBBPd2/WBBPd3 board, which is one type of WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The BTS3803E does not support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010639 96 HSUPA Users per Cell WRFD-010654 128 HSDPA Users per Cell

3.2.22 WRFD-150206 Turbo IC


Model
QWMS0TURIC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
Turbo Interference Cancellation (IC) improves IC efficiency by regenerating decoded signals
from the E-DPDCH. This feature improves the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for demodulation
and increasing system capacity in the uplink.
This feature supports High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) UEs using the 2 ms
transmission time interval (TTI) only.

Benefits
This feature improves IC efficiency and increases system capacity in the uplink.
In addition to the uplink IC gains provided by HSUPA, this feature further increases the
uplink system capacity by a maximum of about 10% in the following scenarios:

A large number of UEs use the 2 ms TTI for continuous data transmission in the serving
cell.

The throughput of HSUPA 2 ms TTI UEs is high.

Description
UMTS, which is based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) technology, is a selfinterfering system. A UMTS UE experiences interference from other UEs' signals and the
serving cell's background noise. In HSUPA, uplink interference increases along with the
growing data rates and is now the main bottleneck for increasing UMTS uplink capacity.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Turbo IC addresses this issue. This feature improves IC performance by regenerating decoded
signals from the E-DPDCH to obtain more accurate signals. That is, this feature reduces the
interference from regenerated signals on the E-DPDCH, decreasing the total interference in
the serving cell and improving uplink system capacity.
This feature:

Supports HUSPA UEs using the 2 ms TTI only

Consumes no additional channel element (CE) resources

Supports uplink IC resource groups:

1.

If all the boards configured in the uplink resource groups support Turbo IC, inter-board
UEs can share centralized IC gains.

2.

If only a few boards configured in the uplink resource groups support Turbo IC, interboard UEs can share only the HSUPA uplink IC gains and intra-board UEs can share
Turbo IC gains only for the boards supporting Turbo IC.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
Only the 3900 series base stations (except the BTS3902E) and BTS3803E support this
feature and the 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPf board. If
the NodeB needs to support inter-board IC sharing, all the baseband boards configured
for an uplink resource group that supports inter-board IC sharing should be WBBPf
boards.

UE
The UEs must be of category 6 or higher.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference
Cancellation

3.2.23 WRFD-150222 HSUPA Time Division


Scheduling
Model
QWMS0UPATD00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
In a cell with multiple HSUPA 2 ms TTI UEs performing high-speed uplink data
transmission, this feature performs time division scheduling on these UEs to reduce
interference between the UEs caused by simultaneous data transmission. This improves the
uplink throughput for this cell.

Benefits
This feature enables a cell to provide a high HSUPA throughput, even when multiple HSUPA
2 ms TTI UEs are simultaneously performing high-speed uplink data transmission in the cell.
Use this feature in indoor single-antenna scenarios because the cell uplink throughput
increases noticeably. For example, in single-antenna scenarios, this feature increases the cell
uplink throughput by 10%-90% when the WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference
Cancellation feature is not activated and all UEs in the cell are time-division scheduled.

Description
WCDMA is a self-interfering system. Any UE in this system is an interference source for
other UEs. The higher the data rate of a UE, the greater the interference this UE imposes on
the uplink channels of the cell. When there are multiple HSUPA 2 ms TTI UEs performing
high-speed uplink data transmission in a cell, the uplink channel interference is the main
bottleneck for the cell uplink capacity.
This feature applies to a cell with multiple high-speed HSUPA 2 ms TTI UEs, and especially a
single-antenna cell where Uu-interface resources are insufficient. This feature allocates the
eight Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) processes of 2 ms TTI HSUPA to different
UEs to perform data transmission. During each 2 ms TTI, only one UE is transmitting data.
This reduces the interference caused by simultaneous data transmission of the UEs and
improves the cell uplink throughput.
The following figure compares code division scheduling and time division scheduling.

The gain provided by this feature depends on the UE traffic model. A static UE performing
stable and high-speed uploading has the highest gain. If all UEs in a cell are time-division
scheduled, this feature provides the highest gain in cell throughput.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Gains from this feature increase with the number of time-division scheduled UEs. There are
few or no gains from this feature when few or no UEs are time-division scheduled. In doubleantenna scenarios, gains from this feature are less considerable than those in single-antenna
scenarios. If the WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation feature is activated,
gains from the HSUPA Time Division Scheduling feature are less considerable.
The gain provided by this feature also depends on whether the transmission time overlaps.
This feature does not apply to UEs performing soft handovers because mobility will cause the
transmission time to overlap. This feature provides higher gains in indoor environments than
in outdoor environments because soft handover is less likely to occur in indoor environments
and more UEs can be scheduled in time division mode.
This feature does not apply to a cell served by multiple RRUs because different RRUs use
independent Uu-interface resources and enabling UEs served by different RRUs to be timedivision scheduled does not reduce interference between UEs.
The HSUPA Time Division Scheduling feature cannot be used together with the 4-way
receive diversity function.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
Only the 3900 series base stations (except the BTS3902E) and BTS3803E support this
feature and the 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPf board. The
downlink of the cell cannot be set up on the WBBPa board.

UE
The UEs must be of HSUPA category 6, 7, 8, or 9.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA

3.2.24 WRFD-160201 Control Channel Parallel


Interference Cancellation (Phase 3)
Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
This feature performs regeneration and cancellation on the E-DCH dedicated physical control
channel (E-DPCCH) and high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH). This
reduces the interference in other channels caused by the two channels, thereby improving the
uplink cell capacity. The greater the number of uplink RRC connections or the higher the load
consumption on the two channels, the more significant the gains of this feature.

Benefits
Compared with the Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2) feature, this
feature further improves the uplink cell capacity (increasing the number of HSPA UEs that
can be simultaneously online or the cell throughput) by 5% to 15% in typical scenarios in
which there is HSUPA data transmission and more than four HSPA connections.

Description
The Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2) feature performs
regeneration and cancellation on the dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH) to reduce
the interference in other channels caused by this channel, thereby improving the UE receive
performance and uplink cell capacity.
Similarly, the Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 3) feature performs
regeneration and cancellation on the HS-DPCCH and E-DPCCH channels, which further
reduces the interference and improves the cell capacity. This feature works as follows:
HS-DPCCH interference cancellation (IC): Regeneration and cancellation are performed on
the channel quality indicator (CQI). The rake receiver combines signals on the HS-DPCCH
and use the log-likelihood ratio (LLR) to generate a CQI soft value. The CQI soft value is
processed through spreading and modulation, channelization, frequency offset, and filtering
for shaping to produce regenerated signals on antenna ports.
E-DPCCH IC: Regeneration is performed on decoded bits. The decoded bits are recoded and
processed through spreading and modulation, channelization, frequency offset, and filtering
for shaping to produce regenerated signals on antenna ports.
The cancellation module subtracts all the regenerated signals on the HS-DPCCH/E-DPCCH
from the received signals. The dedicated physical data channel (DPDCH) or E-DCH
dedicated physical data control channel (E-DPDCH) demodulates and decodes the canceled
baseband data, thereby improving the UE receive performance and uplink cell capacity.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The 3800 series and 3812 series base stations do not support this feature.
The 3900 series base stations (except 3902Es) support this feature and they must be
configured with a UBBPd. To support inter-board CCPIC Phase 3 IC sharing, at least
one UBBPd must be configured in the uplink resource group supporting this function. In
addition, at least one WBBPd, WBBPf, or UBBPd must be configured in slot 2 or slot 3.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

UE
The UEs must support 3GPP R5 or later (supporting HSDPA/HSUPA).

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-140202 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)

3.2.25 WRFD-160202 Flexible Power Control for


Uplink Low Data Rate Transmission
Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
This feature dynamically configures power control parameters for uplink low-rate services to
lower the target signal-to-interference ratios (SIRs) and uplink power load of these services,
thereby increasing the number of HSPA connections or the cell throughput.

Benefits
When the number of HSUPA connections exceeds 20, this feature improves the uplink cell
capacity (increasing the number of UEs in the CELL_DCH state that can be simultaneously
online or the cell throughput) by 5% to 20%.

Description
In networks that have a high smartphone penetration rate, the number of online UEs is large
and the average HSUPA rate is low. As a result, the uplink control channels consume most of
the uplink power load. Therefore, the uplink load consumption on the control channels must
be reduced to improve the uplink capacity. This feature automatically identifies uplink lowrate services and dynamically configures power control parameters (such as data channel
power offset and target number of retransmissions) for these services. This can lower the
target SIRs of these services (The service quality is not reduced), thereby reducing the uplink
load consumption on the control channels for these services and improving the uplink cell
capacity.
This feature applies to two types of combined services: CS+PS and PTT+PS. HSUPA power
control parameters are configured to reduce the uplink power load of the combined services,
thereby improving the HSUPA cell capacity.
A cell can use this feature in addition to the WRFD-140204 DC-HSUPA or WRFD-01061208
HSUPA DCCC feature. However, this feature cannot be used with WRFD-140204 DCHSUPA or WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC for specific UEs in this cell.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB

The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE do not support this feature.

The DBS3800 does not support this feature.

The 3900 series base stations do not support the feature if they are configured with a
WBBPa or a 20 W RRU3801C.

All the other base stations, including the BTS3902E and BTS3803E, support this
feature.

UE
The UEs must support HSUPA.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
This feature is dependent on the following features:

WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

WRFD-010712 Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

This feature and the following features are mutually exclusive:

WRFD-021350 Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One


Cell

WRFD-151208 Macro-Micro multi RRUs in one cell

3.2.26 WRFD-160213 Turbo IC Phase 2


Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
This feature is based on single hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process scheduling. It
enables HSUPA UEs using a 2 ms TTI (hereafter referred to as 2 ms TTI HSUPA UEs) to
perform data transmission alternately, thereby reducing the interference between UEs. This
feature also uses the Turbo IC technique to cancel the interference between UEs who cannot
avoid simultaneous data transmission.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature doubles the maximum number of 2 ms TTI HSUPA UEs supported by a cell. In
addition, because there is no requirement to change the TTI from 2 ms to 10 ms, the amount
of signaling required for reconfigurations is reduced, thereby reducing the probability of call
drops.

Description
This feature is based on single hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process scheduling. It
enables HSUPA UEs using a 2 ms TTI to perform data transmission at intervals of 2 ms,
thereby reducing the interference between UEs. This feature also uses the Turbo IC technique
to cancel the interference between UEs who cannot avoid simultaneous data transmission. The
following figure shows the working principle of this feature.

This feature doubles the maximum number of 2 ms TTI HSUPA UEs supported by a cell. In
addition, because there is no requirement to change the TTI from 2 ms to 10 ms, the amount
of signaling required for reconfigurations is reduced, thereby reducing the probability of call
drops.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
Only the 3900 series base stations (except the BTS3902E) and the BTS3803E support
this feature. In addition, for the 3900 series base stations, downlink services in the cell
cannot be set up on the WBBPa board and the uplink resource group must contain the
WBBPf or UBBP board.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

UE
The UEs must be of HSUPA category 6 or later.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-150206 Turbo IC

3.3 Downlink Capacity Improvement


3.3.1 WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced CELL-FACH
Model
QW1SECFACH00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R7.

Summary
This feature enables the FACH to be carried on the HS-DSCH. Based on this feature, the UE
can receive data at a higher rate in CELL_FACH state.

Benefits
This feature enables the UE to transmit data at a higher rate in CELL_FACH state and shorten
the state transition delay of the UE, thereby enhancing the experience of end users in online
state.

Description
Enhanced CELL-FACH is a new feature introduced in R7.
Based on this feature, the UE can receive data on the HS-DSCH at a higher rate in
CELL_FACH state.
After this feature is introduced, the UE is still in CELL_FACH state. This feature is used for
downlink data transmission of the UE. The data carried on the BCCH, CCCH, DCCH, or
DTCH can be mapped to the HS-DSCH and then transmitted to the UE through the HSDPA
shared channel on the Uu interface. In this case, the UE in CELL_FACH state can share
HSDPA code resources and power resources as the UE in CELL_DCH does, implementing
downlink high-speed data transmission and shortening the state transition delay of the UE.
This feature enhances the traditional CELL-FACH that is used for only low-speed (32 kbit/s)
data transmission. In R7, the UE incapable of enhanced CELL-FACH uses the traditional
CELL-FACH to receive data, and the UE capable of enhanced CELL-FACH uses the
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

enhanced CELL-FACH to receive data if the cell on which the UE camps supports the
enhanced CELL-FACH.
To enable the UE to receive data from the HS-DSCH in CELL_FACH state, UTRAN adds
HS-DSCH receiving parameters in CELL_FACH state to the system broadcast information.
The parameters include HS-SCCH configuration, HS-PDSCH configuration, and common HRNTI identifier.
When the cell is configured with HS-DSCH receiving, the UE preferentially uses the HSDSCH to receive dedicated signaling data carried on the FACH in CELL_FACH state instead
of on the SCCPCH.
The UE in CELL_FACH state keeps monitoring the HS-SCCH. If any data is available, the
UE automatically receives data from the HS-DSCH without state handover from the FACH to
DCH, avoiding the delay caused by the state handover.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
HBBIHDLP on BTS3812E/BTS3812AE do not support this feature, EBBI, EDLP is
needed. BBU3806 does not support this feature, EBBC or EBBCd is needed. 3900
series NodeB: WBBPa does not support this feature, WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf is
needed.

UE
The UE must be Release7(or later) UE and support this feature.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS SmartPhone Solution Service

3.3.2 WRFD-140215 Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA


CQI Feedback Period
Model
QW1SDCQIFP00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
This feature considers the uplink load as the criterion for dynamically adjusting the channel
quality indicator (CQI) feedback period for HSDPA UEs. The goal is to ensure high downlink
rates when only a small number of HSDPA UEs are online and to increase the uplink capacity
when a large number of HSDPA UEs are online.
This feature dynamically configures the CQI feedback period for PS services carried on
HSDPA in CS/PS combined services. This helps ensure satisfactory coverage for CS services
in CS/PS combined services.

Benefits
The benefits of this feature are as follows:

This feature increases HSDPA throughput or uplink capacity based on the uplink load.

This feature improves coverage for CS services in CS/PS combined services.

Description
After a service is set up on an HS-DSCH channel, the UE periodically reports its channel
quality indicator (CQI). The NodeB performs power control and data scheduling based on the
UE location and the radio channel quality. A short CQI feedback period ensures timely
feedback detailing radio channel quality so that the NodeB can dynamically select appropriate
data transmission rates. When there are sufficient resources, this mechanism helps ensure a
high downlink throughput. However, with a short CQI feedback period, HSDPA UEs
frequently send CQI feedback and thereby increases the uplink load. This problem is
especially severe when a large number of HDSPA UEs are online. A long CQI feedback
period may lead to insufficient CQI information acquisition of the NodeB, decreasing the
peak HSDPA throughput. When there are a large number of HSDPA UEs online, HSDPA
users generally cannot obtain sufficient resources to achieve the downlink peak throughput.
Therefore, increasing the CQI feedback period affects HSDPA users slightly in this case.
When only a small number of HSDPA UEs are online, this feature configures a short CQI
feedback period to ensure a high downlink throughput for HSDPA UEs. When a large number
of HSDPA UEs are online causing a heavy load on the uplink, this feature configures a long
CQI feedback period to ease the uplink load and thereby increase the available capacity on
uplink traffic channels.
Increasing the CQI feedback period lowers the transmit power of UEs and thereby improves
coverage. For CS/PS combined services, this feature configures a long CQI feedback period
to improve the coverage of CS services in CS/PS combined services.
Emulation tests were performed based on small-packet transmission. The test results are as
follows: If the CQI feedback period is adjusted from 2 ms to 8 ms and there are 40 online
HSDPA UEs, the actual uplink load decreases by a maximum of 20% during busy hours. If
the CQI feedback period is adjusted from 4 ms to 8 ms, the uplink actual load decreases by a
maximum of 10% during busy hours.
This feature is not supported when WRFD-021350 Independent Demodulation of Signals
from Multiple RRUs in One Cell is enabled.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
To implement dynamic configuration of CQI feedback period based on the uplink load,
the NodeB needs to reports actual service load. The reported value has the following
requirements for the NodeB configuration: The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and
BTS3812AE do

UE
The UE must support HSDPA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.3.3 WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA Users per Cell


Model
QW1S96DPAU00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Summary
This feature enables a single HSDPA cell to simultaneously support 96 HSDPA VoIP or other
low-rate users.

Benefits
This feature enables the system to serve more HSDPA users.

Description
In RAN11.0, a single cell can support up to 96 HSDPA users in VoIP or other low-rate
applications. With this feature, the operator can increase the voice service capacity per cell
and provide services for more VoIP or low-rate users in dense areas.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd is needed for BTS3812E and BTS3812AE. EBBC,
EBBCd is needed for BBU3806; WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf is needed for
BBU3900.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010623 64 HSDPA Users per Cell

3.3.4 WRFD-010654 128 HSDPA Users per Cell


Model
QW1SDPA12800

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
This feature enables a single HSDPA cell to support a maximum of 128 HSDPA users
simultaneously.

Benefits
This feature increases the maximum number of HSDPA users that can be supported in a cell.
This is particularly useful when most calls use low rate services (such as VoIP over HSPA), as
the number of such calls can be quite larger than with high data rate services.

Description
With this feature, a maximum of 128 HSDPA users can be supported in one cell. This can be
especially useful to increase the system capacity for VoIP services or other low-rate services
which can be established simultaneously over HSDPA. This feature improves the CS traffic
capacity of a single cell and provides VoIP services or other low-rate services to more users.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The feature is only available for 3900 series NodeB, 3900 series NodeB (except
BTS3902E) requires WBBPd2/WBBPd3 board, which is one type of WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The BTS3803E does not support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA Users per Cell

3.3.5 WRFD-150235 DPCH Maximum Power


Restriction
Model
QWMSDPCHPR00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature reduces the maximum A-DPCH transmit power of HSDPA UEs in cells with high
downlink non-HSPA power consumption to save A-DPCH power and increase downlink cell
capacity. A-DPCH stands for associated dedicated channel.

Benefits
This feature reduces downlink non-HSPA power consumption by 5% to 15% for cells on
which a large number of HSDPA UEs camp and that have high downlink non-HSPA power
consumption. The reduced power can then allow 5% to 15% more UEs to access the cells.

Description
The A-DPCH mainly transmits signaling messages and power control information. During the
setup of a radio access bearer (RAB) for an HSDPA service, the A-DPCH consumes downlink
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

power even when the A-DPCH is not transmitting data. If a large number of HSDPA UEs
camp on a cell, the A-DPCH will consume much downlink power of the cell.
This feature reduces the maximum A-DPCH transmit power for cells when the A-DPCH is
not transmitting data and the downlink non-HSPA power consumption in these cells is high.
When the A-DPCH starts transmitting data, this feature uses the original maximum A-DPCH
transmit power.
Reducing the maximum A-DPCH transmit power for HSDPA UEs that consume much ADPCH power saves A-DPCH power and increases downlink cell capacity. However, the
reduction may cause downlink radio links of cell-edge HSDPA UEs to be unstable and the call
drop rate of these UEs to increase.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, and BTS3812E must be configured with the EBBI,
EBOI, EULP+EDLP, or EULPd+EDLP board. Downlink services must be established on
the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board.
The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. Downlink
services must be established on the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3806C must be
configured with the EBBM board. Downlink services must be established on the EBBM
board.
The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or
WBBPf board. Downlink services must be established on the WBBPb, WBBPd, or
WBBPf board.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

3.3.6 WRFD-150236 Load Based Dynamic Adjustment


of PCPICH
Model
QW1S0LBDAP00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature decreases the P-CPICH transmit power for cells with high downlink non-HSPA
power consumption to save downlink non-HSPA power and increase downlink cell capacity.

Benefits
This feature reduces downlink non-HSPA power consumption by 10% to 15% for cells on
which a large number of UEs camp and that have high downlink non-HSPA power
consumption. The reduced power can then allow 10% to 15% more UEs to access the cells.

Description
This feature periodically checks the downlink non-HSPA power consumption of a cell. When
the consumption reaches the preset upper limit, this feature reduces the P-CPICH transmit
power incrementally until the consumption falls into the normal range. When the consumption
reaches the preset lower limit, this feature increases the P-CPICH transmit power
incrementally until the consumption falls into the normal range.
When reducing the P-CPICH transmit power for a cell, this feature does not adjust the
maximum DPCH transmit power for UEs that are processing services in the cell. This is to
ensure that these UEs' radio links are stable.
When increasing the P-CPICH transmit power for the cell, this feature does not adjust the
minimum DPCH transmit power for these UEs. This is to ensure that the DPCH power
consumption in the cell will not increase.
Reducing the P-CPICH transmit power causes the cell coverage to shrink and the call drop
rate of cell edge UEs to increase.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

3.3.7 WRFD-160206 RB Parking


Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
This feature allows smartphones to enter the parking state after being rejected access to a
congested network, which prevents a large quantity of repetitive access attempts from
undermining network stability.

Benefits
This feature prevents a large quantity of repetitive PS service setup attempts from degrading
the network performance in heavy-traffic scenarios, such as during holidays and major events.

Description
When a network is congested, smartphones repetitively attempt to access the network after
being rejected. As a result, network congestion increases, which leads to more access
rejections.
After a smartphone is rejected access to the network, this feature allows the smartphone to
enter the parking state, instead of sending a rejection massage to this smartphone, so that a
large quantity of repetitive access attempts to the network is prevented. Parking state is a
special FACH state. In this state, users with high speed demand (typically cache data volume
> 64Byte) are prohibited from sending any data on the user plane (UP), but allowed to attempt
to DCH state every 16 seconds. When attempt to DCH state, if this network is not in
congestion, they can enter DCH state and send data normally; if still in congestion, they are
kept in parking state.
Compared to a breakdown network resulting from a large quantity of repetitive access
attempts, this feature can keep users sending data in order, resulting in better user experience.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.3.8 WRFD-160208 160 HSPA Users per Cell


Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
This feature enables a single cell to simultaneously support a maximum of 160 HSPA users.

Benefits
This feature allows more HSPA users in one cell and provides significant benefits for cells in
which there are a large number of low-rate users; for example, cells in which VoIP services
are carried over HSPA.

Description
In RAN16.0, a single cell can simultaneously support a maximum of 160 HSPA users,
including the VoIP or other low-rate users.
If the load resources are limited, it is recommended that you use this feature together with the
WRFD-010712 Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA and
WRFD-010686 CPC - DTX / DRX features. If the available CE resources are insufficient, it
is recommended that you use this feature together with the WRFD-140212 CE Overbooking
feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
Only the 3900 series base stations (except the BTS3902E) configured with a UBBPd
support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

Other Features

WRFD-010670 128 HSUPA Users per Cell

WRFD-010654 128 HSDPA Users per Cell

WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA

3.3.9 WRFD-160209 192 HSPA Users per Cell


Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
This feature enables a single cell to simultaneously support a maximum of 192 HSPA users.

Benefits
This feature allows more HSPA users in one cell and provides significant benefits for cells in
which there are a large number of low-rate users; for example, cells in which VoIP services
are carried over HSPA.

Description
In RAN16.0, a single cell can simultaneously support a maximum of 192 HSPA users,
including the VoIP or other low-rate users.
If the load resources are limited, it is recommended that you use this feature together with the
WRFD-010712 Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA and
WRFD-010686 CPC - DTX / DRX features. If the available CE resources are insufficient, it
is recommended that you use this feature together with the WRFD-140212 CE Overbooking
feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
Only the 3900 series base stations (except the BTS3902E) configured with a UBBPd
support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-160208 160 HSPA Users per Cell

3.4 Smartphone
3.4.1 WRFD-020500 Enhanced Fast Dormancy
Model
QW1S00FDEP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
This feature is concerned with the impact of Fast Dormancy to the RNC. To reduce the
signaling processing cost in the Fast Dormancy procedure, when receiving SCRI (signaling
connection release indication) message from UE or UE inactivity timer expires, RNC can
transfer UE state to CELL_FACH or through Cell_FACH to CELL/URA_PCH instead of
IDLE mode which is in legacy Fast Dormancy processing.

Benefits
This feature can reduce the signal processing cost of RNC in a network comprised of
intelligent UEs with FAST DORMANCY capable, avoid overflow of signaling processing
unit in RNC caused by Fast Dormancy.

Description
Some intelligent UEs support Fast dormancy function. To save the power, when there is no PS
data transfer, UE can send a SCRI message to require RNC release the RRC connection and
then periodically send heartbeat message to the core network, without implementation of this
feature, RNC will release the RRC connection, then each of the following heartbeat messages
will cause RRC connection setup, authentication, encryption and RAB setup procedures.
Comparing to normal PS call procedure, this Fast dormancy mechanism will greatly increase
the signaling processing cost of RNC and may cause overflow of signaling processing unit in
RNC.
With this feature, when receiving SCRI from UE or UE inactivity timer expires, RNC will
decided to transfer the state of the UE to CELL_FACH or through Cell_FACH to
CELL/URA_PCH instead of IDLE mode. When UE periodically sends heartbeat message,
RNC will reconfigure UE to CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH. The signaling procedure between
UE and RNC will be limited to only a few message exchanges because the RRC connection
keep existing, at least 40% signaling exchange can be reduced and RNC CPU resources can
be saved significantly while UE battery consumption is saved as much as that in IDLE mode.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

When receiving SCRI message, if one of the following condition is met, RNC will look the
UE as FAST DORMANCY capable, initial this feature and transfer UE to CELL_FACH or
through Cell_FACH to CELL/URA_PCH state:
IMEI of the UE belongs to the range of IMEIs defined by operator configuration
RNC can get the IMEI of the UE by sending a "IDENTITY REQUEST" to UE and get UE
response;
Because the producer and model information are included in IMEI, operator can configure the
range of IMEIs with FAST DORMANCY function.
The cause value in SCRI message is "UE Requested PS Data session end."
When UE inactivity timer expires, if IMEI of the UE belongs to the range of IMEIs defined
by operator configuration, the UE will be transferred to CELL_FACH or through Cell_FACH
to CELL/URA_PCH state instead of IDLE state.
Be aware that when SCRI without cause value was sent and smart phone will be transferred to
CELL_FACH or through Cell_FACH to CELL/URA_PCH state which might have the risk of
incompatibility. In this case, we strongly suggest providing the feature together with Huawei
professional services.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS SmartPhone Solution Service

3.4.2 WRFD-140206 Layered Paging in URA_PCH


Model
QW1SLPURAV00
QW1SLPURAP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
Due to the rapid rise of smart phone use in recent years, paging messages have been
increasing. Conventionally, paging messages are sent to the entire UTRAN registration area
(URA). Once Layered Paging in URA_PCH is activated, paging messages are first sent to the
last camped-on cell of the UEs in the URA_PCH state and the neighboring cells of the last
camped-on cell. When necessary, these messages will be sent to the URA. This reduces the
number of paging messages and the possibility of PCH congestion, eliminates the need for
manually dividing URAs, and reduces the number of URA updates.

Benefits
The benefits of this feature are as follows:

Automatic generating of paging areas and therefore reduced costs for manual URA
planning and optimization

Reduce number of URA updates and signaling overhead.

Description
The RNC transits UEs processing PS services to the URA_PCH state instead of the
CELL_PCH state to prolong the time users are online and reduce high signaling overheads
caused by frequent state transitions from the idle mode to another state. However, the RNC
must page a UE in the URA_PCH state in the entire URA because the RNC does not know
which cell the UE camps on. This results in a large number of unnecessary paging messages,
which can in turn lead to PCHs being congested, especially with the continuously increasing
number of smart phones in use.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

With this feature, the RNC first pages the UE in the last cell on which the UE camped and the
neighboring cells. If the RNC still does not receive any response from the UE, the RNC pages
the UE in the URA.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS SmartPhone Solution Service

3.4.3 WRFD-150205 Layered Paging in Idle Mode


Model
QW1S0LPIMV00
QW1S0LPIMP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
With the increasing penetration rate of smartphones, UE paging is triggered more and more
by applications.
Conventionally, the RNC directly pages a UE in idle mode in the entire location area (LA) or
routing area (RA). This results in a large number of unnecessary Uu-interface paging
messages, which increases PCH congestion.
With this feature, the RNC first pages a UE in idle mode in the last camped-on cell and its
neighboring cells. If no response is received from the UE, the RNC then pages the UE in the
entire LA or RA.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:

Fewer Uu-interface paging messages

Lower PCH congestion probability

Eliminates the need to manually divide or split the LA or RA

For example, if there are 1200 cells in an LA or RA and the average number of neighboring
cells configured for each cell is 43, this feature reduces the number of Uu-interface paging
messages by 30% to 70% if the first-layer paging success rate is 90%.

Description
With the increasing penetration rate of smartphones, UE paging is triggered more and more
by applications. However, the RNC must page a UE in idle mode in the entire LA or RA
because the RNC does not know which cell the UE camps on. This results in a large number
of unnecessary Uu-interface paging messages, which increases PCH congestion.
To solve this problem, Huawei introduces the Layered Paging in IDLE Mode feature based on
the mobility characteristics of UEs in idle mode.
With this feature, the RNC first pages a UE in idle mode in the last camped-on cell and its
neighboring cells, which is called first-layer paging. If no response is received from the UE,
the RNC then pages the UE in the entire LA or RA. This process is second-layer paging.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

3.5 Radio Resource


3.5.1 WRFD-021001 Flexible frequency bandwidth of
UMTS carrier
Model
QWMS0FLXFS00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
Huawei provide flexible frequency bandwidth range from 4.2MHz to 5MHz with algorithm
enhancement. Therefore, Huawei can support the frequency separation range from 2.2MHz to
2.6MHz in UMTS and GSM co-site scenario. And Huawei also can support the frequency
separation range from 4.2MHz to 5MHz in UMTS and UMTS co-site scenario.

Benefits
It will increase the frequency utilization and provide UMTS mode even the frequency
resource is not enough for 5MHz. This feature can solve the problem that frequency is rare
resources for operators.

Description
Usually, the frequency bandwidth of UMTS must be 5MHz. With the development of 3G
service, the frequency resource is become more and more rare. The conflict is evident on the
high quality frequency band. Many operators cannot refarm 5MHz for the limited frequency
resource, but they want to deploy the new services on 850/900MHz for the competition
pressure. Through algorithm enhancement, Huawei can support frequency bandwidth less
than 5MHz. The feature only can be used in GU or UU co-site scenario.
However, KPI is impacted even with carefully network planning and optimization when
frequency bandwidth is less than 5MHz. The impact on the KPI can be reduced with Huawei
professional service, but it cannot get rid of the impact thoroughly. Therefore, operator must
balance between the KPI and bandwidth utilization.
Due to the sensitivity of KPIs, it is recommended that operators purchase Huawei's network
optimization services when using this feature. This ensures accurate setting and fine tuning of
different parameters to obtain optimum KPIs.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

For 4.6 MHz to 5 MHz (including 4.6 MHz), all the RF modules can support this
feature.
For 4.2 MHz to 4.6 MHz (excluding 4.6 MHz), only 850/1900 MHz RRU3804, 850
MHz WRFU, MRFU v1/v2 and RRU3908 v1/v2, WRFUd, RRU3828, RRU3829,
RRU3928, RRU3929, MRFUd, and MRFUe can support this feature.
The BTS3803E does not support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Non-standard Bandwidth Features
Introduction Service

3.5.2 WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB


>= 2)
Model
QW1S0MRABV00
QW1S0MRABP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
This feature is a combination of two or more PS RABs.

Benefits
Multi-RAB support capability provides operators with more choices for the service solution.

Description
Multi-RAB can provide many services simultaneously to the upper layer. When multi-RAB
has more thanone PS RAB, Huawei supports the following specifications:

Combination of two PS services

One CS service + two PS services

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Combination of three PS services

One CS service + three PS services

Combination of Four PS Services

In all the above combinations, the bit rates of CS and PS services are not limited. That is, any
bit rate defined in WRFD-010501 Conversational QoS Class, WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS
Class, WRFD-010503 Interactive QoS Class, and WRFD-010501 Background QoS Class can
be selected in the combination.
The PS conversational/streaming/interactive/background services can also be mapped onto
HS-DSCH or E-DCH channels, such a feature will be supported with the optional feature
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction
Package.

Enhancement

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, the following specifications can be supported:

Combination of three PS services including IMS signaling

One CS service + three PS services including IMS signaling

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, the limitation that one of 3 PS service must be IMS signaling is removed.

RAN11.0
In RAN11.0, the combination of four PS service is supported.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The CN must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Features
NA

3.5.3 WRFD-01061501 Combination of Two PS


Services
Model
QW1S0MRABV00
QW1S0MRABP00
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.

Summary
This feature is a combination of two PS services.

Benefits
Multi-RAB support capability provides operators with more choices for the service solution.

Description
Huawei supports the combination of two PS services.
The bit rates of PS services are not limited. That is, any bit rate defined in WRFD-010501
Conversational QoS Class, WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS Class, WRFD-010503 Interactive
QoS Class, and WRFD-010501 Background QoS Class can be applied to this feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The CN must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Features
WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB 2)

3.5.4 WRFD-01061502 Combination of One CS


Service and Two PS Services
Model
QW1S0MRABV00
QW1S0MRABP00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.

Summary
This feature is a combination of one CS service and two PS services.

Benefits
This feature provides operators with more choices for the service solution.

Description
Huawei supports the combination of one CS service + two PS services.
The bit rates of CS and PS services are not limited. That is, any bit rate defined in WRFD010501 Conversational QoS Class, WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS Class, WRFD-010503
Interactive QoS Class, and WRFD-010501 Background QoS Class can be applied to this
feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The CN must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Features
WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB 2)

3.5.5 WRFD-01061503 Combination of Three PS


Services
Model
QW1S0MRABV00
QW1S0MRABP00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature is a combination of three PS services.

Benefits
This feature provides operators with more choices for the service solution.

Description
Huawei supports the combination of three PS Services.
The bit rates of PS services are not limited. That is, any bit rate defined in WRFD-010501
Conversational QoS Class, WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS Class, WRFD-010503 Interactive
QoS Class, and WRFD-010501 Background QoS Class can be applied to this feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The CN must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Features
WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB 2)

3.5.6 WRFD-01061504 Combination of One CS


Service and Three PS Services
Model
QW1S0MRABV00
QW1S0MRABP00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature is a combination of one CS service and three PS services (including IMS
signaling).

Benefits
This feature provides operators with more choices for the service solution.

Description
Huawei supports the combination of one CS service and three PS services, including IMS
signaling.
The bit rates of CS and PS services are not limited. That is, any bit rate defined in WRFD010501 Conversational QoS Class, WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS Class, WRFD-010503
Interactive QoS Class, and WRFD-010501 Background QoS Class can be applied to this
feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The CN must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Features
WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB 2)

3.5.7 WRFD-01061505 Combination of Four PS


Services
Model
QW1S0MRABV00
QW1S0MRABP00
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Summary
This feature is a combination of four PS services. The service combination can be VoIP + BE
or four PS BE services.

Benefits
This feature enhances the system's compatibility with various VoIP UEs and facilitates the
development of VoIP.
The service combination 3PS RAB VoIP + BE can be applied, which enriches the operator
s services portfolio.

Description
RAN11.0 supports up to four PS RABs per user. A typical application of Multi-RAB is VoIP
plus BE service where VoIP may need up to three RABs to transmit SIP signaling, Real-Time
Transport Protocol (RTP) (voice), and Real-Time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) (media
monitoring) respectively, as shown in the following figure.

RAN11.0 supports four PS RABs per user, and the service combination VoIP + BE is
supported. Other service combination like 4PS BE is also supported.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The CN must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Features
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB 2)

3.5.8 WRFD-020103 Inter Frequency Load Balance


Model
QW1SIEFLBV00
QW1SIEFLBP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.

Summary
When a cell is in initial congestion state, this feature enables some UEs in the cell to be
handed over to an inter-frequency co-coverage cell, reducing the load of the cell.

Benefits
This feature is used to reduce the system load by handing over UE to neighboring cells,
keeping the system in a safe state.

Description
This feature is an important action for Load Reshuffling (LDR). It enables the system to
perform inter-frequency handover that hands over UE to an inter-frequency neighboring cell,
thereby reducing the current cell load.
This action is triggered when system detects that the current serving cell load is beyond the
pre-defined congestion threshold and the cell is entering a basic congestion state. Normally
the resource used for cell load level measurement is the power resource, if inter frequency
load balance is taken as an action for LDR. The load measurement is done both for UL and
DL.
A target cell will then be selected according to the load difference between current cell load
and congestion threshold of each target cell. Only when the load difference exceeds a certain
value can the cell be selected as the target cell for blind handover. The limitation for target
cell selection is used to ensure that the handover does not cause the load increase of target
cell.
Besides, the system will select a UE to be handed over during the LDR according to the UE
priority. If the UEs have the same priority, the UE with higher service bit rate will be selected
first.
Inter-frequency load balanceis also applied to hierarchical cell structure.

Enhancement

RAN5.0
HSDPA service is considered during inter-frequency load balance procedure in RAN5.0.
RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, the user selection criterion considers the Traffic Class, ARP, and bear type
(R99 or HSPA) when calculating the UE priority.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

RAN6.0
THP factor is added in RAN6.0. HSUPA service is considered during inter-frequency
load balance procedure in RAN6.0.

RAN12.0
Blind handover is used to perform inter-frequency handover before RAN12.0.
Measurement based handover is added as one choice of actions to perform interfrequency handover in RAN12.0. In RAN12.0, by MML command, operator can inhibit
some types of service being selected for inter-frequency load balance.

RAN14.0
Before RAN14.0, inter-frequency load balancing can be triggered only by basic
congestion of power resources or code resources. In RAN14.0, load-based interfrequency handovers can also be triggered by basic congestion of uplink credit resources.
This helps mitigate basic congestion of uplink credit resources and therefore lowers the
probability of admission failures due to uplink credit resource congestion. In RAN14.0,
inter-frequency blind handovers and measurement-based inter-frequency handovers can
be triggered by basic congestion of uplink credit resources.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
When this feature is used for HSDPA/HSUPA load control, WRFD-010610 HSDPA
Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Multicarrier Service

3.5.9 WRFD-020114 Domain Specific Access Control


(DSAC)
Model
QW1S0DSACV00
QW1S0DSACM00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
In urgent cases, for example, the CN is overloaded, this feature enables fast reduction of the
load, avoiding further overload.

Benefits
In urgent cases, for example, the overload of the CN, the DSAC function can quickly lower
the current load and reduce the risk of overload.
If one CN domain is overloaded or unavailable, the other CN domain is not affected. This
improves the disaster tolerance and availability of the network.

Description
In the 3GPP protocols, the PRACH resources (such as access slots and access preambles in
FDD mode) provide access services of different priorities by distinguishing different Access
Service Classes (ASCs). The value range of the ASC is 0-7. The value 0 represents the highest
priority and the value 7 represents the lowest priority. The value 0 of ASC is used for
emergency calls. The Information Element (IE) "AC-to-ASC mapping" in SIB 5 or SIB 5bis
indicates the mapping between Access Class (AC) and ASC. This mapping is usually applied
to the access phase, for example, sending an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message;
therefore, different access services are provided by controlling the access probability of the
UEs which belong to the ASCs of different priorities.
In SIB 3/4, the IE "Domain Specific Access Restriction Parameters" is used to indicate which
access class is barred or allowed. The UE will read its access class and compare it with the
access class stored in the SIM card. After comparison, the UE knows whether it is allowed to
access the cell.
The DSAC function can be used in the following scenarios:
1. When the RNC knows through the Iu interface that the CN is overloaded, it triggers the
DSAC function as follows:
1.

The RNC sets the step as X% to limit the access of the UE under the RNC at a fixed
interval, namely, "Access Class Restriction interval". Within the next interval, the RNC
limits the other X% UEs and releases all the other UEs.

2.

The RNC bars the access of UEs according to different domains. That is, the RNC
prevents the UEs from accessing the overloaded CS domain. If the PS domain is
overloaded, the RNC also prevents the UEs from accessing the PS domain.

3.

If X% = 100%, the RNC bars the access of all the UEs. The UEs camp on the coverage
area under the RNC but cannot access the corresponding domain.

4.

When the CN is no longer overloaded, all the barred ACs will be released.

5.

The operators can set X% and Access Class Restriction interval.

6.

The operator can decide whether to trigger the DSAC function when a domain of the CN
is overloaded.

2. When Iu Flex is used, the DSAC function can be automatically triggered only when all the
CN nodes of the corresponding domain connected to the RNC are overloaded.
3. When the DSAC function is triggered, based on logs and alarms, the operator can easily
monitor the DSAC status, network status, the process of removing restrictions on access
classes, and so on.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement

RAN15.0
Based on 3GPP protocols, RAN15.0 introduces the Paging Permission with Access
Control (PPAC) function for UEs complying with 3GPP Release 8 or later. This function
enables UEs belonging to a barred AC to respond to paging or perform location
registration/update. Therefore, when an AC is barred, UEs belonging to the AC can still
be called quickly.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
Only UEs complying with 3GPP Release 6 or later support this feature. Only UEs
complying with 3GPP Release 8 or later support the PPAC function.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN nodes should support this message on the Iu interface.

Other Features
NA

3.5.10 WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band


Networking Management
Model
QW1S000MFV00
QW1S000MFP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
With this feature, the operator can simultaneously provide services on multiple frequency
bands. This feature implements the functions such as mobility management, load balancing,
and traffic balancing between frequency bands.

Benefits
In multi-frequency-band networking scenarios, this feature can provide seamless
communication to improve the system capacity.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Description
IMT-2000/UMTS service was launched in the core band (1920-1980 MHz/2110-2170 MHz)
during the year 2001, and by mid-2006 there were more than 75 million IMT-2000/UMTS
subscriptions worldwide in more than 110 IMT-2000/UMTS networks launched
commercially.
However, there are still sparsely populated and remote areas where there are difficulties to
provide IMT-2000/UMTS services in a cost-efficient way. Therefore, other frequency band refarming is required to provide UMTS service to meet the requirements. For example, UMTS
deployment in 900 MHz band can facilitate the provision of the expected IMT-2000/UMTS
services to users in those areas. The 900 MHz band is identified for IMT-2000/UMTS at ITU
and from a regulatory point of view it can be used for IMT-2000/UMTS.
The most significant benefit comes from the fact that compared to 2 GHz band, radio wave
propagation path-loss in 900 MHz frequency band is much smaller. Therefore, for the offering
of the same service (data rates) and same coverage, the required number of base station sites
in 900 MHz band is reduced by 60% compared to that at 2 GHz, as shown by the following
table.
Service

2 GHz band

900 MHz Band

Site Number
Reduction

Circuit switched, 64
kbit/s

224

90

60%

Packet switched,
384 kbit/s

468

181

61%

In addition, the use of the 900 MHz band can significantly improve indoor coverage in urban
areas. The economic benefit of the 900 MHz band on UMTS operators' investments makes it
possible to propagate benefits to the end-users in terms of wider coverage and possibly lower
level of usage costs. Improved indoor coverage is important because more and more mobile
voice and data services are used in the indoor environment. This is of particular interest when
considering the increasing use of the mobile phones as a replacement or a complement to
fixed phone, PC and TV usage. The UMTS900 will be deployed by reusing the GSM sites
within the existing service area, and the benefits are achieved because of:

Reuse of the existing base station sites

Reuse of the existing antenna systems and feeders

From a practical implementation point of view, operators only need either to add a new base
station cabinet or to replace the existing GSM base station by a multimode GSM+UMTS base
station subject to site situation or manufacturer's design. It should be noted that the base
station equipment cost represents only a small portion of the total site cost.
Huawei supports the following frequency band:
Operating Band

UL Frequencies

DL frequencies

UE transmit, NodeB
receive

UE receive, NodeB
transmit

1920 to 1980 MHz

2110 to 2170 MHz

RAN2.0

II

1850 to 1910 MHz

1930 to 1990 MHz

Macro: RAN5.0

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Availability

253

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

RRU: RAN5.1
III

1710 to 1785 MHz

1805 to 1880 MHz

Macro: RAN5.0
RRU: RAN5.1

824 to 849 MHz

869 to 894 MHz

RAN6.0

VIII

880 to 915 MHz

925 to 960 MHz

RAN6.0

IV

1710 to1755 MHz

2110 to 2155 MHz

RRU: RAN6.1

IX

1749.9 to 1784.9
MHz

1844.9 to1879.9
MHz

RRU: RAN6.0

Huawei also provides the full mobility solution between these frequency bands and the
mobility between these frequency bands and GSM cells. The main related features are as
follows:

Cell selection / reselection

Service distribution and Directed retry: Load Balance DRD is supported, which enables
the RNC to direct the UE to a preferable layer according to the load conditions of current
cell and target cell. Service priority could be set to cells, corresponding to different
service types including R99 RT, R99 NRT, HSPA and other (for example, MBMS). This
enables service differentiation and/or load balance between multi-frequency layers. In
call setup procedures, the RNC would direct the UE to an inter-frequency cell with
higher service priority. The RNC also considers the capabilities of the cell/UE, and the
requested RAB. Service Differentiate DRD and Load Balance DRD could work
independently or cooperatively. In later case service priority will be first considered.
Such a feature depends on the optional feature WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction
Package.

Coverage based handover: If coverage based inter-frequency handover is needed, the


optional feature WRFD-020302 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage
should be enabled. If coverage based inter-RAT handover is needed, WRFD-020303
Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage should be enabled.

Load based handover: Such feature enables the load based inter-RAT handover, which
depends on the optional feature WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load.

Service based handover: Such feature depends on the optional feature WRFD-020305
Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service

Hierarchical Cell Structure capability is also available which is operator configurable in


order to prioritize the different UMTS2100, UMTS900 and GSM layers. And such
feature depends on the optional feature WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell
Structure).

The network operator can have full flexibility to prioritize different UMTS2100 and
UMTS900 cells.

Enhancement

RAN12.0
In RAN12.0, the inter-band blind handover based on load is supported to share the load
in case of cell overload.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

RAN14.0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

In RAN14.0, inter-band blind handovers can be triggered by basic congestion of uplink


credit resources. This helps mitigate basic congestion of uplink credit resources and
therefore lowers the probability of admission failures due to uplink credit resource
congestion.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package or
WRFD-020302 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage or
WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage should be enabled or
WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load or
WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service or
WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)
WRFD-020103 Inter Frequency Load Balance
If one of these dependent features is not enabled, the corresponding function will not be
available in the multi frequency band networking solution. Operator can choose which
feature to use or not.

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Multicarrier Service

3.5.11 WRFD-020160 Enhanced Multiband


Management
Model
QW1S00EMMV00

Availability
This feature is available since RAN12.0.

Summary
In a multiband network, the cells that perform an operation on different frequency bands have
different coverage areas. Generally, when the UE needs to perform an inter-frequency
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

handover, it performs handover decision according to the inter-frequency measurement result


rather than performs a blind handover. This increases the handover success rate.
Inter-frequency measurement is performed for handover decision of the inter-frequency
handover based on traffic steering or load sharing.

Benefits
With this feature, the traffic steering or load sharing between the cells operating on different
frequency bands can be implemented, enhancing the resource usage while ensuring the
handover success rate.

Description
In the inter-frequency traffic steering, each cell is configured with the priority for carrying
each type of services (R99 RT, R99 NRT, HSPA, and others). After the RAB is setup, interfrequency measurement is performed to ensure that the UE accesses the cell with the highest
priority. To enable inter-frequency measurement for traffic steering, enable the features
WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band Networking Management and WRFD-020400 DRD
Introduction Package.
In the inter-frequency load sharing, after the RAB setup, load reshuffling (LDR) may trigger a
load-based inter-frequency handover. The target cell is selected on the basis of the quality
measurement of cells. Only the cell that meets the quality requirement is selected. To enable
inter-frequency measurement for load sharing, enable the features WRFD-020110 Multi
Frequency Band Networking Management and WRFD-020103 Inter-Frequency Load
Balance.

Enhancement

RAN14.0
Before RAN14.0, measurement-based inter-band handovers for inter-band load
balancing are triggered only by basic congestion of power resources. In RAN14.0, interband handovers can also be triggered by basic congestion of uplink credit resources. This
helps mitigate basic congestion of uplink credit resources and therefore lowers the
probability of admission failures due to uplink credit resource congestion.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band Networking Management and WRFD-020400
DRD Introduction Package

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band Networking Management and WRFD-020103


Inter-Frequency Load Balance
If a dependent feature is not enabled, the corresponding function is unavailable in the
multi-band network. Features can be configured based on the operator's requirements.

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Multicarrier Service

3.5.12 WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package


Model
QW1S0DR&RV00
QW1S0DR&RP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
This feature supports inter-frequency or inter-system direct retry and redirect.

Benefits
These features can decrease the access failure rate and improve the QoS of the network.

Description
The DRD Introduction Package includes the following features:

Intra System Direct Retry

Inter System Direct Retry

Inter System Redirect

Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.5.13 WRFD-02040001 Intra System Direct Retry


Model
QW1S0DR&RV00
QW1S0DR&RP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0.

Summary
This feature is related to intra-system direct retry during the RRC Connection setup or RAB
assignment.

Benefits
Intra system Directed Retry can decrease the access failure rate, and improve the QoS of the
network.

Description
Intra System Direct Retry is a feature used during Admission Control when a new call fails to
access the network in the admission procedure. This feature can be executed in RRC
connection setup procedure and in RAB ASSIGNMENT procedure.
As for RRC procedure, it occurs when a UE initiates a RRC CONNECTION REQUEST and
the request is refused in the original cell. The system will then make a decision whether the
connection setup request can be set up in a inter-frequency neighboring cell. This decision is
done according to the configuration of inter-frequency blind neighboring cells. The new cell
information will be sent to UE in the RRC CONNECTION SETUP message, indicating UE to
access to the new cell.
As for RAB procedure, it occurs when a new call fails for admission during RAB
ASSIGNMENT procedure. The system will try a blind handover to inter-frequency
neighboring cell. In order to increase the blind handover success rate, the neighbor interfrequency neighboring cell should cover the original cell range.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package

3.5.14 WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry


Model
QW1S0DR&RV00
QW1S0DR&RP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0.

Summary
This feature is related to inter-system direct retry during the RAB assignment.

Benefits
Inter system Directed Retry can decrease the access failure rate, and improve the QoS of the
network.

Description
Inter System Direct Retry is a feature used during Admission Control when a new call fails to
access the network in the admission procedure. This feature is executed in RAB
ASSIGNMENT procedure.
If the RAB ASSIGNMENT procedure fails during admission, the RNC will respond with the
RAB ASSIGNEMNT RESPONSE message with the cause "Direct Retry". Then, a relocation
procedure will be initiated by RNC with the cause of "Direct Retry".
The following procedure is as the same as the normal inter-RAT handover procedure.

Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package

3.5.15 WRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect


Model
QW1S0DR&RV00
QW1S0DR&RP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0.

Summary
This feature is related to inter-system redirect during the RRC assignment.

Benefits
Inter-system Redirect can decrease the access failure rate, and improve the QoS of the
network.

Description
Redirect feature is used during admission procedure when a new call is failed due to resource
unavailable. It occurs in RRC CONNECTION SETUP procedure.
When a UE initiates a RRC CONNECTION REQUEST and the request is refused in the
original cell. And RRC direct retry fails too. The system will send RRC CONNECTION
REJECT message with Redirection info indicating UE to access to an inter-system cell.
Compared with RRC Direct Retry procedure, UE will perform a new cell-reselection
procedure in inter-system Redirect.

Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package

3.5.16 WRFD-02040004 Traffic Steering and Load


Sharing During RAB Setup
Model
Availability
This feature is available since RAN10.0.

Summary
With this feature, the load of the service and the required service type are considered during
RAB setup to implement traffic steering and load sharing between different frequencies or
different frequency bands.

Benefits
If traffic steering is enabled during RAB setup, newly admitted services are carried on the
specified frequency to reduce the impact on the old services, achieving smooth network
evolution.
If load sharing is enabled during RAB setup, the probability of congestion on each frequency
is reduced, the service access success rate is improved, and the number of load-based
handovers performed after service setup is reduced. Therefore, the quality of service is
improved.

Description
Services are classified into four types: R99 RT, R99 NRT, HSPA, and others (such as MBMS).
Different priorities are defined for different types of services in each cell. If traffic steering is
enabled, the cell with the highest priority is selected according to the service type during the
RAB setup.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

If load sharing is enabled, the load on the current cell and the loads on the neighboring cells
that cover the same area are considered during RAB setup to ensure that new services access
the cell with the lowest traffic load.
Traffic steering and load sharing during RAB setup can be enabled or disabled respectively. If
both of the functions are enabled, traffic steering takes precedence over load sharing. That is,
the cell with the highest priority is selected on the basis of traffic steering. If multiple cells
have the same priority, then the cell with the lowest traffic load is selected.
Traffic steering and load sharing are implemented through blind handovers. These two
functions apply to the scenarios where neighboring cells have the same coverage.

Enhancement

RAN12.0
In RAN12.0 Periodically DRD based on measurement is introduced, RAB can be setup
in the original cell, and by following inter frequency measurement to chose a
neighboring cell to perform DRD, reduce the drop rate caused by blind handover. The
Periodically DRD based on blind handover or based on measurement can be selected by
operator.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Multicarrier Service

3.5.17 WRFD-02040005 Inter-Frequency Redirection


Based on Distance
Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

262

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
This feature supports inter-frequency redirection based on distance during RRC connection
setup.

Benefits
This feature increases the RRC connection setup success rate and reduces the call drop rate.

Description
This feature solves the coverage overlap problem for UMTS networks.
Upon receiving an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message from a UE, the RNC calculates
the propagation delay for the UE. The RNC then compares the propagation delay with the
inter-frequency redirection threshold and performs inter-frequency redirection based on the
distance between the NodeB and the UE.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Multicarrier Service

3.5.18 WRFD-020402 Measurement Based Direct


Retry
Model
QW1S0MBDRV00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0

Summary
After the setup of UE RRC connection, RNC can immediately initiate inter frequency or inter
system measurement, then RNC can perform direct retry according to the measurement result
when the RAB assignment is received from CN.

Benefits
The feature can increase the success rate of DRD, reduce the drop rate caused by DRD with
blind handover, improves the network performance.

Description
When an RAB is set up and the DRD is triggered, the Directed Retry Decision (DRD)
algorithm uses the blind handover procedure to setup the RAB in another cell. In this
situation, if the current cell and the DRD target cell cover different areas, the UE DRD may
fail.
After the Measurement based direct retry (MBDR) function is implemented, inter-frequency
or inter-RAT measurement is performed. This ensures good signal quality of the DRD target
cell. With this function, the success rate of inter-frequency or inter-RAT DRD can be ensured
even if the current cell and the DRD target cell cover different areas.
The function can be configured with the service type:

The following types of service support inter-frequency MBDR:

1.

CS AMR

2.

CS non-AMR

3.

PS R99

4.

PS HSPA

Only CS AMR services support inter-RAT MBDR.

After an RRC connection setup, the RNC determines whether to establish services in interfrequency or inter-RAT cells based on the current cell load and the type of services to be
established. If required, the RNC sends the UE an inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement
control message, instructing the UE to measure the signal quality of the target cell. If the
signal quality of the target cell meets the specified requirements, the RNC establishes services
in the target cell.
If MBDR is executed, the other types of DRD will not be performed subsequently in the call.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Multicarrier Service

3.5.19 WRFD-020120 Service Steering and Load


Sharing in RRC Connection Setup
Model
QW1S0SSLSV00
QW1S0SSLSM00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Summary
This feature enables service and load sharing between different frequencies, bands, or systems
based on the service type and cell load.

Benefits
In the RRC connection setup phase, this feature can implement service steering and shorten
the delay of service setup. In addition, this feature can provide inter-frequency or inter-RAT
load sharing under different coverage and increase the success rate of load sharing.

Description
In the RRC connection setup phase, this feature enables the following functions: (1) interfrequency or inter-RAT service steering based on the setup reasons of RRC connections; (2)
inter-frequency or inter-RAT load sharing under different coverage based on the cell load or
redirect proportion.
With this feature, service steering and load sharing are available through RRC redirection in
the RRC connection setup phase. In the RAB setup phase, the direct retry is used for service
steering and load sharing. As the RRC redirection is a cell reselection procedure based on UE
measurement, this feature is more suitable for the scenarios (for example, different frequency
bands are available or no site is shared) to implement service steering and load sharing of two
TRXs.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE need to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6(or later) to support the feature.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package

3.5.20 WRFD-020111 One Tunnel


Model
QW1S000OTP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R7.

Summary
This feature works between the RNC and the GGSN on the UMTS core network. It is a
feature defined by 3GPP R7.
This feature has been enhanced in RAN14.0 so that it supports One Tunnel between the RNC
and the S-GW on the evolved packet core (EPC). The S12 interface is used between these two
network elements (NEs). The enhanced feature is defined by 3GPP R8.

Benefits
This feature further simplifies mobile packet data networks. By using the optimal lines on
networks, this feature significantly reduces the number of the data links required and thereby
achieves a flat user plane. This feature is particularly suitable for 3G networks. With this
feature, telecom operators can make the most of their investments in network construction,
easily expand their networks, and lower the operation and maintenance costs. In addition,
evolution to LTE is convenient.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Description
Based on the traditional 3G network architecture, One Tunnel is an innovative technique for
network optimization. The SGSN is responsible for establishing a direct tunnel from the RNC
to the GGSN. User-plane data is transmitted over this direct tunnel instead of being
transmitted through the SGSN. This achieves a flat user plane. On a traditional UMTS
network, there is a tunnel between the GGSN and the SGSN, and there is another tunnel
between the SGSN and the RNC, as shown in the upper portion of the following figure. Data
on both the control plane and the user plane is transmitted between the RNC and the GGSN
through the SGSN. This is known as Two Tunnel (two GTP tunnels).
With Two Tunnel, user-plane data of PS services is forwarded to the GGSN by the SGSN.
Amid the rapid increases in the PS traffic volume, the user-plane capacity of the SGSN is
becoming a bottleneck. One Tunnel is the solution to this problem. With One Tunnel, a direct
tunnel is established between the RNC and the GGSN for the user-plane data of PS services,
as shown in the lower portion of the following figure. The SGSN works as the central control
point for One Tunnel. Control-plane data is still transmitted between the RNC and the GGSN
through the SGSN. User-plane data is directly transmitted between the RNC and the GGSN.
One Tunnel between the RNC and the GGSN was first introduced in 3GPP R7.
Figure 5.2.2-1 One Tunnel between RNC and GGSN

Enhancement

RAN14.0
One Tunnel has been enhanced in RAN14.0. Without One Tunnel, two tunnels are used
for UMTS/LTE interoperability, one between the RNC and the SGSN and the other
between the SGSN and the S-GW. One Tunnel between the RNC and the S-GW was
introduced in 3GPP R8. The S12 interface is used to achieve One Tunnel between the
RNC and the S-GW. With One Tunnel, a direct tunnel is established between the RNC
and the S-GW. User-plane data is directly transmitted between the RNC and the S-GW.
This way, the SGSN will not become a bottleneck for UMTS/LTE interoperability, and
telecom operators do not need to upgrade the SGSN frequently.
Figure 5.2.2-2 S12 between RNC and Serving Gateway

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


The serving gateway (S-GW) must support this feature.

CN
The GGSN must support this feature.

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS RAN Network Design Service

3.5.21 WRFD-140213 Intelligent Access Class Control


Model
QW1S0IACCV00
QW1S0IACCP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
This feature prevents a large number of UEs from sending RRC connection setup requests
simultaneously. When the RNC determines that a cell is congested, the RNC restricts the
access of UEs of more access classes. When the RNC determines that congestion is relieved
in the cell, the RNC decreases number of access classes on which access control is performed.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

268

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
When a large number of RRC connection setup requests are rejected due to cell congestion,
this feature enables UEs to access the network at the scheduled time. This prevents excessive
RRC connection setup requests from wasting Um interface resources and RNC processing
resources, relieves network congestion, and improves system stability.

Description
When this feature is enabled, the RNC periodically determines whether a cell is congested and
controls access classes based on the cell status. If a cell is congested, the RNC restricts the
access of UEs of more access classes. If congestion is relieved in the cell, the RNC decreases
number of access classes on which access control is performed. The access classes that are not
allowed to access the network are defined in the system information. The RNC restricts the
access classes in round robin mode at the specified period so that UEs access the network at
the scheduled time. This prevents network storms caused by simultaneous access of a large
number of UEs, saves network resources, and relieves cell congestion as a result.

Enhancement

RAN15.0
Based on 3GPP protocols, RAN15.0 introduces the Paging Permission with Access
Control (PPAC) function for UEs complying with 3GPP Release 8 or later. This function
enables UEs belonging to a barred AC to respond to paging or perform location
registration/update. Therefore, when an AC is barred, UEs belonging to the AC can still
be called quickly.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UEs must support access class control delivered in system information.
For UEs complying with 3GPP Release 5 and earlier releases, access class control cannot
be performed on CS and PS services separately. If the access class of such a UE is
barred, the UE can process neither CS nor PS services.
For UEs complying with 3GPP Release 6 and later releases, access class control can be
performed on CS and PS services separately. Therefore, such a UE can process CS
services while being barred from processing PS services.
Only UEs complying with 3GPP Release 8 or later support the PPAC function.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

269

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service

3.5.22 WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell


Structure)
Model
QW1S00HCSV00
QW1S00HCSP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
This feature complies with the hierarchical cell structure (HCS) as stipulated in 3GPP
specifications. It enables the UE to be handed over to the relevant hierarchical cell according
to its moving speed.

Benefits

Improve the conversation quality for fast-moving UEs.

Improve the system capacity.

Reduce the signaling load by decreasing the unnecessary handover.

Description
In 3G networks, the so-called hot spots in radio communications may appear with the increase
of subscribers and traffic. This requires more cells to expand the network capacity. More cells
and smaller cell radius indicate that more frequent handovers of UEs take place. For a UE at a
fast speed, frequent handovers reduce call quality, increase uplink interference, and increase
signaling load.
In this situation, Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) is required to divide cells into different
hierarchies and up to 8 hierarchies are supported.
Cell Type

Characteristics

Macro Cell

Large coverage
Continuous coverage networking
Low requirement on capacity
Fast-moving environment

Micro Cell

Densely populated areas


High requirement on capacity
Slow-moving environment

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

270

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Cell Type

Characteristics

Pico Cell

Indoor coverage
Outdoor dead-area coverage

Where, the Pico cell has the highest priority and the macro cell has the lowest priority.

Speed Estimation
The speed estimation on each hierarchy of an HCS cell falls into one of the following
types:

1.

Fast speed

2.

Normal speed

3.

Slow speed
According to the number of changes of the best cell within time unit, speed estimation
algorithm estimates the moving speed of the UEs. See details as follows:

4.

If the number of changes of best cell for a UE is above the fast-speed threshold, this UE
is decided in fast speed;

5.

If the number of changes of best cell for a UE is below the slow-speed threshold, this UE
is decided in slow speed;

6.

If the number of changes of best cell for a UE is between fast-speed threshold and slowspeed threshold, this UE is decided in normal speed.

HCS Handover Based on Speed Estimation


After the moving speed of the UE is estimated, inter-hierarchy handover algorithm
initiates the corresponding handover based on this speed decision.
According to the results of speed estimation,

1.

The UE in fast speed is handed over to the cell of lower priority.

2.

The UE in slow speed is handed over to the cell of higher priority.

3.

The UE in normal speed is not required to be handed over to any cell.

According to speed estimation, the RNC orders the fast-moving UE to handover to the cells of
lower priority to reduce the number of handovers, and orders the slow-moving UEs to
handover to the cells of higher priority to increase network capacity.

Enhancement

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, the fallback of video telephony to speech before VP services are handed over
to the 2G system is supported to ensure continuous calls.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

UE

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

271

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

If the video telephony fallback to speech (AMR) for inter-RAT handover is to be applied,
the UE needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6

Other Network Units


NA

CN
If the video telephony fallback to speech (AMR) for inter-RAT handover is to be applied,
the MSC needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.

Other Features
NA

3.5.23 WRFD-020302 Inter Frequency Hard Handover


Based on Coverage
Model
QW1SIFHHBV00
QW1SIFHHBP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
This feature introduces inter-frequency hard handover triggered by Active Set quality
measurement event 2D or by Uplink Radio Link QoS or emergency blind handover triggered
by event 1F.

Benefits
Coverage based Inter frequency hard handover provides supplementary coverage in interfrequency networking cells to prevent call drop, therefore, improve the network performance
and end user feeling.
Enhancement of inter frequency hard handover between multi frequency band cells can be
used to support multi frequency band networking scenario.

Description
Inter frequency hard handover is hard handover between cells of different frequencies. It can
be triggered by coverage, load or speed which is suitable for the corresponding scenarios. The
trigger condition based on the cell load belongs to the optional feature which is described in
WRFD-020103 Inter Frequency Load Balance. The trigger condition based on the UE speed
which is evaluated by RNC belongs to the optional feature which is described in WRFD021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure). In this feature, the handover is triggered by
coverage reason.
This trigger condition is based on the quality measurement. The compressed mode
measurement for DL or UL will be triggered by event measurement report 2D for interfrequency or inter-RAT handover and stopped by event measurement report 2F. When
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

272

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

compressed mode measurement is triggered, RNC will start the inter frequency measurement
in UE to get the target cell to handover if inter-frequency neighboring cells are configured.
The measurement quantity is combination of RSCP and Ec/N0. The compressed mode can
also be triggered by the combination of Ec/N0 and RSCP. Moreover, event 2B and period
measurement report mode are supported and which measurement quantity and mode to use
can be configured by operator. The measurement related parameters include threshold,
hysteresis, and trigger delay time. The inter-frequency neighboring cell number can be up to
64.
The compressed mode is divided into two types, namely, spreading factor reduction (SF/2)
and high layer approaches. The type of compressed mode to be used is decided by the RNC
automatically, according to the configurable spreading factor used in uplink and downlink.
Another measurement report 1F can also trigger inter-frequency hard handover, but
compressed mode will not be triggered in this scenario since such a report means a call drop
may occur at any time and there is no time to implement the measurement procedure. The
target cell of handover is selected based on the equivalentdown link overage of the inter
frequency blind neighboring cells. By this means the handover success rate can be guaranteed,
and the equivalent down link coverage is represented by RSCP of CPICHchannel which is
determined after network planning.
Inter-frequency handover triggered by limitation of UE TX power or high UL BLER is
available for PS BE, CS AMR and VP services.
In multi frequency band networking scenario which is described in WRFD-020110 Multi
Frequency Band Networking Management, the inter frequency hard handover is enhanced to
meet the networking requirements. That is, coverage based hard handover between different
frequency bands is supported and UE measurement capability will be considered to guarantee
that the UE is not handed over to the cell where the UE does not have the corresponding
capability on that frequency band. When the capability of the UE is insufficient can be
acquired, whether to implement the handover can be configured by operator.

Enhancement

RAN3.0
In RAN3.0, event report mode and periodical report mode are supported.

RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, compressed mode is triggered by combination of Ec/N0 and RSCP is
supported.
In RAN5.1, puncturing mode as one compressed mode type is not supported anymore
since such a mode has been removed from 3GPP.

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, coverage based inter-frequency hard handover between multi frequency
band cell is supported.
In RAN6.0, combination of RSCP and Ec/N0 measurement is supported when triggering
compressed mode measurement, and available only for periodic measurement report
mode.

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, combination of RSCP and Ec/N0 measurement is available when event 2B
measurement report mode is selected.
In RAN10.0, the inter-frequency handover triggered by limitation of UE TX power or
high UL BLER is applicable to the PS BE, CS AMR, and VP services.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

273

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should support the relevant measurements and the procedure of handover.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.5.24 WRFD-020304 Inter Frequency Hard Handover


Based on DL QoS
Model
QW1S0HHOQV00
QW1S0HHOQP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
When the load of services is higher in the cell and downlink QoS drops, this feature enables
the UE to be handed over to an inter-frequency cell, guaranteeing QoS requirements.

Benefits
DL QoS based inter frequency hard handover provides the methodto prevent call drop and
guarantee the QoS in inter-frequency networking, therefore, improves the network
performance and enhances end user experience.

Description
In the scenarios of severe fading and high load, the call drop could take place due to the
limitation of DL transmitted code power. In addition, coverage area is different for different
services in network planning, thereby the system should take actions in order to guarantee the
downlink QoS and keep the connection as could as possible. The evaluation of downlink QoS
status is on the basis of TCP (Transmitted Code Power) or RLC retransmission (only for R99
PS BE).

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

274

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Once the downlink QoS is detected to be in bad condition, inter-frequency handover could be
triggered:

For AMR and VP services, inter-frequency handover could be triggered based on TCP.

For PS BE service, inter-frequency handover could be triggered based on TCP and RLC
retransmission.

This feature can be switched on/off separately for AMR, VP and PS BE services.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020302 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage

3.5.25 WRFD-020605 SRNS Relocation Introduction


Package
Model
QW1S0SRNSV00
QW1S0SRNSP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
This feature provides multiple solutions for user mobility between RNCs. The solutions
include the static relocation solution (with Iur interface), and hard handover/cell update/URA
update relocation solutions (without Iur interface).

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

275

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Benefits

Reduce the bandwidth occupied by the Iur interface.

Reduce the transmission delay of user plane.

Obtain the parameters of cell-level algorithms to optimize the performance.

Ensure that communications are not interrupted when the UE moves to the coverage area
of another RNC while the Iur interface is not available.

Help to keep the integrity and continuity of the data transfer, and improve the best effort
service performance during the SRNS relocation procedure.

Description
The serving RNS (SRNS) manages the connection between the UE and the UTRAN and can
be relocated.
The SRNS Relocation Introduction Package includes following features:

SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)

SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover

SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update

Lossless SRNS Relocation

Enhancement

RAN3.0
In RAN3.0, SRNS Relocation Introduction Package is enhanced. For details, refer to the
enhancement of the features in the package.

RAN5.0
In RAN5.0, SRNS Relocation Introduction Package is enhanced. For details, refer to the
enhancement of the features in the package.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


The CN and DRNC must support this feature simultaneously.

CN
The CN node must support this feature simultaneously.

Other Features
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

276

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

3.5.26 WRFD-02060501 SRNS Relocation (UE Not


Involved)
Model
QW1S0SRNSV00
QW1S0SRNSP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.

Summary
This feature supports the SRNS procedure based on the standard Iu interface defined by
3GPP. The static relocation procedure does not involve the UE and radio connections are
affected during the relocation. The static relocation is an optimal relocation mode.

Benefits

Reduce the bandwidth occupied by the Iur interface.

Reduce the transmission delay of user plane.

Obtain the parameters of cell-level algorithms to optimize the performance.

Description
When the Iur interface exists, the UE may use the radio resources of one RNC and connects to
the CN through another RNC.
After the SRNS is relocated (UE not involved), the Iur resources for the UE are released. The
target RNC not only provides radio resources for the UE but also connects the UE to the CN.
If the radio links are provided only by the target RNC, the static relocation for UEs in
CELL_DCH state can be triggered in the following four conditions:

SRNS relocation based on delay optimization


The SRNC calculates the transmission delay on the user plane. If the delay exceeds the
threshold, the SRNC initiates the SRNS relocation.

SRNS relocation based on transmission optimization


The SRNC calculates the bandwidth occupancy on the Iur interface. If the transmission
resource of Iur interface is congested, the SRNC initiates SRNS relocation to reduce the
transmission bandwidth occupation.

SRNS relocation based on separation time


The SRNC initiates SRNS relocation when the SRNC and the CRNC have been
separated for a period of time which exceeds the threshold.

SRNS relocation based on location separation


The SRNC initiates SRNS relocation when the UE moves to an area which is controlled
by the DRNC.
The UE's only behavior during the procedure is that it is notified with new UTRAN
MOBILITY INFORMATION.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

277

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement

RAN3.0
In RAN3.0, the SRNS relocation based on delay optimization is supported.

RAN5.0
In RAN5.0, the SRNS relocation based on separation time and location separation are
supported.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


The CN and DRNC must support this feature simultaneously.

CN
The CN node must support this feature simultaneously.

Other Features
NA

3.5.27 WRFD-02060502 SRNS Relocation with Hard


Handover
Model
QW1S0SRNSV00
QW1S0SRNSP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.

Summary
When the Iur interface is unavailable, this feature enables the UE to move between RNCs.

Benefits
It can ensure communications are not interrupted when the UE moves to the coverage area of
another RNC while the Iur interface is not available.

Description
SRNS relocation with hard handover, which applies to UEs in CELL_DCH state, occurs in
the following conditions:
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

278

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Inter-frequency or intra-frequency hard handover is performed.

The target cell and the source cell belong to different RNCs.

There is no Iur interface between the two RNCs or there are not enough resources to
setup a connection through the Iur interface.

In such scenarios, the UE is ordered to be relocated to a new RNC with hard handover to
prevent call drop.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


The CN and DRNC must support this feature simultaneously.

CN
The CN node must support this feature simultaneously.

Other Features
NA

3.5.28 WRFD-02060503 SRNS Relocation with


Cell/URA Update
Model
QW1S0SRNSV00
QW1S0SRNSP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.

Summary
When the Iur interface does not support CCH or Iur-CCH is unavailable, this feature enables
the UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH, or URA_PCH state to move between RNCs.

Benefits
It ensuresthat communications are not interrupted when the UE in CCH state moves to the
coverage area of another RNC.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

279

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Description
If Iur interface support CCH, the cell/URA update does not trigger relocation immediately.
When Iur interface does not support CCH or Iur-CCH is unavailable, the SRNS relocation
with cell update occurs when all the following conditions are met:

The cell update procedure is performed.

The target cell and the source cell belong to different RNCs.

There is Iur interface between two RNCs, but Iur does not support CCH or Iur-CCH is
unavailable.

It is caused by cell reselection of UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state. The


message Cell Update or URA Update sent by the UE is forwarded from the new RNC to the
old RNC through the Iur interface, and then the relocation procedure starts.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


The CN and DRNC must support this feature simultaneously.

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.5.29 WRFD-02060504 Lossless SRNS Relocation


Model
QW1S0SRNSV00
QW1S0SRNSP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0.

Summary
This feature enables the forwarding of SRNS contexts and DL N-PDU duplicates to the target
relocation cell during the relocation. With this feature, the higher layer on the user plane does
not need to resend the data lost during the relocation, improving the BE service performance.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

280

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature helps to keep the data transfer integrity and continuity, and improve the best
effort service performance in the SRNS relocation procedure.

Description
Lossless SRNS relocation is used to forward the context in SRNS and DL N-PDU duplicates
towards the relocation target RNC during the relocation procedure. That is, the RNC supports
the maintenance of PDCP sequence numbers for radio bearers which are used to forward data
not acknowledged by the UE. With this feature, the higher layer in user plane does not need to
resend the data lost during relocation procedure; therefore, the best effort service performance
is improved.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must support this feature.

Other Network Units


The CN and DRNC must support this feature simultaneously.

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.5.30 WRFD-150201 Macro & Micro Co-carrier


Uplink Interference Control
Model
QW1SMCDRSC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
On macro-micro co-carrier networks, the maximum transmit power of the macro cell is
greater than that of the micro cell and therefore the uplink boundary does not coincide with
the downlink boundary for the macro and micro cells. As a result, the micro cell suffers uplink
interference from UEs served by the macro cell in the area between the uplink and the
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

281

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

downlink boundaries (referred to as macro-micro problem area hereinafter), and the HSDPA
or HSUPA throughput for UEs in this area decreases.
This feature resolves the preceding problems by using inter-frequency redirection, interfrequency handover, and micro cell dynamic RX sensitivity control.
This feature consists of three sub-features:

Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Redirection

Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Handover

Micro Cell Dynamic Rx Sensitivity Control

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits for a macro-micro co-carrier network:

Reduces strong uplink interference to the micro cell caused by UEs in the macro cell.

Increases the uplink capacity of the micro cell and the overall network capacity.

Increases the HSDPA and HSUPA throughput for UEs in the macro-micro problem area.

The increase in the overall network capacity is related to the number of micro cells,
geographical locations of micro cells, and the amount of traffic absorbed by micro cells. For
example, the average HSUPA throughput is increased by about 160% and the average HSDPA
throughput is increased by about 140% in the following scenario, compared with the scenario
where only two macro cells are deployed:

Two macro cells are deployed.

One macro cell is configured with three intra-frequency micro cells.

The three intra-frequency micro cells have this feature enabled.

Description
On networks where macro and micro cells operate on the same frequency band, the maximum
transmit power of the macro cell is 20 W and that of the micro cell is 1 W or 5 W. The
difference in the downlink pilot power between the macro cell and micro cell is 6 dB or 13
dB.
The difference in the pilot power causes two problem areas:

Soft handover (SHO) area

Non-SHO area

SHO Area
An SHO area meets the following criteria:

The best cell for a UE is the macro cell.

The link between the UE and the micro cell is added to the active set.

In an SHO area, both the macro cell and micro cell perform uplink inner-loop power control
on this UE. Inner-loop power control performed by the micro cell plays the leading role
because the uplink Signal-to-Interference Ratio (SIR) on the dedicated physical control
channel (DPCCH) received in the micro cell is greater than that received in the macro cell.
This affects the HSDPA or HSUPA throughput for the macro cell. In the worst case, the radio
link for the macro cell experiences loss of synchronization in the uplink.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

282

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Non-SHO Area
A non-SHO area meets the following criteria:

The best cell for a UE is the macro cell.

The link between the UE and the micro cell is not added to the active set.

The uplink path loss of the UE to the micro cell is smaller than that to the macro cell.

The UE is closer to the micro cell than to the macro cell. Therefore, the received signal
strength at the micro cell from the UE is greater than that received at the macro cell. The UE
causes greater interference to the micro cell than to the macro cell.
The following figure shows the two problem areas.

The sub-features Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Redirection and Macro & Micro Joint
Inter-frequency Handover transfer the UEs in the macro-micro problem area to an interfrequency macro cell that has no intra-frequency neighboring micro cells by means of
redirections (for UEs in the RRC connection setup phase) and handovers (for UEs in
connected mode). By doing so, few UEs will be performing services in the macro-micro
problem area, which avoids HSPA throughput drops in the macro cell and uplink interference
the UEs in the macro cell cause to the micro cell.
Upon detecting a UE in the macro-micro problem area, the Micro Cell Dynamic Rx
Sensitivity Control sub-feature reduces the receive sensitivity for the micro cell to eliminate
the difference between the uplink and downlink boundaries for the macro and micro cells.
This mitigates uplink interference to the micro cell caused by the UE in the macro cell and
improves the HSPA throughput for the UEs in the problem areas. When no UE is detected in
the macro-micro problem area, the Micro Cell Dynamic Rx Sensitivity Control sub-feature
restores the receive sensitivity for the micro cell. This prevents increased uplink interference
to the macro cell after the micro cell is desensitized.
It is good practice to use the three sub-features together when the target macro cell meeting
the UE transfer requirements is available. That is, the features Macro & Micro Joint Interfrequency Redirection and Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Handover transfer UEs in
the macro-micro problem area. If UE transfer fails, the Micro Cell Dynamic Rx Sensitivity
Control feature is performed to reduce the receive sensitivity for the micro cell. After the UEs
move out of the macro-micro problem area or their RRC connections are released, Micro Cell
Dynamic Rx Sensitivity Control restores the receive sensitivity for the micro cell.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

283

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Use only the Micro Cell Dynamic Rx Sensitivity Control feature if the target macro cell
meeting the UE transfer requirements is unavailable, for example, a single-carrier macro cell
or a multi-carrier macro cell is configured with only intra-frequency neighboring micro cells.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

284

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The NodeB must be BTS3902E or BTS3803E.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
If WRFD-15020101 Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Redirection is applied,
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package is required If WRFD-15020102 Macro &
Micro Joint Inter-frequency Handover is applied in the inter-band scenario, WRFD020110 Multi Frequency Band Networking Management is requried

3.5.31 WRFD-15020101 Macro & Micro Joint Interfrequency Redirection


Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Redirection redirects UEs in the macro-micro problem
area to an inter-frequency macro cell that has no intra-frequency neighboring micro cells
during the RRC connection setup phase.

Benefits
Working with the Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Handover and Micro Cell Dynamic
Rx Sensitivity Control features, Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Redirection provides
the following benefits for a macro-micro co-carrier network:

Reduces strong uplink interference to the micro cell caused by UEs in the macro cell.

Increases the uplink capacity of the micro cell.

Increases the HSDPA and HSUPA throughput for UEs in the macro-micro problem area.

Description
On macro-macro multicarrier networks where some carriers are configured with intrafrequency neighboring micro cells, this feature enables the RNC to determine whether the UE
sets up a PS service in the macro-micro problem area. The determination is based on the
signal quality difference between the macro and micro cells carried in the RRC connection
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

285

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

request sent from the UE. If the UE is in the macro-micro problem area, the RNC redirects the
UE to an inter-frequency macro cell that has no intra-frequency neighboring micro cells.
This feature avoids call drops or throughput drops for the UE that are caused by the difference
between the uplink and the downlink boundaries for the macro and micro cells. In addition,
this feature mitigates uplink interference to the micro cell caused by the UE.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package WRFD-150201 Macro & Micro Co-carrier
Uplink Interference Control

3.5.32 WRFD-15020102 Macro & Micro Joint Interfrequency Handover


Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature enables inter-frequency blind handovers in the macro-micro problem area for
UEs in connected mode. With this feature, UEs in connected mode are handed over to an
inter-frequency macro cell that has no intra-frequency neighboring micro cells.

Benefits
Working with Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Redirection and Micro Cell Dynamic Rx
Sensitivity Control, Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Handover provides the following
benefits for a macro-micro co-carrier network:

Reduces strong uplink interference to the micro cell caused by UEs in the macro cell.

Increases the uplink capacity of the micro cell.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

286

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Increases the HSDPA and HSUPA throughput for UEs in the macro-micro problem area.

Description
On macro-macro multicarrier networks where some carriers are configured with intrafrequency neighboring micro cells, this feature enables the RNC to determine whether the
HSDPA or HSUPA UE in connected mode is in the macro-micro problem area. The
determination is based on the signal quality difference between the macro and micro cells
reported by the UE. If the UE is in the macro-micro problem area, the RNC performs a blind
handover to transfer the UE to an inter-frequency macro cell that has no intra-frequency
neighboring micro cells.
This feature avoids call drops or throughput drops for the UE that are caused by the difference
between the uplink and the downlink boundaries for the macro and micro cells. In addition,
this feature mitigates uplink interference to the micro cell caused by the UE.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
When applied in the inter-band scenario, WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band
Networking Management is requried WRFD-150201 Macro & Micro Co-carrier Uplink
Interference Control

3.5.33 WRFD-15020103 Micro Cell Dynamic Rx


Sensitivity Control
Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature dynamically adjusts the receive sensitivity for the micro cell, depending on
whether there are UEs in the macro-micro problem area. If a UE is detected in the macroIssue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

287

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

micro problem area, the RNC instructs the micro cell to implement desensitization to reduce
the receive sensitivity to make the uplink boundary coincide with the downlink boundary.
This eliminates the difference between the uplink and the downlink boundaries for macro and
micro cells. When all UEs move out of the macro-micro problem area, the RNC instructs the
micro cell to restore the receive sensitivity to minimize uplink interference to the macro cell
caused by UEs in the micro cell.

Benefits
By either working with Macro & Micro Joint Inter-frequency Redirection and Macro & Micro
Joint Inter-frequency Handover or being used independently, this feature provides the
following benefits for a macro-micro co-carrier network:

Reduces strong uplink interference to the micro cell caused by UEs in the macro cell.

Increases the uplink capacity of the micro cell.

Increases the HSDPA and HSUPA throughput for UEs in the macro-micro problem area.

Description
With this feature, the micro cell adjusts its receive sensitivity by implementing
desensitization. Desensitization is a process in which the micro NodeB fills in the white noise
to the RRU receive channel. The micro NodeB makes the uplink boundary coincide with the
downlink boundary by adjusting desensitization intensity to eliminate the difference in the
uplink between the macro and micro cells.
Reducing the receive sensitivity for the micro cell raises the uplink transmit power for all UEs
in the micro cell. Therefore, the cell edge UEs in the micro cell, which are close to the macro
cell, causes increased interference to the macro cell. To minimize this interference, the receive
sensitivity for the micro cell is reduced only when there are UEs in the macro-micro problem
area. If a UE is detected in the macro-micro problem area, the RNC instructs the micro cell to
implement desensitization to reduce the receive sensitivity. If all UEs move out of the macromicro problem area or their RRC connections are released, the micro cell cancels
desensitization to restore the receive sensitivity.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The NodeB must be BTS3902E or BTS3803E.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Features
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

288

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

WRFD-150201 Macro & Micro Co-carrier Uplink Interference Control

3.5.34 WRFD-150232 Multiband Direct Retry Based


on UE Location
Model
QW1SMDRBUE00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
The Multiband Direct Retry Based on UE Location feature applies to
UMTS900/850+UMTS2100/1900 multiband networks. This feature is available during
service setup or reconfiguration. It implements UE steering between the high- and lowfrequency bands based on UE path loss and enables the 900 MHz or 850 MHz band to serve
cell edge users (CEUs), improving network coverage.

Benefits

The 900 MHz or 850 MHz band is mainly used to improve network coverage.

The 2100 MHz or 1900 MHz band is mainly used to absorb traffic, providing better user
experience.

Description
This feature consists of the following phases:
1.

After a UE sets up a radio resource control (RRC) connection, the RNC starts periodic
intra-frequency measurement control over the UE.

2.

The RNC obtains measurement reports from the UE.

3.

Upon receiving the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message from the CN, the RNC
calculates the UE path loss based on the measurement results. Then, the RNC performs
Directed Retry Decisions (DRDs) based on the UE path loss to select a suitable
frequency band for the UE:
a.

If the UE accesses a low-frequency cell and the UE path loss is lower than a
specified threshold, the RNC determines that the UE is located in the cell center.
Then, the RNC instructs the UE to preferentially access a high-frequency
neighboring cell through a blind handover.

b.

If the UE accesses a high-frequency cell and the UE path loss is higher than a
specified threshold, the RNC determines that the UE is located at the cell edge.
Then, the RNC instructs the UE to preferentially access a low-frequency
neighboring cell through a blind handover.

This feature improves user experience in the following ways:

UEs at the edge of high-frequency cells are handed over to lower-frequency cells
because low frequency band has good propagation performance.

In certain scenarios, UEs in the center of lower-frequency cells are handed over to highfrequency cells to reduce the lower-frequency cells load and guarantee the coverage.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

289

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

This feature is based on blind handovers and applies to scenarios where high- and lowfrequency carriers are under the same NodeB and cover the same area.
This feature is only applied to HSDPA users.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band
Networking Management WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

3.5.35 WRFD-140225 Narrowband Interference


Suppression
Model
QWMS00NBIS01

Availability
This feature was introduced in RAN15.0.

Summary
With Narrowband Interference Suppression, the NodeB scans the frequency spectrum within
the receive bandwidth of a UMTS carrier to rapidly identify stable narrowband interferences
(with millisecond-level changes in frequency or power) and dynamically configures a filter
stopband for the receiver to suppress narrowband interferences.

Benefits
This feature applies when strong narrowband interferences (for example, interferences caused
by active billboards and streetlamps) with stable changes in frequency and power exist. This
feature provides the following benefits:

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Efficiently reduces the uplink received total wideband power (RTWP)


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

290

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhances the uplink coverage capability

Increases the uplink throughput of a cell

Description
This feature applies only to UMTS 900/850 frequency bands.
The UMTS system uses the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology and its
frequency spectrum is flat within the bandwidth of a carrier. When external narrowband
interferences exist, a peak occurs in the frequency spectrum. With Narrowband Interference
Suppression, the NodeB scans the frequency spectrum within the receive bandwidth of a
UMTS carrier to rapidly identify stable narrowband interferences (with millisecond-level
changes in frequency or power) and dynamically configures a filter stopband for the receiver
to suppress narrowband interferences. The NodeB filters both wanted and interfering signals
in the frequency spectrum with stable narrowband interferences. In this way, narrowband
interferences are suppressed.
Enabling Narrowband Interference Suppression can suppress the interferences that have the
following characteristics:

The total interference bandwidth of an uplink carrier is lower than 400 kHz.

The number of interferences is 2 or less.

The interference power is 7 dB to 35 dB higher than the noise floor of the NodeB. Such
interferences increase RTWP.

The interference power is 7 dB to 35 dB higher than the noise floor of the NodeB. Such
interferences increase RTWP.

The interference power is stable within 40 ms if no channel attenuation occurs.

Enabling interference Suppression reduces the impact of interferences on the UMTS system
when the interference bandwidth is less than several hundred kHz and interferences have
millisecond-level changes in frequency and power.
Enabling the Narrowband Interference Suppression feature reduces the uplink RTWP, and all
related algorithms (such as scheduling and admission) use the RTWP values measured after
narrowband interference suppression.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The Narrowband Interference Suppression feature is supported only by NodeB 3900
series (except 3902E) configured with any of the RF modules that support UMTS
850/900 frequency bands. These RF modules include MRFUd, RRU3928, RRU3929,
MRFUe, RRU3926, and RRU3942. The BTS3803E does not support this feature.

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Network Units


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

291

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.5.36 WRFD-150246 Service Steering and Load


Sharing in CELL_FACH State
Model
Availability
This feature is introduced to RAN15.0 as a trial feature.
This feature is introduced to RAN16.0 as a commercial optional feature.

Summary
This feature implements service steering and load sharing between networks operating on
different frequencies and covering different geographical areas during the state transition from
CELL_PCH or URA_PCH to CELL_FACH (hereafter referred to as P2F). This is done by
considering the required service type, cell load, and redirection factor. The RAN determines
the required service type by using the CELL UPDATE message received from a UE during
the P2F state transition.

Benefits
This feature implements service steering and load sharing between networks operating on
different frequencies and covering different geographical areas during the P2F state transition,
thereby increasing the service setup success rate.

Description
During the P2F state transition, this feature allows the RAN to consider the required service
type using the CELL UPDATE message sent by a UE, cell load, and redirection factor to
implement service steering and load sharing between networks operating on different
frequencies and covering different geographical areas.
The service steering and load sharing during the P2F state transition are implemented through
P2F redirections.
The service steering and load sharing during RAB setup are implemented through blind
handovers. These two functions apply to scenarios where networks operate on different
frequencies and cover the same geographical area. In multiband networks or macro and micro
combined networks, service steering and load sharing are implemented through redirections
instead of through blind handovers, because cells operating on different frequencies do not
necessarily cover the same geographical area. The service steering and load sharing are
implemented through RRC redirections for UEs in idle mode and implemented through P2F
redirections for UEs during the P2F state transition.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

292

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UEs must comply with 3GPP Release 5 V590 or later.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.5.37 WRFD-160214 Load-based Intelligent State


Transition
Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
In cells with high Uu-interface load, this feature automatically set a set of state transition
parameters based on the habits of users' data transmission (data transmission interval and data
transmission size), to make different services bear on appropriate bearers.

Benefits
This feature not only guarantees user experience, but also increases UL and DL capacities by
5%20%.

Description
In cells with high Uu-interface load, RNC automatically set a set of state transition parameters
based on the habits of users' data transmission (data transmission interval and data
transmission size), to make UEs with low speed data transmission or without data
transmission be quickly switched from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH to reduce the power
consumption, at the same time to keep UEs with high speed data transmission in CELL_DCH
state to guarantee good user experience.
In cells with low Uu-interface load, the power resources are not limited on the Uu interface.
In this situation, RNC delays UEs with low speed data transmission or without data
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

293

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

transmission being switched from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH. Otherwise, UEs will be


switched from CELL_FACH back to CELL_DCH again when there is new high speed data
transmission, which affects user experience.
This feature not only guarantees user experience, but also increases UL and DL capacities by
5%20%.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
It's suggested to use with WRFD-020500 Enhanced Fast Dormancy, to make more UEs
involve state transition for high capacity gain.

3.6 GSM/UMTS Interoperability


3.6.1 WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS
Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g
Model
QM1SLHIURV00
QM1SLHIURP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.1.

Summary
This feature is based on Huawei private information exchange mechanism over the Iur-g
interface. With this feature, the traffic is distributed through the RRC redirection and loadbased handover from the 3G network to the 2G network on the basis of the service attributes

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

294

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

and the load of the 2G networks when 3G cell enters LDR status. In this manner, the load is
shared by the GSM network when the load of UMTS network is heavy.

Benefits
Based on Huawei private information exchange mechanism over the Iur-g interface, this
feature shares the load of the UMTS network by the GSM network. As a result, the load of the
GSM network and the UMTS network in the same coverage area remains even, the risk of
network congestion due to the load imbalance between networks is reduced, and the network
usage is increased.

Description
With this feature, the networks in the same coverage area have nearly the same load.
Therefore, the access failures during the MS access are greatly reduced, and each network has
remaining resources to provide a higher rate for the PS services. If the GSM cell and the
UMTS cell under the same MBSC with co-sited MBTSs have the same-coverage area, 3G-to2G handover algorithm enhancement in connection state is available based on the private
information exchange mechanism.
For the load management of the 3G cells, the inter-RAT handover based on load or HCS by
coverage is enhanced on the basis of Huawei private information exchange mechanism over
the Iur-g interface.With this feature, a more proper target cell can be selected for the interRAT handover. In addition, the probability of the ping-pong handover due to the high load of
the neighboring 2G cell can be minimized if the following requirements are met:

The inter-RAT neighboring cell with the lowest load is selected.

The difference between the load in the source cell and the load in the target 2G cell
exceeds the configured threshold.

The handover does not lead to congestion in the target cell.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
In the BSC6900, the interface board FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc must be configured
to support Iur-g.
In the BSC6910, only the FG2c, GOUc, or EXOUa board supports the Iur-g interface.

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Features

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

295

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load or WRFD-021200 HCS


(Hierarchical Cell Structure) GBFD-511101 GSM/UMTS Load Handover Enhancement
based on Iur-g

3.6.2 WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization


Based on Iur-g
Model
QW1SGUNACC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
This feature enables the exchange of messages containing the RAN Information Management
(RIM) information over the Iur-g interface between the RNC and BSC. The Iur-g protocol
stack complies with the 3GPP specifications. In this way, the NACC procedure for PS
services from a UMTS cell to a GSM cell does not require the information transfer via the
CN.

Benefits
This feature provides a solution that enables the NACC procedure when the CN does not
support the RIM procedure. The simulation results show that this feature helps shorten the
delay of PS handover by two seconds. As the delay is shortened, the user experience can be
improved.

Description
As indicated in the 3GPP specifications, the GERAN (P) SI is obtained through the RIM
procedure during the NACC procedure. The NACC procedure involves the RNC, UMTS
SGSN, GSM SGSN, and BSC. When this feature is applied, the GSM/UMTS GERAN (P) SI
information is transferred over the Iur-g interface between the base station controllers, without
being transferred via the CN.
This feature applies only to the Iur-g interface, which connects different base station
controllers. In such a case, the GERAN (P) SI information is transferred over the protocol
stack complying with the 3GPP specifications. If there is no Iur-g interface between UMTS
and GSM, the GERAN (P) SI information can be exchanged only via the CN, and accordingly
the NACC procedure can be implemented only through the CN, as specified in the 3GPP
specifications.
The following figure shows the network topology that supports this feature. As shown in the
figure, the Huawei RNCs and BSCs are connected through the Iur-g interface. This feature
applies to the BSC/RNC of other vendors only if it has passed the interoperability test (IOT).
Otherwise, the CN-involved NACC procedure is applied. For the BSC/RNC of other vendors,
the common cell reselection procedure is performed if the CN does not support the RIM
procedure.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

296

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

SHAPE

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
In the BSC6900, the interface board FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc must be configured
to support Iur-g. In the BSC6910, only the FG2c, GOUc, or EXOUa board supports the
Iur-g interface.

NodeB
NA

UE
UEs must support NACC procedure.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS
or WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage or WRFD-020305 InterRAT Handover Based on Service or WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on
Load or WRFD-021200 Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS)

3.6.3 WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing


Based on Iur-g
Model
QW1S0GULBV00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
This feature implements RRC redirection and the load-based GSM/UMTS handover through
the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE over the Iur-g interface. The Iur-g protocol stack
complies with the 3GPP specifications. With this feature, the traffic is distributed on the basis
of the service handover indicator and the load of the GSM network and UMTS network
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

297

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

during RRC connection setup or after RAB setup. In this way, a load balance is achieved
between the GSM network and UMTS network.

Benefits
This feature aims at striking a load balance between the GSM network and UMTS network. It
reduces the possibility of congestion in areas covered by both GSM and UMTS. The network
utilization is consequently increased. The simulation results show that this feature reduces the
percentage of invalid handovers between the GSM network and UMTS network by up to 6%
and decreases the access congestion rate during busy hours by up to 4%.

Description
As high-speed PS services are on great demand by a large number of GSM/UMTS dual-mode
handsets in well-established 2G/3G commercial networks, the load of UMTS network has
become increasingly heavy. Facing the situation, network operators focus on reducing the
congestion rate and making full utilization of the present network capacity. This feature can
efficiently address this issue. With this feature, the load balance between the GSM network
and UMTS network can be achieved. This helps reduce the possibility of network congestion
and the percentage of invalid inter-RAT handovers. As a result, the capacity of both the GSM
network and UMTS network can be fully utilized.
The following figure shows the applicable scenario where the GSM cell and UMTS cell have
the same coverage. Through the exchange of load information of the GSM network and
UMTS network over the Iur-g interface, redirection for load-balancing can be performed
during RRC connection setup, and load-based handover can be performed after RAB setup.
Redirection for load-balancing during RRC connection setup
Redirection for load-balancing during RRC connection setup is performed on a number of
UEs requesting CS services in a UMTS cell when the same-coverage GSM cell is lightly
loaded. In such a case, the RNC redirects a number of UEs to the GSM cell according to the
predefined distribution rate. The rate is considered as a probability rate with respect to the
redirection of a single UE. In this way, a load balance between the UMTS network and GSM
network can be maintained. SHAPE

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

298

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Load-based handover after RAB setup


Load-based handover from UMTS to GSM after RAB setup is performed on the basis of the
service handover indicator, PS service rate, and load difference between the UMTS network
and GSM network.
If the UE requests only the CS service in a UMTS cell, the RNC decides whether the UMTS
network or GSM network processes the request. The conditions on which the decision is
based are as follows:

The UE supports GSM services.

The service handover indicator assigned by the CN or configured at the RNC shows that
the CS service can be handed over to the GSM cell.

The target GSM cell is lightly loaded.

The load difference between the source UMTS cell and target GSM cell exceeds the
predefined threshold.

The GBSC/MBSC determines whether to perform the inter-RAT handover on a number of


UEs according to the predefined distribution rate. The rate is considered as a probability rate
with respect to the redirection of a single UE. In this way, the load between the GSM network
and UMTS network is balanced.
Network operators can decide which load-balancing scheme to be applied according to the
actual situations. The major differences between the two schemes are as follows:

As it is difficult to learn the traffic class requested by the UE, the traffic class mapping
needs to be verified before performing redirection for load-balancing. For example,
whether the GSM network supports the conversational service from the UMTS network
should be verified. If the traffic class is not supported, the RNC can decide whether the
UE can be handed over to the GSM network only after RAB setup is complete.

The redirection function does not require the UE to enable the compressed mode but it
may prolong the delay of service access and also affect user experience. For the
handover performed after RAB setup, the RNC can select a candidate GSM cell as the
target cell, which improves the efficiency of load balancing. In addition, the handover
success rate is higher than the redirection success rate. In contrast to the redirection
process, the inter-RAT handover process requires the UE to enable the compressed
mode. Therefore, the handover is a relatively long process, during which the UMTS
network still provides system resources for the UEs steered to the GSM network.

To guarantee its success rate, the redirection process requires that the source UMTS cell
and the target GSM cell should have the same coverage. Differently, the handover
process only requires that the GSM cell and the UMTS cell should be neighboring cells.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
In the BSC6900, the interface board FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc must be configured
to support Iur-g. In the BSC6910, only the FG2c, GOUc, or EXOUa board supports the
Iur-g interface.

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

299

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based
on Service GBFD-511103 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

3.6.4 WRFD-070007 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering


Based on Iur-g
Model
QW1S0GUTSV00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
This feature supports RRC redirection and GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover based on service.
With this feature, services are steered on the basis of the service handover indicator,
hierarchical network planning, and the load of the GSM network and UMTS network when an
MS accesses the network. Service steering enables UEs requesting speech to access the GSM
network and those requesting PS services to access the UMTS network.

Benefits
This feature helps operators to develop network services in hierarchies, which facilitates the
hierarchical network planning. With this feature, the spectrum utilization is increased. The
simulation results show that this feature reduces the percentage of invalid inter-RAT
handovers by up to 8% and increases the total capacity of the GSM and UMTS networks by
up to 8%.

Description
In the case of evolution from a legacy GSM network to a GSM&UMTS network, the UMTS
network usually has a larger capacity in the early stage. How to fully utilize the UMTS
network to carry high-speed services has become a major concern for network operators. This
feature provides the service steering function for the benefit of network planning. Service
steering helps improve the utilization of resources in each network and divide frequencies and
RATs into different hierarchies.
When a GSM cell and a UMTS cell have the same coverage, considering resource utilization
and QoS requirements, speech services are steered to the GSM cell whereas data services are
steered to the UMTS cell.
In addition to service steering, the selection of RAT for a UE to access also depends on the
network load.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

300

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

This helps optimize the network performance in the following aspects:

Tasks of different RATs can be clearly defined, which facilitates the planning of network
capacity.

Service steering can reduce interference between different traffic classes, increasing the
capacity of the UMTS network.

The flexible distribution of services to the UMTS and GSM cells can improve the
utilization of system resources, reduce the access congestion rate, and enhance the QoS
of the network.

This feature provides two load-balancing schemes. One is to redirect CS services to the GSM
cell during RRC connection setup, and the other is to perform load-based handovers between
the GSM and UMTS cells after RAB setup.
During the redirection process, if the UE initiating the RRC connection request in the UMTS
cell uses the protocol of R6 or later, the UE carries information about the access domain and
call type when the GSM cell under the same coverage is lightly loaded. If the access domain
is the CS domain and the call type is the speech service, the service is redirected to the GSM
cell. In this way, the UE initiating the request for speech services in the UMTS cell is steered
to the GSM cell. Therefore, more capacity of the UMTS system is reserved for the UEs
requesting high-speed PS services.
The load-based handover between the UMTS and GSM cells after RAB setup is an enhanced
function of the existing handover feature provided by Huawei. This function is determined by
the service handover indicator, PS service rate, and load of the UMTS/GSM system after
RAB setup.
If the UE requests only the CS service in a UMTS cell, the RNC hands the UE over to a
neighboring GSM cell when the following conditions are met:

The UE supports GSM services.

The neighboring GSM cell is lightly loaded.

If the UE requests only the PS service in a GSM cell, the BSC hands the UE over to a
neighboring UMTS cell when the following conditions are met:

The UE supports UMTS services.

The neighboring UMTS cell is lightly loaded.

Network operators can decide which load-balancing scheme to be applied according to the
actual situations. The major differences between the two schemes are as follows:

As it is difficult to learn the traffic class requested by the UE, the traffic class mapping
needs to be verified before performing redirection for load-balancing. For example,
whether the GSM network supports the conversational service from the UMTS network
should be verified. If the traffic class is not supported, the RNC can decide whether the
UE can be handed over to the GSM network only after RAB setup is complete.

The redirection function does not require the UE to enable the compressed mode but it
may prolong the delay of service access and also affect user experience. For the
handover performed after RAB setup, the RNC can select a candidate GSM cell as the
target cell, which improves the efficiency of service steering. In addition, the handover
success rate is higher than the redirection success rate. In contrast to the redirection
process, the inter-RAT handover process requires the UE to enable the compressed
mode. Therefore, the handover is a relatively long process, during which the UMTS
network still provides system resources for the UEs steered to the GSM network.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

301

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

To guarantee its success rate, the redirection process requires that the source UMTS cell
and the target GSM cell should have the same coverage. Differently, the handover
process only requires that the GSM cell and the UMTS cell should be neighboring cells.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
In the BSC6900, the interface board FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc must be configured
to support Iur-g. In the BSC6910, only the FG2c, GOUc, or EXOUa board supports the
Iur-g interface.

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service WRFD-020400 DRD
Introduction Package GBFD-511104 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g

3.6.5 WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on


Coverage
Model
QW1SIRHBCV00
QW1SIRHBCP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.

Summary
This feature is related to inter-RAT handover based on coverage such as Active Set Quality
measurement 2D, UE uplink QoS or emergency blind handover triggered by event 1F. This
feature deals with the inter-RAT handover caused by coverage reason or UE mobility.

Benefits
Inter-RAT handover improves flexibility in planning UMTS and GSM networks for the
network operator. It can also reduce cost by utilizing the existing GSM network resources and
provide coverage expansion, load sharing, and layered service.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

302

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Description
Inter-RAT handover from UMTS to GSM/GPRS Function is the procedure during which the
WCDMA RAN initiates handover (for CS services) or UE initiates cell reselection (for PS
services) to the GSM.
The GSM/GPRS system cannot perform CS and PS services simultaneously. Therefore, when
the handover for CS and PS domain combined services is determined,the CS service can be
handed over from the WCDMA system to the GSM/GPRS system successfully, but the PS
service will be suspended. After the CS call is finished, a resume request will be sent to the
2G SGSN to continue the PS service.
Inter-RAT handover from UMTS to GSM can be triggered by coverage reason, cell load,
service of UE and HCS. The trigger condition based on the cell load belongs to the optional
feature WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load. The trigger condition based on
the service assigned by CN node belongs to the optional feature WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT
Handover Based on Service. This feature deals with inter-RAT handover triggered by
coverage reason.
This trigger condition is based on the quality measurement. The compressed mode for DL or
UL will be triggered by event measurement report 2d for inter-frequency and inter-RAT
handover and stopped by event measurement report 2f. When the compressed mode triggered,
the RNC will start the inter-RAT measurement in UE to get the target cell to handover if interRAT neighboring cells are configured.
The related measurement quantity can be either Ec/N0 or RSCP. Moreover, event 3A and
period measurement report mode are supported and which measurement quantity and mode to
use can be configured by operator. The measurement related parameters include threshold,
hysteresis, and trigger delay time. The inter-RAT neighboring cell number can be up to 32.
The compressed mode includes two types, spreading factor reduction (SF/2) and high layer
approaches. The usage of type of compressed mode is decided by the RNC automatically,
according to the configurable spreading factor used in uplink and downlink.
Another measurement report 1F can also trigger inter-RAT handover, but compressed mode
will not be triggered in this scenario since such report means call drop may occur in any time
and there is no time to implement measurement procedure. The target cell to handover will be
selected based on the configurable parameter "Blind Handover Priority" in the neighboring
inter RAT cells, Priority 0-15 indicates the handover successful rate can be guaranteed, such
parameter will be certain as the result of network planning.
Inter-RAT handover triggered by UE TX power is available for PS BE, CS AMR services.
This function can be switched on/off by operator.
The procedure of Inter-RAT handover from UMTS to GSM is executed by Relocation
Preparation procedure at Iu interface and handover or cell change order command at Uu
interface.
When the UE is in CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH, or URA_PCH state, UMTS ' GSM handover
in PS domain is triggered through Inter-RAT Cell Re-selection from UMTS to GPRS
procedure. This procedure is triggered by UE and realized by Routing Area Update procedure.
The parameters for inter-RAT handover can be configured and are different for CS and PS
services respectively.
Since the GSM/GPRS system cannot perform CS and PS services simultaneously, Inter-RAT
handover from GSM/GPRS to UMTS Function can be divided to CS and PS individually.
On the UMTS side:
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

303

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

For CS: inter-RAT handover from GSM/GPRS to UMTS is comprised of Relocation Resource
Allocation, Relocation detect, Relocation complete procedure at Iu interface and
HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMPLETE message processing at Uu interface.
For PS: inter-RAT handover from GSM/GPRS to UMTS is the same as the setup of a PS
service.

Enhancement

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, the fallback of video telephony to speech before VP services are handed over
to the 2G system is supported to ensure continuous calls.

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, inter-RAT handover triggered by UE TX power or high UL BLER is
available for PS BE and CS AMR services.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE should support the relevant measurements and the procedure of handover. If the
video telephony fallback to speech (AMR) for inter-RAT handover is to be applied, the
UE needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
If the video telephony fallback to speech (AMR) for inter-RAT handover is to be applied,
the MSC needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.

Other Features
NA

3.6.6 WRFD-020309 Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL


QoS
Model
QW1SDQSHOV00
QW1SDQSHOP00

Availability
This feature is introduced in RAN10.0

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

304

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
When the load of voice and PS BE services is higher in the cell and downlink QoS drops, this
feature enables the UE to be handed over to an inter-RAT cell, guaranteeing QoS
requirements.

Benefits
DL QoS based inter-RAT handover provides the method to prevent call drop and guarantee
the QoS in inter-RAT networking, therefore, improving the network performance and
enhancing the end user experience.

Description
In the scenarios of severe fading and high load, the call drop could take place due to the
limitation of DL transmitted code power. In addition, coverage area is different for different
services in network planning, thereby the system should take actions in order to guarantee the
downlink QoS and keep the connection as could as possible. The evaluation of downlink QoS
status is on the basis of TCP (Transmitted Code Power) or RLC retransmission (only for R99
PS BE).
Once the downlink QoS is detected in bad condition, inter-RAT handover could be triggered if
in inter-system networking:

For AMR service, inter-RAT handover could be triggered based on TCP;

For PS BE service, inter-RAT handover could be triggered based on TCP and RLC
retransmission.

This feature can be switched on/off separately for AMR and PS BE services.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should support the relevant measurements and the procedure of handover.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

305

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

3.6.7 WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2


Model
QW1SPIRHPV00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.1.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R6.

Summary
This feature provides the inter-RAT relocation procedure for NACC and PS services to
shorten the interruption time of PS services caused by inter-RAT handover.

Benefits
The service interruption for PS service inter-system handover will be shorter or reduced. With
this feature, in scenario of inter-RAT handover, the user experience will be enhanced greatly
especially for the real-time PS service.

Description
The inter-RAT Handover Enhanced Package includes following features:

NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)

PS Handover Between UMTS and GPRS

With these features, the service interruption for PS service inter-system handover will be
shorter or reduced.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should also support NACC and PS handover.

Other Network Units


BSC should support NACC RIM (RAN Information Management) and PS handover
procedure.

CN
SGSN should also support NACC and PS handover.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Other Features
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

306

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage or WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT


Handover Based on Service or WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load or
WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)

3.6.8 WRFD-02030801 NACC(Network Assisted Cell


Change)
Model
QW1SPIRHPV00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.1 (BSC6900 only).

Summary
This feature supports the standard NACC procedure defined in 3GPP specifications.

Benefits
Compared with the normal cell change, the NACC can shorten a service interruption of about
four to eight seconds and greatly enhance user experience.

Description
The NACC refers to Network Assisted Cell Change from UTRAN to GERAN, which is
different from normal cell change order procedure, due to network providing GERAN (P) SI
to UE.
In today's GPRS networks (without NACC), cell re-selection may cause a service interruption
between 4 - 8 seconds, which obviously has an impact on the user experience. Similar
interruption time can be expected in mixed UMTS and GPRS networks, during UE cell reselection from UTRAN to GERAN.
GERAN (P)SI information is acquired by RIM (RAN Information Management) procedure.
In this feature, when handover from UTRAN to GERAN is to be performed, and if both UE
and network support NACC, then RNC will firstly trigger the RIM procedure. If (P)SI is
obtained successfully, cell change order from UTRAN message carrying the GERAN (P)SI
information will be sent. That is, NACC is completed, which is illustrated in the following
figure. Otherwise, normal cell change order would be performed.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

307

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should also support NACC handover.

Other Network Units


BSC should support NACC RIM (RAN Information Management).

CN
SGSN should also support NACC handover.

Other Features
WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2

3.6.9 WRFD-02030802 PS Handover Between UMTS


and GPRS
Model
QW1SPIRHPV00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.1.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

308

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
This feature enables the relocation of PS services between systems.

Benefits
In inter-system handover scenarios, this feature can greatly improve user perception,
especially for real-time PS services.

Description
The PS handover is different from NACC or normal cell change function, with which the
relocation procedure between 3G and 2G is applied, just like the CS inter-system handover.
With this feature, the service interruption for PS service inter-system handover is reduced by a
great extent.
In this feature, both handover from UTRAN to GERAN and handover from GERAN to
UTRAN are supplied. If both UE and network support PS handover, handover between
UTRAN and GERAN would be performed. Otherwise, either NACC or normal cell change
order would be selected.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
UE should also support PS handover.

Other Network Units


BSC should support PS handover procedure.

CN
SGSN should also support PS handover.

Other Features
WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2

3.6.10 WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on


Service
Model
QW1SINSHOV00
QW1SINSHOP00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

309

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
This feature supports 3G to 2G handover based on service attributes. When 3G and 2G
coexist, this feature enables the 3G traffic to be directed to the 2G system.

Benefits
This feature provides an inter-RAT handover mechanism according to the service. It can
balance the load between the two systems by transferring some kind of appropriate services to
GSM/GPRS and prevent the handover course from bad effect to services according to
attributes of the services.

Description
Inter-RAT Handover based on Service introduces a precondition for UMTS to GSM/GPRS
handover to UTRAN.
The RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sent from the CN to the RNC may include a
service handover IE. With this IE, the UTRAN determines whether to switch the
corresponding RAB from UTRAN to GSM/GPRS. The operation (the CN sends the RAB
ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message to the RNC) can also influence decisions made
regarding UTRAN-initiated inter-system handovers.
If this indicator is not included in the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message, the RNC can
use its pre-configured value for various kinds of services.

Enhancement

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, the fallback of video telephony to speech before VP services are handed over
to the 2G system is supported to ensure continuous calls.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
If the video telephony fallback to speech (AMR) for inter-RAT handover is to be applied,
the UE needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
If the video telephony fallback to speech (AMR) for inter-RAT handover is to be applied,
the MSC needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

310

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with GUL Co-Operation Audit and Optimization Service

3.6.11 WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on


Load
Model
QW1SIELHOV00
QW1SIELHOP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0.

Summary
When a cell is in initial congestion state, this feature enables some UEs in the cell to be
handed over to an inter-RAT co-coverage cell, reducing the load of the cell.

Benefits
This feature reduces the load of the cell in basic congestion and keeps the system in a safety
state.

Description
This feature is an important action for Load Reshuffling (LDR). It enables the system to
perform inter-RAT handover that handover UE to GSM/GPRS cell and reduce current cell
load.
This action is triggered when system detects that the current serving cell load is beyond the
pre-defined congestion threshold and a cell is entering a basic congestion state. Normally the
resource used for cell load level measurement includes the power resource, that used for
NodeB load level includes Iub transport resource and NodeB CE resource if Inter-RAT
handover is taken as an action for LDR. The load measurement is done both for UL and DL.
The system will select a UE to handover during the LDR according to the UE priority. If the
UEs have the same priority, the UE with higher service bit rate will be selected first.

Enhancement

RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, the user selection criterion considers the Traffic Class, ARP, and bear type
(R99 or HSPA) when calculating the UE priority.

RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, THP factor is added. the fallback of video telephony to speech before VP
services are handed over to the 2G system is supported to ensure continuous calls.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

311

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
If the video telephony fallback to speech (AMR) for inter-RAT handover is to be applied,
the UE needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
If the video telephony fallback to speech (AMR) for inter-RAT handover is to be applied,
the MSC needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.

Other Features
When this feature is used for HSDPA/HSUPA load control, WRFD-010610 HSDPA
Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with GUL Co-Operation Audit and Optimization Service

3.6.12 WRFD-020401 Inter-RAT Redirection Based on


Distance
Model
QW1SIRRBDP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0

Summary
If UE initialize a voice call with a long distance to the antenna, UMTS RAN can consider it as
a call attempt in the pilot contaminated area, and redirect it to GSM to avoid handover drop in
the following call procedure.

Benefits
The feature can reduce the drop rate in handover in a 2G/3G co-coverage area, solve the pilot
contamination problem and improve the network performance.

Description
Pilot contamination is a phenomenon that can cause call drop in handover.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

312

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

For example, in the picture, A' is the pilot contaminated area of Cell A.If UE setup a call in
area A', when it moves to the cells in blue which are not the neighboring cells of cell A, the
call will drop because cell A has no handover relationship with these cells.

For the voice call initiated in the contaminated area which is co-covered by 2G and 3G, RAN
will directly redirect it to GSM.
Operator can configure a distance threshold for each cell by LMT, the UE distance is
measured by RAN when RRC CONNECT REQUEST message is received, if the distance to
the antenna is beyond this threshold, the UE location will be seemed as in the contaminated
area, the system then redirect the call to GSM. In this way, the handover drop in the call
procedure will be reduced.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package

3.6.13 WRFD-020310 3G/2G Common Load


Management
Model
QW1S03CLMV00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

313

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

QW1S03CLMP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R5.

Summary
During inter-RAT handover or inter-system direct retry, this feature supports the transfer of
load information as stipulated in 3GPP specifications to reduce inter-RAT ping-pong
handover.

Benefits

Decrease the probability of 2G system overload or congestion due to inter-RAT handover


from 3G to 2G based on service or load.

Avoid 3G system overload due to inter-RAT handover from 2G to 3G.

Avoid ping-pong handover between 3G and 2G.

Description
The 3G/2G Common Load Management applies to inter-RAT handover and inter system
direct retry. The load of source cell and target cell are considered during inter-RAT handover
from 3G to 2G or from 2G to 3G and inter system direct retry.
During inter-RAT handover from 3G to 2G, the RNC will send the load information of the
source cell to 2G through RELOCATION REQUIRED message and may get the load
information of target cell from RELOCATION COMMAND message. If the load of target
cell is in a high level (over the threshold configured) and the inter-RAT handover from 3G to
2G is triggered not because of coverage, then the inter-RAT handover from 3G to 2G will be
cancelled.
During inter-RAT handover from 2G to 3G, the RNC may get the load information of the
source cell from RELOCATION REQUEST message. If the load of source cell is not in a
high level (less than the threshold configured) and the inter-RAT handover from 2G to 3G is
triggered not because of coverage, then the inter-RAT handover from 2G to 3G will be
refused.
During inter system direct retry, the procedure and decision is similar to that of inter-RAT
handover from 3G to 2G. If the load of target cell is in a high level (over the threshold
configured), inter system direct retry will be cancelled.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

314

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

UE
NA

Other Network Units


BSS should support this feature.

CN
CN should support this feature.

Other Features
WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service or WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT
Handover Based on Load or WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure) or
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package or WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover
Phase 2

3.7 UMTS/LTE Interoperability


3.7.1 WRFD-020126 Mobility Between UMTS and LTE
Phase1
Model
QW1SMBUL1P00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
This feature covers the following functions:

UE cell selects/reselects between LTE and UMTS network.

UE with PS service handovers from the LTE network to the UMTS network are
supported.

Benefits
This feature improves the high-speed service experience of LTE UEs in the area
simultaneously covered by the UMTS network and the LTE network. In addition, in the area
not covered by the LTE network or when the LTE network is heavily loaded, some UEs with
PS service are handed over from the LTE network to the UMTS network.

Description
This feature provides a basic mobility solution for the operators who want to evolve from
UMTS to LTE.

UE cell selects/reselects between UMTS and LTE network.

The RNC supports broadcasting the information about LTE frequencies in a cell and the
parameters related to cell select/reselect. Therefore, the UEs in idle state can camp on an LTE
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

315

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

cell preferentially. In this way, on one hand, the UEs can obtain better experience of highspeed services in the area covered by the LTE network; on the other hand, the potential cell
load and network load of the UMTS network are reduced because these UEs gain access to
the LTE network.

UE with PS service handovers from the LTE network to the UMTS network are
supported.

At the early construction stage of the LTE network, operators may plan the LTE network
coverage only in hot spot areas. When some UEs leave the hot spot area or the LTE system
load is heavy, these UEs need to be handed over from the LTE network to the UMTS network.
With this feature, the RNC can processes the migration requests from the LTE system. This
feature does not support the UE handover from the UMTS network to the LTE network.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

316

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NodeB
NA

UE
UE has the capability of both UMTS and LTE.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
LTE should also support this feature.

Other Features
NA

3.7.2 WRFD-020129 Service-Based PS Service


Redirection from UMTS to LTE
Model
QW1SPSRFUL00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
If a UMTS/LTE dual-mode UE establishes services in the UMTS network, this feature allows
the RNC to redirect the UE to the LTE network when both UMTS and LTE coverage is
available and the UE establishes only PS services.

Benefits
In a UMTS/LTE multi-layer network where PS handover from UMTS to LTE is not supported
by UE or network, this feature redirects the UEs that process only PS services from the
UMTS network to the LTE network, improving user experience for PS service users.

Description
In a UMTS/LTE multi-layer network, if UE or network does not support the handover from
UMTS to LTE, then the UE will be redirected from UMTS to LTE, the following conditions
must be met:
1. The conditions for PS handover from UMTS to LTE are met and the UE or the network
cannot support the handover from UMTS to LTE.
2. The UE supports both UMTS and LTE.
3. The UE is processing only the PS services. The RAB assignment message from the SGSN
does not indicate that the PS services cannot be handed over to the LTE network.
The RNC carries the LTE frequency information in the RRC Connection Release message and
directs the UE to access the LTE network.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

317

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement

RAN15.0
In RAN15.0, the following functions are added:

Triggering redirection when the best cell changes

Support for blind redirection

Added frequency information in the SIB19 message for redirection or blind


redirection.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must support both UMTS and LTE. In addition, it must support 3GPP Release 8
(Sep. 2008) or later.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
CN should support cooperation from UMTS to LTE.

Other Features
NA

3.7.3 WRFD-140218 Service-Based PS Handover


from UMTS to LTE
Model
QW1SSBPSHUL0

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
If a UMTS and LTE dual-mode UE in a UMTS and LTE overlapping coverage area processes
only PS services in the UMTS network, Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE
allows the RNC to hand over the PS services to the LTE network.

Benefits
The benefits of this feature are as follows:

Improved user experience for PS services

Reduced service interruption time compared with redirection

Increased LTE network utilization

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

318

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Description
This feature allows the RNC to hand over a UE and its PS service to the LTE network in
either of the following scenarios:

The UE in the UMTS and LTE overlapping coverage area originates a PS service in the
UMTS network.

For a UE in the UMTS and LTE overlapping coverage area that is handed over from the
LTE network to the UMTS network due to a CS fallback (CSFB), after the UE
terminates the CS voice service in the UMTS network, the UE still has ongoing PS
services.

The implementation is as follows:


1. The RNC sends the SGSN a Relocation Required message, which contains the information
about the target LTE cell.
2. The SGSN forwards the relocation request to the MME.
3. After the LTE side has made preparations for the inter-RAT handover, the MME instructs
the SGSN to send a Relocation Response message to the RNC.
4. Upon receipt of the Relocation Command message forwarded by the SGSN from the
MME, the RNC instructs the UE to hand over to the target eNodeB.
To use this feature, both the UMTS network and the UE must support LTE measurement and
UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers.
This feature supports interoperability between the UMTS network and the TDD LTE network
and between the UMTS network and the FDD LTE network. The TDD LTE and FDD LTE
networks, however, cannot coexist.
When the MOCN feature is enabled in the target LTE network, Service-Based PS Handover
from UMTS to LTE must not be enabled if the UMTS and LTE networks do not share the
same PLMN. Otherwise, call drops may occur.

Enhancement

RAN15.0
In RAN15.0, the PS handover can be triggered when the best cell changes.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE must comply with 3GPP Release 8 or later and support UMTS-to-LTE PS
handovers and LTE measurement.

Other Network Units


The eNodeB and MME must support UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers.

CN
The SGSN must support UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

319

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Other Features
None

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with GUL Co-Operation Audit and Optimization Service

3.7.4 WRFD-150216 Load Based PS Redirection from


UMTS to LTE
Model
QW1S0LBPSR00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature enables the RNC to redirect a UMTS/LTE dual-mode UE processing only PS
services to the LTE network when the UE is located in the hybrid network coverage of UMTS
and LTE and the serving UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state.

Benefits
This feature reduces the possibility of congestion for a UMTS network by allowing more UEs
in the UMTS network to be redirected to the LTE network. In addition, this feature helps
improve the LTE network resource utilization at the early stage of LTE network deployment.

Description
In the hybrid network coverage of UMTS and LTE, if UEs, the UMTS network, or the LTE
network does not support the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover, operators can use this feature to
redirect UEs to the LTE network where UEs will reestablish their PS services. This feature is
applicable only when the following conditions are met:

The serving UMTS cell meets the conditions for load reshuffling (LDR).

The UE to be redirected supports both UMTS and LTE.

The UE to be redirected processes only PS services, and all the processed PS services
can be established on the LTE network. In the RAB assignment message sent from the
SGSN, there is no indication that the PS services processed by the UE cannot be
established on the LTE network.

Redirection is categorized into blind redirection and measurement-based redirection. If the


UE in connected mode does not support measurements on the neighboring LTE cell and
allows blind redirection to the LTE network, the RRC Connection Release message sent from
the RNC to the UE will include the LTE frequency information, instructing the UE to
implement redirection. If the UE in connected mode supports measurements on the
neighboring LTE cell, the RNC instructs the UE to enter the compressed mode for
measurements and the RRC Connection Release message will include the frequency of the
neighboring LTE cell that was reported by the UE.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

320

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UEs must support both UMTS and LTE and support 3GPP Release 8 or later.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.7.5 WRFD-150217 Load Based PS Handover from


UMTS to LTE
Model
QW1S0LBPSH00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature enables the RNC to hand over a UMTS/LTE dual-mode UE processing only PS
services to the LTE network when the UE is located in the hybrid network coverage of UMTS
and LTE and the serving UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state.

Benefits
This feature reduces the possibility of congestion for a UMTS network by allowing more UEs
in the UMTS network to be handed over to the LTE network. Compared with PS redirection,
PS handover shortens the service interruption duration, improving user experience. In
addition, this feature helps improve the LTE network resource utilization at the early stage of
LTE network deployment.

Description
In the hybrid network coverage of UMTS and LTE, if UEs, the UMTS network, and the LTE
network support the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover, operators can use this feature to hand over
UEs to the LTE network. This feature is applicable only when the following conditions are
met:
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

321

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

The serving UMTS cell meets the conditions for LDR.

The UE to be handed over supports both UMTS and LTE.

The UE to be handed over processes only PS services, and all the processed PS services
can be established on the LTE network. In the RAB assignment message sent from the
SGSN, there is no indication that the PS services processed by the UE cannot be
established on the LTE network.

The neighboring LTE cell meets the conditions for the UMTS-to-LTE handover.

The procedure for the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover is briefed as follows:


1.

The RNC sends the SGSN a Relocation Required message, which contains the
information about the target LTE cell.

2.

The SGSN forwards the Relocation Required message to the MME.

3.

After the LTE network is ready for the inter-RAT handover, the MME instructs the
SGSN to send a Relocation Response message to the RNC.

4.

Upon receipt of the Relocation Response message from the SGSN, the RNC instructs the
UE to be handed over to the target eNodeB.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UEs must support:
3GPP Release 8 or later
UMTS-to-LTE PS handover
Measurements on the neighboring LTE cell in connected mode

Other Network Units


The eNodeB and MME must support the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover.

CN
The SGSN must support the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover.

Other Features
NA

3.7.6 WRFD-150219 Coverage Based PS Redirection


from UMTS to LTE
Model
QW1S00CBPS00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

322

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature enables the RNC to redirect a UMTS/LTE dual-mode UE processing only PS
services to the LTE network when:

The UE is located in the hybrid network coverage of UMTS and LTE.

The UMTS signal quality received at the UE is poor.

The LTE signal quality received at the UE is good.

When the UMTS signal quality received at the UE is very poor, the RNC can redirect the UE
to the LTE network through blind redirection.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature provides an alternative to the PS handover. When UEs, the UMTS network,
or the LTE network does not support the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover, this feature
enables PS redirection to the LTE network.

When the UMTS signal quality is poor and the LTE signal quality is good, this feature
allows the UE to be redirected to the LTE network to ensure the continuity of PS
services.

When the UMTS signal quality is very poor, this feature allows blind redirection to the
LTE network, reducing service drops.

During UE redirection to the LTE network, this feature allows the RNC to obtain the
LTE frequency from the system information or from the neighboring LTE cell. If the
RNC obtains the LTE frequency from the system information, operators can eliminate
the workload for configuring the neighboring LTE cell.

When the UMTS signal quality is poor and the LTE signal quality is good, the RNC
decides whether to initiate measurements on the neighboring LTE cell and whether to
redirect a UE to the LTE network by considering the UE capabilities and the redirection
switch status. This feature is applicable only when the following conditions are met:

1.

The UE to be redirected supports both UMTS and LTE and supports measurements on
the neighboring LTE cell.

2.

The UE to be redirected processes only PS services, and all the processed PS services
can be established on the LTE network.

Description

With this feature, the RNC sends the UE an RRC Connection Release message to
instruct the UE to access the LTE network. This message includes the LTE frequency
information. The RNC obtains the LTE frequency information from the system
information or the neighboring LTE cell, depending on the redirection switch status.

When the UMTS signal quality is very poor, the RNC redirects the UE to the LTE
network through blind redirection without measurements on the neighboring LTE cell.
This feature is applicable only when the following conditions are met:

1.

The UE to be redirected supports both UMTS and LTE.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

323

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

2.

3 Radio & Performance

The UE to be redirected processes only PS services, and all the processed PS services
can be established on the LTE network.
With this feature, the RNC sends the UE an RRC Connection Release message to
instruct the UE to access the LTE network. This message includes the LTE frequency
information. The RNC obtains the LTE frequency information from the system
information or the neighboring LTE cell, depending on the redirection switch status.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UEs must support both UMTS and LTE and support 3GPP Release 8 or later.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
It is recommended that this feature be used together with the GUL Co-operation Audit and
Optimization Service.

3.7.7 WRFD-150220 Coverage Based PS Handover


from UMTS to LTE
Model
QW1S0CBPSH00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature enables the RNC to hand over a UMTS/LTE dual-mode UE processing only PS
services to the LTE network when:

The UE is located in the hybrid network coverage of UMTS and LTE.

The UMTS signal quality received at the UE is poor.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

324

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

The LTE signal quality received at the UE is good.

Benefits
When the UMTS signal quality is poor and the LTE signal quality is good, this feature allows
the UE to be handed over to the LTE network to ensure the continuity of PS services and
avoid service drops. Compared with PS redirection, PS handover shortens the service
interruption duration, improving user experience.

Description
When the UMTS signal quality is poor and the LTE signal quality is good, the RNC decides
whether to initiate measurements on the neighboring LTE cell and whether to hand over a UE
to the LTE network by considering the UE capabilities and the handover switch status. This
feature is applicable only when the following conditions are met:

The UE to be handed over supports both UMTS and LTE and supports measurements on
the neighboring LTE cell.

The UE to be handed over processes only PS services, and all the processed PS services
can be established on the LTE network.

The procedure for the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover is briefed as follows:


1.

The RNC sends the SGSN a Relocation Required message, which contains the
information about the target LTE cell.

2.

The SGSN forwards the Relocation Required message to the MME.

3.

After the LTE network is ready for the inter-RAT handover, the MME instructs the
SGSN to send a Relocation Response message to the RNC.

4.

Upon receipt of the Relocation Response message from the SGSN, the RNC instructs the
UE to be handed over to the target eNodeB.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UEs must support:
Both UMTS and LTE
3GPP Release 8 or later
UMTS-to-LTE PS handover
Measurements on the neighboring LTE cell in connected mode

Other Network Units


The eNodeB and MME must support the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

CN
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

325

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

The SGSN must support the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover.

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
It is recommended that this feature be used together with the GUL Co-operation Audit and
Optimization Service.

3.7.8 WRFD-150231 RIM Based UMTS Target Cell


Selection for LTE
Model
QW1S0RBUTC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature enables the eNodeB to obtain the load information of the UMTS cells through the
RAN Information Management (RIM) procedure and select the target UMTS cell base on the
cell load during redirection or handover from LTE to UMTS. This can increase the success
rate of redirection and handover from LTE to UMTS and reduce inter-RAT ping-pong
handover.

Benefits
This feature can increase the success rate of redirection and handover from LTE to UMTS and
reduce inter-RAT ping-pong handover.

Description
The redirection or handover from LTE to UMTS, such as CS fallback or LTE to UMTS PS
handover based on load, may fail when the target UMTS cell is congested. This will impact
the success rate of redirection and handover from LTE to UMTS, bring unnecessary signaling
process for handover preparing in eNodeB and delay the handover.
This feature enables the eNodeB to obtain the load information of the UMTS cells through the
RIM procedure. Therefore the eNodeB is able to select the proper target UMTS cell according
to the cell load.
Upon receiving a RIM request for the UMTS cells load information from the eNodeB, the
RNC sends the UMTS cells load information to the eNodeB through the RIM procedure. If
the UMTS cell load changes, the RNC sends the updated cell load information to the LTE
network through the RIM update procedure.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

326

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
The CN must support the RIM procedure in 3GPP release 9.

Other Features
NA

3.7.9 WRFD-140226 Fast Return from UMTS to LTE


Model
QW1SFRFULV00
QW1SFRFULP00

Availability
This feature is introduced to RAN14.0 as a Trial feature.
This feature is introduced to RAN15.0 as a commercial Optional feature.

Summary
In a UMTS+LTE network, a UE initiating a voice service on the LTE network may shift to the
UMTS network through CS fallback (CSFB) when the LTE network does not support voice
services. After the UE finishes the voice service, this feature enables the UE to fast return to
the LTE network.

Benefits
This feature reduces the cell reselection delay within 480 ms from 8s.

Description
In a UMTS+LTE hybrid network, after a UE is shifted to the UMTS network through CSFB
and finishes the voice service, this feature is enabled by the RNC. The RRC CONNECTION
RELEASE message carries information about LTE frequencies and instructs the UE to fast
select an LTE cell and camp on the LTE network.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

327

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
The UE supports UMTS and LTE. If CS fallback to UMTS is implemented by means of
redirections, the UE must support 3GPP Release 9.4.0.

Other Network Units


If CS fallback to UMTS is implemented by means of PS handovers, the HANDOVER
REQUEST message sent to the RNC by the MME must carry the IE cause set to "CS
Fallback triggered" or CSFB Information set to "CSFB" or "CSFB High Priority".

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.8 QoS
3.8.1 WRFD-010505 Queuing and Pre-Emption
Model
QW1SQUEUEV00
QW1SQUEUEP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Summary
This feature enables service differentiation when the network is congested to provide better
services for high-priority users.

Benefits
This feature provides operators with a method to differentiate users according to their priority.
High priority users can obtain the system resources with high priority in case of resource
limitation. In this way, operators can provide better service to those high priority users.

Description
Queuing and Pre-emption are two functions related to access control and are methods for
differentiating services. It enables operators to provide different services by setting different
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

328

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

priorities, which will affect the user call setup success rate during the call setup procedure. If
there are not enough resources and a new call is not admitted to access to the network, high
priority user will have more chances to access to the network than low priority users by
queuing or pre-empting other low priority users.
The priority information is obtained from the RAB parameters including TC (Traffic Class),
ARP (Allocation / Retention Priority), and THP (Traffic Handling Priority for interactive
service), in the message of RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST. The RNC will assign the user
priority according to TC, ARP, as well as THP.
Pre-emption will take action if admitting a call fails due to lack of resource. The service with
the attribution of Pre-emption Capability and Pre-emption Vulnerability indicates the service
ability of pre-empt and pre-emption vulnerability. The pre-emption capability indicates the
pre-emption capability of the request on other RAB, and pre-emption vulnerability indicates
the vulnerability of the RAB to pre-emption of other RAB.
If a new call pre-emption does not take effect due to some reasons such as no service can be
pre-empted or current call has no ability of pre-empting other calls, the call will perform
queuing function if queuing ability is allowed.
To support the call queuing function, there's an establishment queue (actually a buffer) per
cell for RNC to keep the RABs when a call queuing is triggered. A configurable timer is used
to indicate how long the associated RAB can be queued and the maximum waiting length is
configured according to the Priority Levels. Resource re-allocation for the RABs in the queue
is done periodically.
If a queued RAB failed due to expiry of the maximum waiting length, it will be removed from
the queue, and the RNC will report in a subsequent RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE
message indicating that the RAB failed to setup or modify with IE Cause "queuing Expiry".
Queuing and pre-emption can be applied into following procedures:

New RAB request

Existing RAB modification request

Partial RAB assignment failure request

SRNS relocation request

The users can also be divided to Golden/Silver/Copper level which is mapped from ARP, and
the mapping relationship is configurable. And the Gold user is not allowed to be pre-empted.

Enhancement

RAN5.0
In RAN5.0, only ARP is considered for candidate calls to be pre-empted. The
functionalities of pre-emption and queuing are applied for R99 and HSDPA, but DCH
service can only pre-empt other DCH services with low priority and HSDPA can only
pre-empt other HSDPA services with low priority.

RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, the priority is enhanced by introducing RAB integrate priority (TC toppriority or ARP top-priority), user integrate priority and user priority (Gold, Silver and
Copper) considering Traffic Class (TC) and Carrier Type as parameters when selecting
candidate call to be pre-empted.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

RAN6.0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

329

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

In RAN6.0, THP is considered for interactive service if TC and ARP have the same
priority. In addition, the functionalities of pre-emption and queuing are also applied for
HSUPA, but HSUPA can only pre-empt other HSUPA services with low priority.

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, there is an enhancement which ARP should be considered in the case of
different TC. This improvement is only applied for Streaming and I/B traffic class. That
is, the ARP of user to be pre-empted should be lower than or equal to that of a new
request user in the case of different traffic classes. For example, streaming service can
preempt I/B with equal or lower ARP.
In RAN10.0, pre-emption can take place between HSDPA and DCH services due to
limitation of power and Iub transmission resources. ARP, TC and THP are also used for
pre-emption. For example, Gold R99 user will be able to preempt a silver HSPA user,
and a Gold HSPA user will be able to preempt Silver R99 user.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
This feature need the CN bring the ARP IE to RNC during RAB assignment procedure
so that RNC can get the service priority with those RAB parameters.

Other Features
This feature requires optional feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package when HSDPA / HSUPA queuing and Preemption are required.

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Differentiated QoS Service

3.8.2 WRFD-021103 Access Class Restriction


Model
QW1S00ACRV00
QW1S00ACRP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN5.1.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

330

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
When the RNC's Signaling Processing Unit(SPU) is overloaded as while as too many UEs
initiate random access, this feature allows operator to control the access priority according to
UEs' Access Class (AC) via broadcasting System Information Block 3 (SIB3).

Benefits
The benefit of this feature is to decrease the signaling processing load of SPU in certain level
via controlling the UEs' access sequence, as well as to increase the UEs' access rate.

Description
The PRACH resources (that is, access slots and preamble signatures for FDD), timeslot (with
specific frame allocation and channelization code for 3.84 Mcps TDD and SYNC_UL codes
(with specific frame allocation) for 1.28 Mcps TDD) may be divided between different Access
Service Classes in order to provide different priorities of RACH usage.
Access Service Classes shall be numbered in the range 0 i NumASC 7. The ASC 0 has
the highest priority, and the ASC 7 has the lowest priority. The ASC 0 shall be used in case of
Emergency Call or for reasons with equivalent priority.
A mapping between Access Class (AC) and Access Service Class (ASC) shall be indicated by
the information element "AC-to-ASC mapping" in SIB 5 or SIB 5bis. Access Classes shall
only be applied at initial access, that is, when an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message is
sent.
In SIB 3/4, IE "Access Class Barred list "is used to indicate which access class is barred or
allowed. UE reads its access class stored in SIM and compares it with that in SIB 3/4. And
then UE will know whether it can access into this cell.
Access Class Restriction information will be updated in the following scenarios:

When the cell is in signaling overload, "Access Class Barred list" will be updated
automatically and some access classes are barred to prevent too many users accessing
into the cell; when cell signaling load becomes low, more access classes will be
unbarred.

Enhancement

RAN15.0
Based on 3GPP protocols, RAN15.0 introduces the Paging Permission with Access
Control (PPAC) function for UEs complying with 3GPP Release 8 or later. This function
enables UEs belonging to a barred AC to respond to paging or perform location
registration/update. Therefore, when an AC is barred, UEs belonging to the AC can still
be called quickly.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
Only UEs complying with 3GPP Release 8 or later support the PPAC function.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

331

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Differentiated QoS Service

3.8.3 WRFD-050424 Traffic Priority Mapping onto


Transmission Resources
Model
QW1S00TPMV00
QW1S00TPMP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature enables the dynamical mapping of the services onto the transport bearers
according to the TC, ARP, and THP of the user. The operator can flexibly configure the
mapping to fulfill differentiated services while guaranteeing the QoS.

Benefits
This feature implements the mapping from traffic priorities to transmission resources and
provides flexible configuration means for differentiated services and for guarantee of QoS.

Description
This feature dynamically maps the services onto the transport bearers, according to the TC
(Traffic Class), ARP (Allocation/Retention Priority), and THP (Traffic Handling Priority for
interactive service) of the user. The operator can flexibly configure the mapping of service
types onto transmission resources. According to different combinations of TC+ARP+THP, the
operator can choose the transmission resources with different QoS requirements to fulfill
differentiated services while guaranteeing the QoS.
TC\A
RP

Gold

R99
conver
sation
al

R99 C

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Silver

Bronze

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

332

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

TC\A
RP

Gold

Silver

Bronze

R99
stream
ing

R99 S1

R99 S2

R99 S3

R99
interac
tive

THP

THP

THP

THP

THP

THP

THP

THP

THP

High

Middl
e

Low

High

Middl
e

Low

High

Middl
e

Low

R99
I11

R99
I12

R99
I13

R99
I21

R99
I22

R99
I23

R99
I31

R99
I32

R99
I33

R99
backgr
ound

R99 B1

HSPA
conver
sation
al

HS C

HSPA
stream
ing

HS S1

HSPA
interac
tive

THP

THP

THP

THP

THP

THP

THP

THP

THP

High

Middl
e

Low

High

Middl
e

Low

High

Middl
e

Low

HS
I11

HS
I12

HS
I13

HS
I21

HS
I22

HS
I23

HS
I31

HS
I32

HS
I33

HSPA
backgr
ound

HS B1

R99 B2

R99 B3

HS S2

HS S3

HS B2

HS B3

ATM transport
In ATM transport, the service data with different priorities is mapped to different ATM
service types. The practical mapping can be flexibly configured.

IP transport
In IP transport, the service data with different priorities is mapped to the IP data stream
with different PHB attributes. The practical mapping can be flexibly configured.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

333

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

The mapping between service bearer and transmission resource also support the primary and
secondary path configuration. In the admission of transmission resource, the primary path is
considered for the service setup firstly, and secondary path will be selected in case of the lack
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

334

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

of primary path bandwidth or failure of the primary path, with this feature, both transmission
reliability and transport efficiency can be improved.
In RAN11.0, the load balancing algorithm is introduced for the path selection to prevent the
uneven load distribution on the primary and secondary path which may lead to the decrease of
transport efficiency. That is, when the load of primary path is too high and the difference with
the secondary path is higher than a configurable threshold, the secondary path will be
selected.

Enhancement

RAN11.0
In RAN11.0, the mapping from AAL2 path types to ATM service types is removed,
which makes the priority mapping of ATM services more flexible.
In RAN11.0, the mapping from IP path types to PHBs is removed, which makes the
priority mapping of IP services more flexible.
In RAN11.0, the load balancing algorithm is introduced for the transmission path
selection to enhance transmission efficiency improvement.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Differentiated QoS Service

3.8.4 WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on


SPI Weight
Model
QW1SDSBSWM00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

335

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
HSPA users share Uu interface resources, CE resources, and Iub interface resources. If these
resources cannot provide the maximum bit rate (MBR) for all online HSPA users,
differentiated resource allocation can be performed on users according to user priority or
service type (interactive or background). The differentiation in resource allocation is
controlled by SPI weight.

Benefits
With the development of the HSPA technology, HSPA channels have become the main radio
bearer of UMTS services. This feature is mainly applicable to HSPA channels. It provides
users with differentiated services according to user priority or service type, so that the service
quality of high-priority users is preferentially ensured and high-priority services are
preferentially processed when resources are insufficient. In addition, while meeting the
requirement of GBR, the ratio of the user throughput will try to reach the ratio of SPI weight.
There are three user priorities: gold, silver, and copper. If gold, silver, and copper users are in
the same radio environment, the ratio of user throughput of these users is equivalent to the
ratio of SPI weights of the users. Here is an example:

The ratio of SPI weights of gold, silver, and copper users is 9:3:1.

Services are processed in a cell whose total available bandwidth is 3 Mbit/s.

The cell has a total number of 10 users, and all the users have a large amount of data to
transmit but resources are insufficient.

The mean user throughput of gold, silver, and copper users is 1.1 Mbit/s, 380 kbit/s, and
120 kbit/s, which is equivalent to 9:3:1.

The following table shows the details:


User Priority

Gold

Silver

Copper

Mean Cell
Throughput

3 Mbit/s

Number of Online
Users

Mean User
Throughput

1.1 Mbit/s

380 kbit/s

120 kbit/s

This feature supports differentiated tariff policies, for example, high-tariff users are provided
with better services. It also supports differentiated service quality according to service type
(interactive or background), for example, background services are provided with low service
quality if network bandwidth is insufficient.

Description
HSPA users share Uu interface resources, CE resources, and Iub interface resources, which
are allocated according to their respective resource scheduling algorithms. If this feature is not
enabled, the resource scheduling algorithms mainly ensure the fairness between BE services
(interactive and background services). That is, the resource scheduling algorithms fairly
allocate resources between users based on the guaranteed bit rate (GBR) and maximum bit
rate (MBR) required.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

336

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

After this feature is enabled, SPI weights can be set for user priorities (gold, silver, and
copper). Resources are allocated according to the set SPI weights. The quality of services with
high SPI weight is preferentially ensured. For example, if Uu interface resources are
insufficient, higher data rate or shorter transmission delay is achieved preferentially for
services with high SPI weight.

Enhancement

RAN13.0
In RAN13.0, except user priority (golden, silver, bronze), SPI Weight can be configured
according to UE category or user subscribed MBR. In this way, the operator can adopt
more flexible promotion strategy to increase the revenue.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
When applied in the downlink on the Uu interface, this feature depends on the feature
WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR. When applied in the uplink on the
Uu interface, this feature depends on the feature WRFD-01061402 Enhanced Fast UL
Schedul

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Differentiated QoS Service

3.8.5 WRFD-020131 Optimization of R99 and HSUPA


Users Fairness
Model
QW1SOR99UF00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
In scenarios where R99 users and HSUPA users share the same carrier, this feature enables
telecom operators to provide service for R99 and HSUPA users in a fair way and improve the
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

337

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

experience of HSUPA users. This is achieved by considering the satisfaction rate (real-time
user rate/GBR) of both types of user.

Benefits
This feature helps improve the fairness of resource allocation between HSUPA and R99 users
and raise the satisfaction of HSUPA users.

Description
With the increase of the commercial use of HSUPA, the HSUPA user experience has become
more and more important. As a result, the original policy based on which R99 users take
precedence over other users does not follow this trend. In scenarios where R99 users and
HSUPA users share the same carrier, the throughput of R99 users might be higher than that of
HSUPA users at the same priority level.
This feature enables the periodic comparison of satisfaction between R99 and HSUPA users.
The comparison considers the ratio of actual service rates of users to the Guaranteed Bit Rate
(GBR) values. If the satisfaction degree of R99 users is higher than that of HSUPA users and
reaches a certain preset threshold, the rate decrease of high-rate R99 BE services is triggered
and the rate increase of low-rate R99 BE services is limited.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
BTS3812E/BTS3812AE should be configured with EBBI, EDLP; HBBI and HDLP
cannot support this feature.
DBS3800 should be configured with EBBC or EBBCd; BBU3806 cannot support this
feature;
3900 series base station should be configured with WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf.
WBBPa cannot support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA introduction package WRFD-021101 Dynamic Channel
Configuration Control (DCCC)

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Differentiated QoS Service
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

338

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

3.8.6 WRFD-011502 Active Queue Management


(AQM)
Model
QW1S00AQMP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Summary
This feature provides approach of queue management and shorten the period of HTTP
queuing.

Benefits
AQM can improve user experience when HTTP and download services simultaneously exist.

Description
In an interactive packet-data connection, the packet data to transfer is typically characterized
by large variations, so the buffer is introduced to even out the variations. However, if the
buffer is filled up or an overflow situation takes place, it will result in loss of data packets.
Currently, TCP as the main transport layer protocol is used on Internet. Packet loss is regarded
as link congestion by TCP, and TCP will correspondingly reduce the data transmission rate.
TCP protocol is also sensitive to round trip delays and it will take actions differently in case
just one packet is missing or if a burst of packets is lost. In case of uncontrolled packet losses,
it may take a considerable time for the data rate to increase again, leading to poor radio link
utilization and causing long delays for the end user.
In addition, in case a user is performing parallel activities, for example, FTP download and
web browsing, if the file download would fill the buffers and thereby cause a long delay
before anything would happen when clicking on a link.
The functionality of AQM is provided as an optimized buffer handling method, in order to
interact with the TCP protocol in a favorable manner and reduce the buffering delay. It is
possible for the operator to switch on/off the Active Queue Management function
This feature does not support IPv6.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

339

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.8.7 WRFD-010507 Rate Negotiation at Admission


Control
Model
QW1SRNAACP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN3.0.
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R4.

Summary
This feature enables QoS negotiation and RAB downsizing on the Iu interface.

Benefits
Based on the QoS negotiation mechanism, this feature can enhance the RAB setup process
and shorten the service setup time.
This feature can greatly increase the success rate of call setup and hard handover and
maximize resource usage and system capacity.

Description
This feature makes it possible for a call to access the network with a lower bit rate in case that
cell resource is not enough, and it comprises the following two parts

Iu QoS negotiation

RAB Downsizing

The access success rate, system capacity, and performance can be improved with this feature.
I. Iu QoS negotiation
In Release 99, the UTRAN accepts or rejects a radio access bearer request only from the CN.
If the QoS requirement of the service defined in the RAN establishment request is higher than
that can be handled by UTRAN, the UTRAN cannot accept it. For the services having higher
QoS requirement could accept lower QoS requirements than those requested by the CN in the
RAB establishment request. There are no means for the UTRAN to propose an alternative
(lower) QoS.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

340

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

For such services, the RAB establishment will fail, or alternatively the CN could re-attempt
the RAB re-establishment with lower QoS requirements. This would significantly increase the
setup time. Therefore, a QoS negotiation mechanism is introduced in Release 4. This aligns
the procedure with the already existing CN solution used in GPRS and shortens the service
setup time. Such a mechanism also applies to the relocation procedure by adding Alternative
RAB Parameter Values IE in the RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST or
RELOCATION REQUEST message.
The Iu QoS negotiation mainly aims for the PS streaming service and is used to negotiate the
maximum and initial bit rate for the service.

Maximum bit rate negotiation


The UE capability will be considered to decide the maximum bit rate. That is, the
maximum bit rate will be selected among the maximum bit rate assigned and the
alternative ones in descending order until it meets the UE capability. If the HSPA is
related, the UE capability with HSPA will be used.

Initial bit rate negotiation


To decide the initial bit rate, the following load information should be considered:

1.

Uplink and downlink radio load states of the cell

2.

Iub resource state

3.

Minimum spreading factor supported

4.

HSPA capability. If a service is related to HSPA, the UE capability must be considered to


get a proper bit rate.

When the cell with radio load or Iub resource load is congested, the minimum bit rate among
the assigned Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) will be selected for service admission. Otherwise,
the bit rate among negotiated maximum bit rate and guaranteed bit rate will be selected in
descending order until it meets the load and capability requirements mentioned above.
After the maximum and initial bit rates are made certain and the subsequent admission
procedure is successful, the RNC will inform the CN node of the negotiated bit rate through
RAB ASSIGNMENT REPONSE or RELOCATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE message.
II. RAB downsizing
The RAB downsizing applies mainly to Best Effort (BE) service (interactive or background
service). In an ideal scenario, BE service can always access the network with the maximum
request bit rate if there is enough cell resources, but such a process cannot meet the system
capacity and performance requirements while the system resource is limited. Therefore, the
RNC will try to negotiate the proper maximum and initial bit rate as Iu QoS negotiation does.

Maximum bit rate negotiation


The UE capability will be considered to decide the maximum bit rate. That is, the
maximum bit rate will be selected among the maximum bit rate assigned to 8 kbit/s in
descending order until it meets the UE capability. If the HDPA is related, UE capability
with HSPA will be used.

Initial or target bit rate negotiation


The following load information will be considered to decide the initial bit rate:

1.

Uplink and downlink radio load states of the cell

2.

Available Iub resource

3.

Minimum spreading factor supported

4.

Available credit resource

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

341

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

5.

3 Radio & Performance

HSPA capability, if the service related to HSPA, the UE-related capability must be
considered to get a proper bit rate.

When radio load is congested, GBR will be selected to admit to maximize the access
successful rate. Otherwise, the bit rate among negotiated maximum bit rate to 8 kbit/s will be
selected in descending order until it meets the load and capability requirements mentioned
above.
RAB downsizing can also be applied in the hard handover procedure. That is, with this
feature, during the hard handover procedure, the target cell load will be considered, the
downgraded hard handover may be triggered to maximize the handover successful rate.

Enhancement

RAN5.0
In RAN5.0, Iu QoS negotiation feature is introduced.
In RAN5.0, RAB downsizing used in the hard handover procedure is supported.

RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, HSPA capability is taken into consideration, and in RAN6.0 the HSUPA
feature is introduced.

RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, RAB downsizing can also be applied when the request for adding new
radio links in the AS in soft/softer handover is rejected by admission control due to
resource limitation. The rate will be downgraded according to the cell load information,
in order to avoid the call drop due to soft handover failure.

RAN11.0
In RAN11.0, the newly added policy is that the access of the PS service, if denied,
allows an access rate of 0 kbit/s or the implementation on the FACH.
RAN11.0 decides the downlink initial access rate of the R99 BE service on the DCH
according to the Ec/Io contained in the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message. If the
Ec/Io is higher than the related threshold, the downlink initial access rate is min[384k,
MBR] (where MBR is the maximum bit rate assigned by the CN); if the Ec/Io is lower
than the threshold, the downlink initial access rate is the default value.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
For Iu QoS negotiation, the CN node needs to support this feature, but for RAB
downsizing, the CN node does not need to support this feature.

Other Features
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

342

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

3.8.8 WRFD-020130 Videophone Service Restriction


Model
QW1SVDPNSR00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature disables the videophone (VP) function of a cell through cell-level configurations.

Benefits
This feature meets telecom operators' requirements for information security in restricted areas.
It prevents leakage of information through VP.

Description
In restricted areas such as military management areas and key laboratories, the use of VP may
lead to leakage of information. To meet the security requirements in these areas, the RNC
supports the prohibition of VP services at the cell level. Through configurations on the Local
Maintenance Terminal (LMT), the VP services of all UEs in a cell can be prohibited.
The implementation of this feature involves the following aspects:
Prohibiting VP service setup during service establishment
Releasing VP services in the case of an incoming handover, for example, retaining other
services except VP services when the UE has multiple concurrent services to process

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

343

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Differentiated QoS Service

3.8.9 WRFD-020135 Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE


Layered Management
Model
QW1SICUELM00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature allows the RAN to intelligently distinguish between UEs and data cards in multicarrier scenarios and to separately set up services on different carriers.

Benefits
With the rapid growth of mobile broadband, use of data cards to access the Internet has
become a common occurrence. Data card traffic is characterized by its long duration and high
volume. It increases operator profit but also increases network load. Other services of the
same carrier may be negatively affected.
Use of separate carriers for data card services allows full utilization of carrier resources and
keeps data card traffic from affecting other services. This helps operators formulate flexible
billing policies, develop large-scale data card services, and establish Mobile Broadband
(MBB) brands.

Description
This feature allows the RAN to intelligently distinguish between UEs and data cards in multicarrier scenarios and to separately establish services on different carriers based on priority
configuration. This feature is applicable to UEs during the access procedure and in connected
mode.
This feature requires operators to separately allocate IMSI ranges to UEs and data cards. The
RNC determines the terminal type based on the IMSI of the terminal and configured rules.
Each carrier is assigned a priority corresponding to a terminal type. During the RAB setup,
the cell with the highest priority for the terminal type is chosen for access. This achieves the
layered assignment of terminals to specific carriers. After a service is established, periodic
directed retry based on the terminal type can be performed for handover to the highest-priority
carrier.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

344

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
This feature requires operators to separately allocate IMSI ranges to mobile and data
card UEs.

Other Features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Multicarrier Service

3.8.10 WRFD-020123 TCP Accelerator


Model
QW1S0DTCPA00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

345

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
A series of enhanced TCP functions adaptive to the link characteristics on the RAN side are
implemented on the RNC. This feature enables the performance of the TCP protocol derived
from the wired network to be greatly improved in the wireless network, improving user
experience and system efficiency.

Benefits
This feature mitigates the impact of some factors such as packet loss on the RAN to affect
negatively the performance of TCP data transmission, accelerates the slow startup and fast
retransmission of the server during the data transmission, increases the UL/DL data
transmission efficiency, and reduces the UL/DL transmission delay, greatly improving the PS
data transmission performance.
For example: (1) The time to download a small size file of 500kbyte can be decreased by
20%. (2) When a user downloads and uploads large size files with the bandwidth of 2 Mbit/s
and one TCP connection at the same time, the downlink rate can be increased by 50%.

Description
The TCP/IP protocol is extensively used all over the world. It was initially developed for
wired transmission and later also used in wireless networks. However wireless networks
exhibit some characteristics quite different from the wired network. A typical example is that
of packet losses which, in a wired network, is commonly due to congestion in some network
elements, whereas in a wireless network such losses can be due to transmission errors over the
air interface. This has a significant impact on the overall performance of the data
transmission, due to the way the TCP/IP protocols reacts to such packet losses. To mitigate
this effect, a number of enhancements have been implemented in the RNC
A TCP accelerator functionality is implemented in the RNC. The TCP Proxy Entity (TPE for
short) is used to improve the data transmission performance in the wireless network. The TPE
processes the TCP/IP packets by adopting TCP performance optimization technologies such
buffering and sorting of DL data, ACK splitting, DupACK duplication, local retransmission,
building Window Scaling (WS) indication, and enhanced simultaneous DL/UL data
transmission. In addition, the buffering and sorting of UL data is adopted to prevent factors,
such as packet loss and transmission delay in the RAN, from affecting the UL TCP data
transmission. This feature also accelerates the slow startup and congestion prevention of the
server during the UL data transmission, increases the UL data transmission efficiency, reduces
the UL transmission delay, and improves the DL throughput in the case of simultaneous
uploading and downloading. Therefore, this feature greatly improves the PS data transmission
performance.

ACK splitting
In TCP, the congestion window is updated according to the number of received ACK
messages and is expanded by increasing the number of ACK messages. When a slow
startup occurs at the transmitting end, ACK splitting can quickly recover the congestion
window; when the transmitting end works in congestion avoidance mode, ACK splitting
can accelerate the expansion of the congestion window.

DupACK duplication
In TCP, a lost TCP packet is retransmitted after three DupACK are received. With this
feature, after the TPE receives the ACK message from the UE, the TPE immediately
duplicates three DupACK messages and sends them to the Server if it detects that the
packets requested by the ACK are not in the buffer. This shortens the time for packet
retransmission.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

346

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Local retransmission
When packet loss occurs on the air interface, the TPE, rather than the transmitting end,
retransmits the packet to the receiving end, reducing the time for retransmission.

Packet sorting
Sorting of the disordered DL packets is as follows. The TPE sorts and transmits the
disordered DL packets to avoid unnecessary transmission of DupACKs in the uplink and
to prevent TPE local retransmission caused by disordered packets. In this way,
transmission resources are saved.
Sorting of the disordered UL packets is as follows. The TPE sorts the UL packets and
transmits them to the core network (CN) in sequence. This avoids the deterioration of the
UL data transmission performance caused by the disordered UL packets.

Building WS indication
When TCP window size in server side is 64KB, the synchronization packet will not
include WS indication. If the receiving side detects that there is no WS indication, the
synchronization ACK packet returned by receiving side will not include WS indication.
In this case, even if the capability of the receiving end is greater than 64KB, the window
size is limited to 64KB. Therefore, the throughput is decreased if the actual receiving
capability exceeds 64KB.

Enhanced simultaneous downlink and uplink transmission


If data are transmitted in the uplink and downlink simultaneously, UE needs to send data
and TCP ACK/NACK information corresponding to downlink data. However, TCP
ACK/NACK information may be blocked on the UE side by uplink data packet.
Therefore, the TCP ACK information of downlink data is delayed, which may affect the
downlink throughput. This feature can monitor the TCP packet reception in UE. If a TCP
packet is received by UE correctly, TPE builds ACK information and sends it to the
server. Then, the server TCP TX window can slide more quickly and the downlink
throughput will be increased.

This feature does not support IPv6.

Enhancement

RAN12.0
The enhanced UL data transmission is introduced in RAN12.0.

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

347

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

3.8.11 WRFD-020128 Quality Improvement for


Subscribed Service
Model
QW1S0QISSP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0.

Summary
To provide better services to customers and to enhance the competitiveness, some service
providers are ready to pay extra to network operators to sign a contract for obtaining better
transmission quality for specific services. These service providers are called subscribed
customers and the specific services are called subscribed services.
IP transmission is used widely. In IP transmission, the service data is transmitted in IP
packets, and the IP header contains the information that indicates the source IP address,
destination IP address, source port number, and destination port number. So the data source
can be identified through IP header analyzing. Based on this technique, the network operator
can identify the data of subscribed services and ensure that the subscribed services have better
quality such as higher throughput or shorter delay. In this way, customers can have better
experience for subscribed services than for ordinary services.

Benefits
With this feature, end users can have better experience for subscribed services and the status
of the subscribed service provider is elevated. In this way, the competitiveness of the
subscribed service provider is enhanced. Moreover, the network operator can get extra income
from the subscribed service provider.

Description
If IP transmission is used at the network layer, the IP header contains the information that
indicates the source of the service data. So the operator can identify whether the data is of the
subscribed services by checking the IP address and port number in the IP header. For the data
of subscribed services, if the data is carried over HSPA channels, the operator enhances the
capability of the service to obtain Iub interface resources, Uu interface resources, and CE
resources. In this way, the throughput of the service on the radio access network is enhanced,
the data transmission delay is reduced, and the user experience is enhanced.
The effect of this feature is more obvious when the traffic load over the access network is
high.
This feature does not support IPv6.

Enhancement
None

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

348

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EULP,
EBBI, EBOI or EULPd board.
The BBU3806 should be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board;
The BBU3900 should be configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Differentiated QoS Service

3.8.12 WRFD-020132 Web Browsing Acceleration


Model
QW1S0WBAPS00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Summary
This feature enables detection of web page accesses and allocation of higher downlink
bandwidth, reducing delay in loading web pages.

Benefits
This feature decreases the time users spend waiting for web pages to load, significantly
improving user experience.

Description
Web browsing is the most widely used data service. Users expect to be able to quickly load
web pages at any time or place. In traditional mobile telecommunication systems, however,
multiple services coexist and equally compete for limited bandwidth resources. Bandwidth is
not allocated preferentially to web page access, making it difficult for users to enjoy highquality, low-delay web browsing. During high-traffic hours, web access is frequently
impacted by other services and users experience high levels of delay.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

349

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

This feature recognizes web browsing services by using service awareness technique and then
preferentially allocates higher bandwidth to these services. As a result, the load time for web
pages decreases and the user experience improves.
This feature is applicable to web page access acceleration where HSDPA users take priority
over other users and combined services over other services.
This feature does not support IPv6.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
To enable this feature on a BSC6900, the NIUa board is required. To enable this
feature on a BSC6910, the ENIUa board is required.

NodeB
BTS3812E/BTS3812AE series base station should be configured with EBBI/EDLP;
HBBI and HDLP cannot support this feature.
DBS3800 series base station should be configured with EBBC/EBBCd; HBBU cannot
support this feature.
3900 series base station should be configured with WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf.
WBBPa cannot support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Differentiated QoS Service

3.8.13 WRFD-020133 P2P Downloading Rate Control


during Busy Hour
Model
QW1SP2PDRC00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN13.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

350

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
This feature enables the detection of P2P download services and rate restrictions on P2P
services when the system load is high. When the system load is low, the rate of P2P download
services is not restricted.

Benefits
As high-bandwidth mobile telecommunication systems grow rapidly, more and more users are
using P2P services to download music or video. Due to its high volume and long duration,
P2P traffic consumes a large amount of system resources. This significantly increases
operating costs and adversely affects the quality of other delay-sensitive services.
This feature restricts P2P traffic during busy hours, thereby reducing operating costs and
improving the user experience of other delay-sensitive services. During non-busy hours, P2P
downloads are not restricted and P2P users can enjoy high speeds and make full use of
network resources.

Description
In the traditional P2P flow control scheme, the maximum rate restriction is set on the CN side.
The limitation of this scheme is that radio resources cannot be fully utilized when the traffic
load of the system is low.
This feature recognizes the P2P download traffic by using service awareness technique. When
the system load is high, rate restriction limits the rate of P2P download services to release the
occupied resources for other services. When the system load is low, resources for P2P are
unrestricted and P2P services are still able to engage in high speed downloads. This allows
multiple users and services to fully utilize network resources.
This feature is applicable to P2P rate restriction where HSDPA users take priority over other
users and combined services over other services.
This feature does not support IPv6.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
To enable this feature on a BSC6900, the NIUa board is required. To enable this
feature on a BSC6910, the ENIUa board is required.

NodeB
BTS3812E/BTS3812AE series base station should be configured with EBBI/EDLP;
HBBI and HDLP cannot support this feature.
DBS3800 series base station should be configured with EBBC/EBBCd; HBBU cannot
support this feature.
3900 series base station should be configured with WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf.
WBBPa cannot support this feature.

UE
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

351

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Differentiated QoS Service

3.8.14 WRFD-140205 Voice Experience Improvement


for Weak Reception UEs
Model
QW1SVSEIWP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.

Summary
For UEs that are prone to CS voice service drops due to weak reception, this feature enables
the radio network controller (RNC) to identify these UEs based on the International Mobile
Station Equipment Identity Type Allocation Code (IMEI TAC) and assign them dedicated
radio performance parameters. These parameters include radio link (RL) power control and
handover parameters.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:

Reduces the call drop rate for weak reception UEs in weak coverage areas, improving
the user experience for CS voice services.

Enables weak reception UEs to perform inter-RAT handovers at a specified threshold.


This prevents frequent compressed mode measurements and call drops caused by signal
quality fluctuations.

Description
On a live UMTS network, weak reception UEs may easily experience call drops because they
are prone to downlink signaling radio bearer (SRB) failures. However, these UEs are likely to
be used by high Average Revenue Per User (ARPU) users. Huawei introduces the Voice
Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs feature.
This feature is implemented as follows:

The RNC identifies a weak reception UE based on its IMEI.

The RNC configures dedicated power control and handover parameters for the UE.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

352

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Based on the parameter settings, the UE obtains a high downlink power control threshold
in a weak coverage area and performs a handover at a specified threshold.

This feature improves the user experience of CS voice services for weak reception UEs by
performing power compensation on these UEs. This leads to more power consumption and
reduces the cell capacity.
Currently, this feature applies only to iPhone 3GS and iPhone 4.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.8.15 WRFD-150204 Platinum User Prioritizing


Model
QW1S00PUEV00
QW1S00PUEP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature improves user experience for platinum users by:

Allocating a high admission priority to them when network congestion occurs.

Allocating the highest High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) service scheduling priority to
them.

Enhancing voice quality for them when downlink coverage is weak.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

353

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits for platinum users:

Increased access success rate and HSPA throughput.

Improved voice quality.

Description
If network congestion occurs during gatherings, sports events, and festivals, it is difficult for
platinum users (for example, policemen and firefighters) to access the network.
With this feature, the RNC preferentially allows platinum users to access the network during
radio resource control (RRC) connection setup or radio access bearer (RAB) setup. A list of
platinum users is saved on the RNC and the list is configurable.
Circuit switched (CS) services initiated by platinum users have the highest admission priority,
and packet switched (PS) services initiated by common users have the lowest admission
priority. The admission priority of PS services initiated by platinum users and the admission
priority of CS services initiated by common users are configurable.
When downlink coverage is weak, this feature improves voice quality for platinum users.
Additionally, this feature enables the RNC to allocate the highest HSPA service scheduling
priority to platinum users, increasing their HSPA throughput.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.8.16 WRFD-150233 Differentiated Service Based


on Resource Reservation
Model
QW1S0DSBRR00

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

354

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
When downlink power resources become insufficient on networks with heavy HSDPA traffic,
this feature:

Limits the amount of downlink HSDPA power resources consumed by low-priority UEs
to reserve more downlink HSDPA power resources for high-priority UEs.

Prevents high-priority UEs from using excess downlink HSDPA power resources to
provide guaranteed bandwidth for other UEs.

Benefits
This feature increases the data rates of high-priority UEs and provides guaranteed bandwidth
for other UEs.

Description
This feature prioritizes UEs based on the Scheduling Priority Indicator (SPI) and allocates
UEs in a cell to four different resource groups based on the mapping between SPIs and these
groups. Each group can only consume a preset percentage of downlink HSDPA power
resources.
When the MAC-hs or MAC-ehs is scheduling HSDPA data, the NodeB periodically calculates
the HSDPA power consumption of each resource group in a cell.
When the HSDPA power consumption of a resource group exceeds the preset percentage, the
RNC lowers the HSDPA scheduling priority of UEs in the group so that these UEs use less
HSDPA power resources. However, if other resource groups still have free HSDPA power
resources, these UEs can use the remaining power resources, preventing a waste of HSDPA
power resources.
This feature cannot be used together with the WRFD-140223 MOCN Cell Resource
Demarcation feature in the same cell.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

NodeB

The BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI,
EBOI, EDLP, EULP, or EULPd board.

The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC, EBBM, or EBBCd board.

The BTS3900 series base stations, DBS3900, BTS3900C, and BTS3902E must be
configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board.

UE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

355

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package

3.8.17 WRFD-150252 Video Pacing


Model
Availability
This feature is introduced to RAN15.0 as a trial feature.
This feature is introduced to RAN16.0 as a commercial optional feature.

Summary
This feature identifies Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)-based video services among PS
BE services and allocates sufficient downlink bandwidth to HTTP-based video services to
improve user experience.

Benefits
This feature minimizes the probability of HTTP-based video service interruption if bandwidth
congestion occurs, thereby improving user experience.

Description
HTTP-based video service is becoming one of the most important data services in Mobile
Broadband (MBB) networks. Smooth video playback is users' major concern. However, the
radio resource allocation and scheduling mechanisms in conventional mobile communication
networks cannot meet the bandwidth requirements of video services when multiple types of
services are competing for bandwidth resources.
This feature uses the service awareness technology deployed in the RAN or the PS domain of
the core network to identify HTTP-based video services and allocate required bandwidth to
these services. This ensures smooth video playback and improves user experience.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
For the BSC6900 UMTS, an NIUa board must be configured.
For the BSC6910 UMTS, an ENIUa board must be configured.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

356

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EBOI,
EDLP, EULP, or EULPd board. The HBBI and HDLP boards do not support this feature.
The DBS3800 series base stations must be configured with the EBBC, EBBM, or
EBBCd board. The HBBU board does not support this feature.
The BTS3900 series base stations, DBS3900, BTS3900C, and BTS3902E must be
configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board. The WBBPa board does not
support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.8.18 WRFD-150253 VoIP Application Management


Model
Availability
This feature is introduced to RAN15.0 as a trial feature.
This feature is introduced to RAN16.0 as a commercial optional feature.

Summary
This feature identifies VoIP services among PS BE services and allocates bandwidth to the
VoIP services flexibly so that operators can provide differentiated user experience for VoIP
services.

Benefits
This feature improves user experience for VoIP services.

Description
VoIP service is one of the most important data services in MBB networks. However, the
conventional mobile communication network cannot identify VoIP services and therefore
cannot provide differentiated user experience for VoIP services by means of radio resource
allocation and scheduling.
This feature uses the service awareness technology deployed in the RAN or the PS domain of
the core network to identify VoIP services.
For networks that are to be transformed into MBB networks, this feature guarantees a
specified bandwidth for VoIP services to improve user experience for these services. In
addition, this feature manages VoIP services' maximum downlink delay, within which
downlink data must be sent to UEs.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

357

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

If the profits of voice services are affected by VoIP services, this feature limits the bandwidth
allocated to VoIP services by means of radio resource allocation and air interface scheduling
so that some bandwidth resources can be reserved for other types of services.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
For the BSC6900 UMTS, an NIUa board must be configured.
For the BSC6910 UMTS, an ENIUa board must be configured.

NodeB
The BTS3900 series base stations, DBS3900, BTS3900C, and BTS3902E must be
configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board. The WBBPa board does not
support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.8.19 WRFD-150254 Differentiated Service Based


on Application Resource Reservation
Model
Availability
This feature is introduced to RAN15.0 as a trial feature.
This feature is introduced to RAN16.0 as a commercial optional feature.

Summary
In networks with heavy HSDPA service load, user experience deteriorates if downlink power
congestion occurs. This feature limits the HSDPA power resources allocated to low-value
services and reserves the resources for high-value services if downlink power congestion
occurs. In this way, the data rate of high-value services is improved.

Benefits
This feature guarantees differentiated user experience for different services.
This feature prevents low-value services from occupying too many downlink power resources
and reserves the resources for high-value services to improve the data rate of high-value
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

358

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

services. It also prevents high-value services from occupying excessive downlink power
resources to guarantee the minimum bandwidth for other services.

Description
This feature uses the service awareness technology deployed in the RAN or the PS domain of
the core network to identify four basic types of services: HTTP service, P2P service, video
service, and VoIP service.
Each cell can be configured with four resource groups, each of which can be configured with
its own maximum ratio of HSDPA power resources.
This feature maps the four types of services to resource groups so that each resource group
has its own ratio of HSDPA power resources.
When downlink power resources are not congested, the power resources allocated to each
service can exceed the specified ratio. This avoids power waste.
When downlink power resources are congested, if the power resources allocated to all
services in a resource group exceed the specified maximum ratio, the scheduling priority of all
services in this resource group is decreased gradually until HSDPA power resources allocated
to the services become lower than the specified maximum ratio. This method limits the ratio
of power resources allocated to specific services. This feature guarantees the minimum ratio
of power resources allocated to low-value services, and allocates more power resources to
high-value services.
To accommodate more types of services, this feature also introduces service groups. It maps
service groups to resource groups so that HSDPA power resources can be limited in a
differentiated way for more types of services.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
For the BSC6900 UMTS, an NIUa board must be configured.
For the BSC6910 UMTS, an ENIUa board must be configured.

NodeB
The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EBOI,
EDLP, EULP, or EULPd board. The HBBI and HDLP boards do not support this feature.
The DBS3800 series base stations must be configured with the EBBC, EBBM, or
EBBCd board. The HBBU board does not support this feature.
The BTS3900 series base stations, DBS3900, BTS3900C, and BTS3902E must be
configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board. The WBBPa board does not
support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

359

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Other Features
WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package
This feature does not apply to cells where the WRFD-140223 MOCN Cell Resource
Demarcation feature has been activated.

3.8.20 WRFD-150255 Differentiated Service Based


on Terminal
Model
Availability
This feature is introduced to RAN15.0 as a trial feature.
This feature is introduced to RAN16.0 as a commercial optional feature.

Summary
This feature provides differentiated services for different types of terminals. When resources
are limited, this feature flexibly allocates resources to different types of terminals to provide
differentiated user experience.

Benefits
This feature provides a flexible resource management method for operators to provide
differentiated user experience for different types of terminals.

Description
HSPA users share Uu interface resources, CE resources, and Iub interface resources, which
are allocated according to their respective resource scheduling algorithms. If this feature is not
enabled, the resource scheduling algorithms mainly ensure the fairness between BE services
(interactive and background services). That is, the resource scheduling algorithms fairly
allocate resources between users based on the guaranteed bit rate (GBR) and maximum bit
rate (MBR) required.
After this feature is enabled, the type approval codes (TACs) in the IMEIs of different
terminals can be configured into different terminal groups, and the Scheduling Priority
Indicator (SPI) weight of the BE services for each terminal group can be configured by the
operator. The SPI weight determines the probability that UEs in each terminal group are
allocated HSPA power resources. In this way, the service quality of these UEs can be adjusted.
The quality of services with high SPI weight is preferentially ensured. For example, if Uu
interface resources are insufficient, higher data rate or shorter transmission delay is achieved
preferentially for services with high SPI weight.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

360

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
When applied in the downlink on the Uu interface, this feature depends on the feature
WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR.
When applied in the uplink on the Uu interface, this feature depends on the feature
WRFD-01061402 Enhanced Fast UL Scheduling or WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE
Resource Management. When this feature is enabled together with the feature WRFD01061402 Enhanced Fast UL Scheduling, only the uplink Uu interface resources can be
differentially scheduled. When this feature is enabled together with the feature WRFD010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management, both the uplink Uu interface resources and
CE resources can be differentially scheduled.
When applied in the downlink on the Iub interface, this feature depends on the features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-050405 Overbooking on ATM
Transmission, or depends on the features WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package
and WRFD-050408 Overbooking on IP Transmission.
When applied in the uplink on the Iub interface, this feature depends on the feature
WRFD-01061212 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion.

3.9 System Efficiency Improvement


3.9.1 WRFD-020124 Uplink Flow Control of User
Plane
Model
QW1SUFCUPV00
QW1SUFCUPM00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN11.0.

Summary
This feature enables the proprietary IEs on the Iub interface to detect the uplink packet loss of
R99 services. In addition, this feature enables the transmission of TF limitations to control
uplink traffic.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

361

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature prevents the uplink transmission from packet loss for lack of flow control, and
increases the service transmission efficiency.

Description
This feature is applicable to R99 service. The Uplink Flow Control of User Plane feature for
HSUPA users is a standard flow control mode defined by the 3GPP protocols and has been
implemented.
In uplink single service data transmission, when the NodeB transmits data on the Iub
interface, packet loss may occur due to insufficient processing capability of the buffer or
insufficient transport network capability. In this case, data is repeatedly retransmitted, which
causes the decrease of transmission and service processing efficiency.
Huawei RAN uses the spare field in the Iub FP frame, which enables the RNC to detect the
information about the packet loss in the uplink. When the packet loss threshold is reached, the
RNC decides that this service enters the congestion state in the uplink, and then reduces the
uplink data transmission rate of the UE by sending the TF Restriction message to the UE.
This is a proprietary feature of Huawei.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.9.2 WRFD-140212 CE Overbooking


Model
QWMSCEOVER01

Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

362

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
This feature enables the RNC to adjust its credit resource usage based on the actual channel
element (CE) usage of admitted UEs. Therefore, the RNC's capability to perform admission
control based on credit resource usage is enhanced.

Benefits
In networks where actual CE usage is low due to low transmission rates of HSUPA UEs, this
feature provides the following benefits:

More UEs can be admitted.

More HSUPA UEs can use 2 ms transmission time interval (TTI).

Compared with 10 ms TTI, 2 ms TTI enables HSUPA UEs to achieve a higher peak rate
and a shorter scheduling delay, which improves user experience and admits more UEs.
Using 2 ms TTI also increases uplink cell throughput when Uu and Iub resources are
sufficient.

Improves user experience for UEs in connected mode..

Description
Generally, the RNC reserves a certain amount of credit resources for each admitted UE. To
ensure user experience for HSUPA UEs, the RNC reserves more credit resources for 2 ms TTI
HSUPA UEs. When the total amount of reserved credit resources exceeds a specified
threshold, the RNC rejects new UE access attempts. However, the actual CE usage of the
NodeB is low. This is because the transmission rates of HSUPA UEs are low in most cases
due to the high penetration rate of smart phones.
Huawei introduces CE Overbooking. With this feature, the NodeB adjusts the actual credit
resource usage of admitted UEs based on traffic volume and reports the actual credit resource
usage to the RNC through a private interface. The RNC then performs admission control on
new UEs based on the reported credit resource usage. In networks where actual CE usage is
low due to low transmission rates of HSUPA UEs, more UEs can be admitted after this feature
is enabled, which increases uplink cell throughput.
This feature has the following impact on the algorithms related to credit resources:

Increases the number of admitted UEs.

Increases the number of 2 ms TTI HSUPA UEs during a PS best effort (BE) service setup
or reconfiguration.

Reduces the probability of basic congestion of credit resources.

Reduces the probability of admitted-CE-based dynamic TTI adjustment for 2 ms TTI


HSUPA UEs processing BE services.

Using this feature poses the following risks:

If more UEs are admitted to the NodeB and a large number of UEs transmit data
simultaneously:

Actual bit rate might be less than the guaranteed bit rate (GBR).

The CE resources allocated by the NodeB to a 2 ms TTI HSUPA UE may not be


sufficient for this UE to transmit one Radio Link Control packet data unit (RLC PDU). If
Admission-CE-based Dynamic TTI Adjustment for a Single BE Service over HSUPA is
disabled, Traffic Radio Bearer (TRB) may be reset, which could result in call drops. If
Admission-CE-based Dynamic TTI Adjustment for a Single BE Service over HSUPA is

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

363

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

enabled, dynamic TTI adjustments from 2 ms to 10 ms will be triggered, decreasing the


risk of call drops. Therefore, it is recommended that Admission-CE-based Dynamic TTI
Adjustment for a Single BE Service over HSUPA be enabled.
In networks where actual CE usage is low due to low transmission rates of HSUPA UEs, the
air interface load increases in proportion with the number of admitted UEs, which may
increase the call drop rate.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB

The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI,
EBOI, or EULPd board.

The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board.

The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or
WBBPf board.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS Uplink Capacity Improvement Service.

3.9.3 WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource


Management
Model
QWMS00DCEM00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN10.0.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

364

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
To improve the efficiency of CE resources, Huawei RAN introduces the dynamic CE resource
management feature. Based on the GBR and actual rate, this feature enables the fast
adjustment of CE allocation. When CE resources are preempted, this feature enables the
proper allocation of CE resources to ensure the pre-emption fairness.

Benefits
The dynamic CE allocation can call back the CE resources in time when the users throughput
decreases, saving the CE resources.

Description
A channel element (CE) is defined as the baseband resources required in the NodeB to
provide capacity for 12.2 k AMR voice, including 3.4 k DCCH. The HSUPA shares the CE
resource with the R99 services.
The HSUPA aims at improving the uplink in terms of reducing delays, increasing data rates
and increasing the capacity, but it requires a large CE consumption.
If there is no dynamic CE resource management, the RNC will assign a maximum set of EDPDCHs for every user when the radio link is set up or reconfigured, which is the maximum
data rate that the UE supports.
Accordingly the NodeB will allocate the CE resources according to the maximum set of EDPDCHs, even if the users actual traffic is very low. So the utility of the CE resource is
inefficient.
Huawei adopts the dynamic CE resource management to save the CE resources. Each TTI,
NodeB can call back the CE resources if the users throughput decreases, allocate the CE
resources during the radio link setup or reconfiguration, allocate the CE resources for the
AG(Absolute Grant) UP users, and preempt the CE resources for the RG(Relative
Grant)UP users. The dynamic CE resource management process is described in the
following figure.
For example, one user has the maximum bit rate at1.45 Mbit/s, but the actual throughput is
always changed. With the dynamic CE resource management, the CE consumption is
dynamically changed with the bit rates (blue line), not allocated according to the maximum
set of the E-DPDCHs (red line).

Enhancement
None

Dependency

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

RNC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

365

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

3.9.4 WRFD-141201 RNC User Plane and Control


Plane Dynamic Sharing
Model
QM1SUPCPDS00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
A new service processing board Evolved General Processing Unit REV:a (EGPUa) is
introduced in the BSC6910 to simultaneously process user-plane data and control-plane data.
The RNC can automatically adjust the ratio of resources split between processing user-plane
data and control-plane data

Benefits
This feature increases the hardware usage and reduces the maintenance cost.

Description
The RNC automatically monitors the user-plane load and control-plane load. When the
difference between user-plane load and control-plane load reaches a specified threshold, the
RNC automatically adjusts the ratio of resources split between processing user-plane data and
control-plane data.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

366

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

The services on the CPU resources adjusted will drop from the network.
The operator can specify the time for automatic adjustment. It is recommended to perform the
automatic adjustment during off-peak hours to minimize the impact on services.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
Only the BSC6910 supports this feature

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


The M2000 and CME versions must be compatible with the BSC6910

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.9.5 WRFD-150242 HSDPA Scheduler Pool


Model
QW1SOR99UF00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN15.0.

Summary
This feature enables scheduling capabilities to be shared among HSDPA schedulers. With this
feature, HSDPA scheduling capabilities form a pool of resources to bear the entire HSDPA
scheduling load in a single cell, which relaxes requirements of scheduling capabilities for a
single HSDPA scheduler.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

367

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
When the number of online UEs is unbalanced among different HSDPA schedulers that
schedule resources for these UEs in a BBU, using this feature provides the following benefits:

Increased number of online HSDPA UEs in a busy cell.

Improved experience of HSDPA users in a busy cell.

Increased utilization of HSDPA scheduling resources.

Description
When the HSDPA scheduler on a WBBP board (WBBP board 1) in the BBU is nearly
overloaded, the NodeB automatically searches for a WBBP board (WBBP board 2) with light
HSDPA scheduling load. When new UEs are admitted in the cell that is established on WBBP
board 1, the NodeB allocates the UEs to WBBP board 2.
In this manner, HSDPA scheduling load is shared. The number of online HSDPA UEs
supported in a busy cell is increased without adding any boards.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
Only 3900 series base stations (excluding the BTS3902E) configured with more than two
WBBPd or WBBPf boards support this feature.
The BTS3803E does not support this feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package.

3.9.6 WRFD-151210 Inter-Dependence of BBU Uplink


Resource
Model
QWMSIDOBUR00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

368

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Summary
This feature changes the deployment mode of cells served by the uplink resource group on
baseband processing boards to improve utilization of uplink channel elements (CEs).

Benefits
This feature simplifies baseband equipment configurations because one uplink resource group
can serve cells under the NodeB in scenarios where there are nine (three sectors, each
configured with three frequencies) or more frequencies. This feature also improves uplink CE
sharing among cells to reduce the access rejection due to CE congestion and resolve the
unbalance between carrers due to CE congestion when DRD(WRFD-020400) activated.

Description
In scenarios where multiple carriers serve the same coverage area, for carriers configured in
the same uplink resource group, each baseband processing board is configured with two
carriers, and every two baseband processing boards share a carrier in chain mode. Uplink CEs
of a baseband processing board serve a maximum of six cells. With the chain mode, uplink
CEs of a baseband processing board can be shared between any cells that are carried by the
baseband processing board, which improves uplink CE sharing.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

369

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NodeB
Only 3900 series base stations support this feature.
The WBBPa does not support this feature.
WBBPb1, WBBPb2 supports max 3 cells per board, and can only be configured in 1 cell
group, resulting in no gain. These two boards are not suggested to be used with this
feature.

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.9.7 WRFD-160205 CE Efficiency Improvement for


HSUPA TTI 2ms
Model
Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
This feature allows a UE that uses a 2 ms transmission time interval (TTI) to activate only a
single hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process, so that scheduling is optimized for
smooth data transmission, thereby increasing the channel element (CE) efficiency. A 2 ms TTI
HSUPA UE whose uplink data rate is less than or equal to 20 kbit/s consumes only one CE,
increasing the CE efficiency by 100%.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:

Increased CE efficiency

More UEs allowed in a network

More HSUPA UEs using a 2 ms TTI

Improved uplink throughput

Description
Before this feature was introduced, a 2 ms TTI HSUPA UE whose uplink data rate was less
than or equal to 20 kbit/s (according to Huawei uplink CE consumption principles) consumed
two CEs. With this feature, a 2 ms TTI UE activates only a single HARQ process and
optimizes scheduling to smooth the data transmission and increase the CE efficiency. Only
one CE is consumed by a 2 ms TTI HSUPA UE that has uplink data rate less than or equal to
20 kbit/s in a single HARQ process, increasing the CE efficiency by 100%.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

370

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB

The DBS3800, BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, and BTS3902E do not support


this feature

The 3900 series base stations support this feature only when they are configured with
a WBBPf or UBBP. (WBBPa/WBBPb/WPPBd doesn't support this feature

If any downlink resource group in the NodeB is configured with WBBPa, all cells in
the NodeB do not support this feature.

UE
The UEs must be of HSUPA category 6 or later.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features

WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI

WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management

WRFD-140212 CE Overbooking

Professional Services
It is recommended that this feature be used with Huawei professional services for uplink
capacity improvement.

3.10 SON
3.10.1 WRFD-151201 Adaptive RACH
Model
QM1SADRACH00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
When a large number of UEs simultaneously initiate a random access procedure in a cell, the
received total wideband power (RTWP) of this cell becomes extremely high. To reduce the
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

371

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

RTWP in this scenario, Huawei introduces Adaptive RACH. Adaptive RACH enables the
RNC to dynamically adjust the settings of random access parameters for a cell based on the
uplink power load and number of acknowledged random accesses during a specified period of
time. This feature can reduce the RTWP of a cell and increase its capacity.

Benefits
When the RTWP of a cell is high due to a large number of random accesses, Adaptive RACH
reduces the initial transmit power and ramping step for random access preambles to decrease
RTWP and increase uplink cell throughput by 10%.

Description
An increase in UEs' access power causes a high RTWP, which decreases uplink capacity and
uplink throughput. Therefore, when the uplink of a cell is congested, Adaptive RACH
modifies random access parameters, such as the initial power, number of re-attempts, and step
value, to reduce RTWP and increase network capacity. This feature, however, increases the
random access delay of UEs. When the uplink load of the cell becomes light, the modified
random access parameters have no obvious gain in reducing the RTWP but only increase the
random access delay of UEs, which affects the network performance KPI.
Therefore, the RNC dynamically adjusts the random access parameters according to the cell
load status. When a cell is lightly loaded, default random access parameters are used, which
minimizes the random access delay. When a cell is congested, optimized random access
parameters are used, which reduces the RTWP and increases network capacity to improve
network performance.
The gains provided by Adaptive RACH vary according to the application scenario. If a cell
has high RTWP due to too many random accesses, adjusting random access parameters can
reduce the RTWP by 0.3 dB to 0.5 dB or increase HSUPA throughput by 10%. If the high
RTWP is due to other factors such as external interference and RF channel faults, adjusting
random access parameters cannot provide obvious gains.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
The NodeB must be of RAN16.0 or later. The following base stations do not support this
feature:

BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, and DBS3800

3900 series base stations configured with the WBBPa

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

372

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

Other Features
NA

3.10.2 WRFD-151202 FACH Pool


Model
QM1SFACHPL00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
When the number of UEs in the CELL_FACH state exceeds a specified threshold, the RNC
decides whether the services initiated by UEs are NRT services. The RNC makes this decision
upon receiving a CELL UPDATE message from the UE in the URA_PCH or CELL_PCH
state. NRT services initiated in this situation will be transferred to an inter-frequency
neighboring cell within the same coverage area as the serving cell. This improves FACH
utilization in multi-carrier networks.

Benefits
This feature improves FACH utilization in multi-carrier networks by balancing UEs in the
CELL_FACH state among different carriers. This in turn relieves FACH congestion, reduces
service delay of UEs in the CELL_FACH state, and improves average HSDPA throughput of
the corresponding cells.

Description
In multi-carrier networks configured with the service steering policy, UEs in the
CELL_FACH state are unevenly distributed among different carriers. FACHs on a carrier with
a large number of UEs are more likely to be congested.
To resolve this issue, the FACH Pool feature is introduced to balance UEs in the
CELL_FACH state among carriers through P2F-triggered redirection. P2F refers to the
transition from the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state to the CELL_FACH state. During P2Ftriggered redirection, the RNC reads the CELL UPDATE message from the UE to determine
whether services initiated by the UE are NRT services. If so, the RNC sends the UE a CELL
UPDATE CONFIRM message containing the target frequency and target cell scrambling code
of the P2F-triggered redirection. Then the NRT services are transferred to an inter-frequency
neighboring cell within the same coverage area as the serving cell.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

373

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

NA

UE
The UEs must comply with 3GPP Release 5 V590 or later.

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

3.10.3 WRFD-151203 Camping Strategy Switch for


Mass Event
Model
QM1S0CSSME00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN16.0.

Summary
On multi-carrier networks with preferred camping, dramatic increases in traffic usually lead to
access congestion in preferentially camped cells and cause key performance indicators (KPIs)
to deteriorate. To alleviate access congestion and increase the radio resource control (RRC)
connection setup success rate, the Camping Strategy Switch for Mass Event feature detects
the access congestion and changes the network camping strategy from preferred camping to
random camping.

Benefits
During special events, this feature balances loads across cells using different carriers and
expands capacity for multi-carrier networks.

Description
This feature periodically measures the ratio of rejected RRC connection setup requests due to
power and code resource congestion to the total RRC connection setup requests in
preferentially camped cells. If the ratio of a preferentially camped cell is greater than or equal
to the related threshold, this feature automatically changes the network camping strategy to
random camping by modifying the system information (change the inter-frequency reselection
offset for idle mode to 0)sent to UEs. The modified system information increases the
probability that UEs in idle mode trigger inter-frequency reselection and ensures that all cells
allow random camping of UEs in idle mode. In this way, UEs in idle mode camp on cells
more easily and the load is more balanced between cells.
This feature resumes the preferred camping strategy at 04:40 every day after modification of
the system information.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

374

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

3 Radio & Performance

If preferred camping cell only supports R99 service, this feature has few gain because the
HSPA service can not bear on preferred camping cell, resulting in unbalanced loads among
multi-carriers.
This feature cannot be used in macro-micro intra-frequency scenario. For example, preferred
camping cell is macro cell 1 with intra-frequency micro, preferred camping strategy is
changed to random camping strategy by this feature when mass event. services in macro cell 2
of the same sector will handover with blind method to macro cell 1 when macro cell 2 in
congestion, failures happen at the area covered by micro.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

375

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Networking & Transmission &


Security

4.1 RAN Sharing


4.1.1 WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction
Package
Model
QW1SRANSIV00
QW1SRANSIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature enables multiple operators to share the same RAN equipment and have their own
independent cells. The same RAN equipment can provide different operators with rich and
personalized services.

Benefits
The most important and urgent factor for driving operators to share network is the substantial
CAPEX and OPEX saving. Approximately 30% 40% CAPEX and OPEX can be saved if
RAN is shared. Another advantage is the increased roll-out speed and enlarged coverage-area
that can result in a quick network deployment and a success of UMTS. On the other hand,
reduced independency results in co-operation between operators and some restrictions when
expanding.

Description
There is growing optimism among 3G license holders about the prospects of sharing 3G
network infrastructures. The primary motivation for this sharing is to rapidly launch service
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

376

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

and reduce the costs of deployment, thereby improving the overall financial health of the
industry.
Analysis of a typical 3G Capital Expenditure (CPEX) model reveals that a majority of the
upfront costs are related to establishing coverage (that is, access related CPEX). As shown in
Figure 2, approximately 70% of the CPEX involves acquiring the sites, access equipment,
civil works (that is, construction of the site, installation of the equipment) and laying the
transmission network. With 3G, these fundamental implementation issues will be further
complicated by the lack of sites, tighter environmental regulations, and health concerns
regarding the hazards of radiation. In view of these challenges faced by 3G license holders,
shared network infrastructure solutions need to be explored in order to reduce the financial
risks facing the industry, establish faster universal coverage and improve time-to-revenue.
Since the deployment cost of RAN takes up the most among the total network, so RAN
sharing would be a preferred approach to share the heavy deployment costs for mobile
networks among operators in the roll-out phase and to increase the network utilization. It can
offer advantages for all parties involved in UMTS.
With this feature, all the RAN elements are physically shared, including the RNC, NodeBs,
Sites, and transport equipment. By 'soft-splitting' a physical RAN into different logical RANs,
multi-operators can cover the same area with their own frequency with only one physical
RAN. Each operator deploys its own frequency including its own Mobile Network Code
(MNC) and each operator has individually assigned cells. RNC routes the UE according the
cell or MNC&MCC derived from the IMSI and the Network Resource Identify (NRI) derived
from TMSI/P-TMSI, when Iu-Flex is used. The following figure shows the RAN sharing
solution architecture.

In RAN sharing architecture, RNC is shared by multiple operators (maximum is 4), and the
CN networks are supplied by operators separately. For the shared RNC, both shared and nonshared NodeB/RNC could be connected. For each operator's CN network, Iu Flex may be
applied, and the decision could be made independently.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

377

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

RAN sharing solution does not require any UE release dependency. The call traffic is routed
to appropriate CN network belonging to the operator selected by UE. In the shared RAN,
inter-system handover and intra-system handover within each operator are handled normally.
A switch is supplied to indicate whether intra-system handover between operators would be
allowed. For broadcast service such as CBS and MBMS, the traffics will be restricted in each
operator's dedicated cells.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
Cannot work with WRFD-021311 MOCN Introduction Package at the same time.

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS RAN Sharing Introduction Service

4.1.2 WRFD-02130401 Dedicated Carrier for Each


Operator
Model
QW1SRANSIV00
QW1SRANSIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature enables the allocation of frequency resources to different operators for
independent operation.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

378

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Benefits
For license holders, distinct cost saving would be achieved, including the CAPEX and OPEX,
because all the RAN elements could be shared.

Description
RAN sharing solution is applicable for operators that have multiple frequency allocations, that
is, all operators have their own licenses. In this scenario, the RAN elements but not the radio
frequencies are shared between operators, as illustrated in the following figure.

In this solution, 3GPP Release 99 specific is applied. For multiple operators that share the
RAN, their own PLMN codes are transmitted on their dedicated carrier, that is, unique PLMN
code (composed by MCC and MNC) is broadcasted via system information within each
operator's dedicated cells.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS RAN Sharing Introduction Service

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

379

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.1.3 WRFD-02130402 Flexible Network Architecture


Model
QW1SRANSIV00
QW1SRANSIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature can meet the networking requirements of different operators.

Benefits
Various requirements can be met with the help of the flexible architecture. Differentiated
service and effective cost are also achievable.

Description
In RAN Sharing solution, the flexibility of the network architecture is well supported. The
involved interfaces are Iub, Iur, Iu, and Iu-BC.

Iu interface

CN network is supplied by operator separately. On Iu interface, each operator may employ Iu


Flex or not independently. The maximum number of CN nodes (MSC or SGSN) that can be
connected is the same between shared or non-shared RNC. For the shared RNC, the capacity
will be divided by all operators.
For example, as illustrated in the following figure, operator A adopts the Iu Flex while
operator B does not.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Iu-BC interface
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

380

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

To the shared RNC, maximum 4 CBCs can be connected, that is, each operator can have
a dedicated CBC, shown below.

With dedicated Iu-BC connection, each operator can independently deploy the Cell Broadcast
Service.

Iub interface
In the shared RAN, RAN elements could be shared by multiple operators, including
RNC and NodeBs. However, there might be the case that shared NodeBs and non-shared
NodeBs coexist. In this RAN sharing solution, both shared and non-shared NodeBs are
allowed to connect to the shared RNC. See the following figure.

Iur interface

The Iur interface is similar to the Iub interface. That is, both shared RNCs and non-shared
RNCs can be connected to a shared RNC.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

381

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS RAN Sharing Introduction Service.

4.1.4 WRFD-02130403 Mobility Control and Service


Differentiation
Model
QW1SRANSIV00
QW1SRANSIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
This feature provides the configuration of different services for multiple operators to meet
their personalized requirements.

Benefits
Based on the service differentiation mechanism, operators that share the RAN can deploy
different service provision strategies to their subscribers.

Description

Initial NAS message routing


In the dedicated carrier RAN sharing solution, each cell belongs to one operator. The
initial NAS message (for registration or call setup) will be routed to appropriate target
CN network, to which operator of the current cell (from which the call is initiated) also
belongs. As shown in the following figure for example, if UE initiates a call from one
cell belonging to operator B, then the initial NAS message will be routed to the CN
network of operator B.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

382

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

If the Iu Flex is adopted, then the NNSF will be applied right after the selection of CN
network, to decide which CN node should be the target of routing.

Differentiated and isolated CBS


CBS information content is broadcasted with a set of CBS SAs (service areas), and each
CBS SA is composed by a set of cells. In the dedicated carrier shared RAN, the CBS SA
is also operator dedicated, that is, each operator's CBS SA can be composed only by its
own cell. Therefore, the CBS is isolated between operators in the shared RAN.
Furthermore, since each operator can deploy a standalone CBS equipment, differentiated
and independent service provision is also achievable.

Differentiated and isolated MBMS


The MBMS is similar to the CBS. MBMS service is distributed in a set of MBMS
broadcast areas, also called "MBMS SA". Each MBMS SA is composed of a set of cells.
In the dedicated carrier shared RAN, the MBMS SA is also dedicated. MBMS service
initiated from dedicated SGSN is distributed (p-to-p or p-to-m) within operator dedicated
MBMS SAs, that is, operator dedicated cells.
Furthermore, differentiated and independent MBMS service provision is also achievable.

Mobility control
Inter-operator handover is usually forbidden by operators, but sometimes it is allowed. A
configurable flag is provided to indicate whether inter-operator intra-system handover is
allowed or not. The default setting is not allowed. The inter-system handover is handled
normally.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

383

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS RAN Sharing Introduction Service

4.1.5 WRFD-02130404 Independent License Control


Model
QW1SRANSIV00
QW1SRANSIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
With this feature, operators can have their independent capacity and choose optional features,
meeting different service and operation requirements.

Benefits
With independent license control, total capacity of the physical RNC will be shared by
operators, and each can take specific proportion.

Description
License control refers to the control of the capacity (Erlang, NodeB CE and PO) and optional
features (except RAN Sharing feature itself). For multiple operators that share the RNC,
independent capacity and optional features control for each operator is supplied.
Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

384

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

For independent capacity control, the total capacity could be split by multiple operators. Each
operator can get specific proportion of the total capacity based on its requirement, and the
actual capacity usage will be monitored and controlled.
For independent optional features control, each operator may choose different set of optional
features For example, one operator may choose some optional features but the others do not.
Most optional features can be controlled separately by operators. For example, if the MBMS
is chosen by operator A but not by operator B, then operator A can provide the MBMS, but
operator cannot provide the MBMS.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Other Features
WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS RAN Sharing Introduction Service

4.1.6 WRFD-02130405 Independent Cell-level


FM/PM/CM
Model
QW1SRANSIV00
QW1SRANSIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
With this feature, operators can monitor and maintain their own cells.

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

385

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Benefits
Providing Independent Cell-level FM/PM/CM

Description

Independent cell-level Fault Management


Most alarms are object related. For those alarms related to cells, they are contained only
in the data collection of the corresponding instance set. For those alarms not related to
cells or any objects, they are contained in all data collections of all instance sets. As each
instance set corresponds to only one manager, the operator dedicated alarms can only be
accessed by the owner FM manager.
For operations originated from the FM manager (that is, alarm handling operations,
setting operations), as the operated targets are alarms, they are processed in the same
way. Each manager can only operate the alarms in the corresponding instance set, that is,
the alarms dedicated to one operator.

Independent cell-level Performance Management


All counters are object related. For those counters related to cells, their statistical results
are contained only in the data collection of the corresponding instance set. For those
counters not related to cells, their statistical results are contained in all data collections of
all instance sets. As each instance set corresponds to only one manager, the operator
dedicated results can only be accessed by the owner PM manager.
For operations originated from the PM Manager (that is, job management operations,
threshold setting operations), as the operated targets are objects, they are processed in the
same way. Each manager can only operate the objects in the corresponding instance set,
that is, the objects dedicated to one operator. For example, each operator can only create
measurement jobs on his own cells. Dedicated cell-level measurement of each operator is
supported including NodeB CE utilization and cell traffic throughput. RAN also supports
non cell-level measurement, which is shared by operators. Items are RNC/NodeB
utilization, PA utilization and Iub capacity & throughput.

Independent cell-level Configuration Management


The configuration flows are the same in both sharing and non-sharing mode. The
difference lies in data, and is embodied in cell-level configuration.

Enhancement
None

Dependency

RNC
NA

NodeB
NA

UE
NA

Other Network Units


NA

CN
NA

Issue 01 (2013-12-09)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

386

RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description


RAN16.0 Optional Feature Description

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Other Features
WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package

Professional Service
Recommend to deploy this feature with UMTS RAN Sharing Introduction Service

4.1.7 WRFD-02130406 Transmission Recourse


Sharing on Iub/Iur Interface
Model
QW1SRANSIV00
QW1SRANSIP00

Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.0.

Summary
With this feature, operators can share Iub/Iur transmission resources to effectively use the
transmission bandwidth and reduce the operation cost.

Benefits
Transmission resource is costly. Shared transmission resource management strategy leads to
effective usage of the bandwidth, and will finally bring cost saving to all the operators sharing
the RAN.

Description
In the shared RAN, shared transmission resource management strategy is adopted on both Iub
and Iur interface.

Iub interface,
The Iub interface is composed of NodeB control port (NCP), CCPs, ALCAP link (not
applicable for IP transmission), OM path, and a number of user plan links.
For each NodeB, only one unique NCP could exist. Generally m